Home

Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2

Contents

1. Registering the DAC in msdb Success Setting database AccountingDB to read only mode Success Disconnecting users from database AccountingDB Success Preparing scripts to copy data from database AccountingDB to datab Success SEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Upgrading DAC metadata in msdb to reflect the new DAC version Success Save Report lt Previous Next gt Cancel FIGURE 3 12 Reviewing the result information on the Upgrade DAC page NOTE Data tier applications are a large and intricate subject See the following sources for more information Designing and Implementing Data tier Applications at http msdn microsoft com en us library ee210546 SQL 105 aspx Creating and Managing Data tier Applications at http msdn microsoft com en us library ee361996 VS 100 aspx Tutorials at http msdn microsoft com en us library ee210554 SQL 105 aspx Data tier Applications in SQL Server 2008 R2 white paper at http go microsoft com fwlink LinkID 183214 62 CHAPTER 3 Data Tier Applications High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements icrosoft SQL Server 2008 R2 delivers several enhancements in the areas of high M availability and virtualization Many of the enhancements are affiliated with the Windows Server 2008 R2 operating system and the Hyper V platform Windows Server 2008 R2 builds on the successes and foundation of Wi
2. 7 Preparing deployment script Success Creating database AccountingDB_066c5ae8 c87b 440f b78c 0ca39a Success Creating schema objects in database AccountingDB_O66c5ae8 c87b Success Renaming database AccountingDB_066c5ae8 c87b 440f b78c 0ca39 Success Registering the DAC in msdb Success Save Report lt Previous Next gt Cancel FIGURE 3 8 Viewing the deployment and results page associated with deploying the DAC Data Tier Applications NOTE Throughout this chapter you can also use Windows PowerShell scripts in con junction with data tier applications to do many of the tasks discussed such as Creating data tier applications m Creating server objects m Loading DAC packages from a file m Upgrading data tier applications m Deleting data tier applications If you are interested in learning more about building Windows PowerShell scripts for data tier applications you can find more information in the white paper Data tier Applications in SQL Server 2008 R2 at http go microsoft com fwlink LinkID 183214 Registering a Data Tier Application There may be situations in which a database administrator needs to create a data tier applica tion based on an existing database and then register and store the newly created DAC defini tion for the database in the msdb system database This execution often referred to as creat ing a DAC in place is achieved by using e
3. E delete Data tier Application OF x m 5 Summary Introduction Help Choose Method Summary Summary Delete DAC The following settings will be used to delete your DAC Application name Northwind Database name Northwind Delete method Delete registration lt Previous Ls Finish Cancel FIGURE 3 10 Viewing the Summary page when deleting a DAC Ensure that the application name database name and delete method are correct If the information is correct click Next to continue On the Delete DAC page take a moment to review the information This page com municates which actions failed or succeeded Unsuccessful actions have a link next to them in the Result column Click the link for detailed information about the error In addition you can click Save Report to save the results on the Delete DAC page to an HTML file Click Finish to complete the deletion process and close the wizard Data Tier Applications Upgrading a Data Tier Application Let us recall the past for a moment when updating changes to existing database schemas and database applications was a noticeably challenging task Database administrators usually created scripts that included the new or updated database schema changes to be deployed The other option was to use third party tools Both processes could be expensive time consuming and challenging to manage from a release or build perspective Today with SQL Server 2008 R2 data
4. FIGURE 4 11 Verifying that the VM is now highly available 16 To bring the VM online right click it under Services And Applications and then click Start Virtual Machine This action brings the VM online and starts it 82 CHAPTER 4 High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements Initiating a Live Migration of a SQL Server VM After an administrator has enabled CSV created a SQL Server 2008 R2 VM configured the automatic start option and made the VM highly available it is time to initiate a live migra tion Perform the following steps to initiate Live Migration 1 In the Failover Cluster Manager snap in if the cluster to be configured is not displayed in the console tree right click Failover Cluster Manager 2 Click Manage A Cluster and then select or specify the cluster Expand Nodes 3 In the console tree located on the left side select the node to which Live Migration will move the clustered VM 4 Right click the VM resource that is displayed in the center pane and then click Live Migrate Virtual Machine To Another Node 5 Select the node that the VM will be moved to in the migration as shown in Figure 4 12 After the migration is complete the VM should be running on the node selected W Failover Cluster Manager n View Help e9 Aml Hm S Failover Cluster Manager E Hyper v Cluster Protatype com amp EB Services and applications Services and applications Recent Cl
5. 12 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 4 00 8 00 PM PM PM AM AM AM PM PI AM AM AM Ready W FIGURE 5 7 The Managed Instances viewpoint Using the Managed Instances Viewpoint CHAPTER 5 r 95 96 Resource utilization for each managed instance of SQL Server is presented in the list view located at the top of the Utility Explorer Content pane Health state icons appear to the right of each managed instance and provide summary status for each instance of SQL Server based on the utilization category Three icons are used to indicate the health of each managed instance of SQL Server A green check mark indicates that an instance is well utilized and does not violate any policies A red arrow indicates that an instance is overutilized and a green ar row indicates underutilization The lower half of the dashboard contains tabs for CPU utiliza tion storage utilization policy details and property details for each managed instance In Figure 5 7 the instance CPU computer CPU file space and volume space columns for SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO1 and SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEOS5 are all underutilized In addi tion the following other elements are underutilized the Instance CPU for SQL2K8R2 03 INSTANCEO3 Computer CPU for SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCE02 SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO3 SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCE04 and SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEOS File Space for SQL2K8R2 02 IN STANCEO3 and Volume Space for SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCE02 SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO3 and SQL2K8
6. FIGURE 5 9 The Policy Details tab on the Managed Instances viewpoint NOTE To override the global policy for a specific managed instance select the Over ride The Global Policy option button Next specify the new overutilized and under utilized numeric values in the control boxes to the right of the policy description and then click Apply For example in Figure 5 9 the default global policy for the CPU of a managed instance is to consider the CPU overutilized when its usage is greater than 70 percent The global policy was overridden and the new setting is 50 percent Similarly the CPU underutilization setting is changed from zero percent to 10 percent m Property Details This tab shown in Figure 5 10 displays property details for the selected managed instance of SQL Server The Property detail information displays the processor name processor speed processor count physical memory operating system version SQL Server version SQL Server edition backup directory collation informa tion case sensitivity language whether or not the instance of SQL Server is clustered and the last time data was successfully updated Using the Managed Instances Viewpoint CHAPTERS 99 100 R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Lol File Edt View Tools Window Community Help H new Query D D D DllD OF bel S g Utility Explorer Content x Production Utility 5QL2K8R2 01 INSTANCE01 Managed Instances SQL Ser
7. Cstr Globals OverallPageNumber of CStr Globals OverallTotalPages Read Write Report Variable Another enhancement to the expression language is the new support for setting the value of a report variable Just as in previous versions of Reporting Services you can use a report variable when you have a value with a dependency on the execution time Reporting Services stores the value at the time of report execution and persists that value as the report continues to process That way as a user pages through the report the variable remains constant even if the actual page rendering time varies from page to page By default a report variable is Read Only which was the only option for this feature in the previous version of Reporting Services In SQL Server 2008 R2 you can now clear the Read Only setting as shown in Figure 9 6 when you want to be able to change the value of the report variable during report execution Reporting Services Enhancements Report Properties me x Page Setup Change report variables Code References Add Delete Name Value Read Only GroupExecutionTime Expr f m Help Cancel FIGURE 9 6 Changing report variables To write to your report variable you use the SetValue method of the variable For example assume that you have set up the report to insert a page break between group instances and you want to update the execution time when the group changes
8. Database administrators and Windows administrators used this tool to conduct validation tests to determine whether servers settings networks and storage affiliated with a failover cluster were set up correctly This tool was also used to verify whether or not prerequisite tasks were met and to confirm that the hardware supported a successful cluster implementation The Validate A Configuration Wizard tool included with Windows Server 2008 R2 still delivers inventory network storage and system configuration tests In addition the Failover Clustering product team made enhancements to the Validate A Configuration Wizard tool that further improve the testing ability of this tool Some of the enrichments include the fol lowing options Cluster Configuration e List Cluster Core Groups e List Cluster Network Information e List Cluster Resources High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements e List Cluster Volumes e List Cluster Services And Applications e Validate Quorum Configuration e Validate Resource Status e Validate Service Principal Name e Validate Volume Consistency Network e List Network Binding Order e Validate Multiple Subnet Properties m System Configuration e Validate Cluster Service And Driver Settings e Validate Memory Dump Settings e Validate System Drive Variable NOTE The wizard tests configurations and also lists information See Failover Cluster Step by Step Guide Validating Hardware fo
9. Expand the SQL Server instance and then expand the Management folder Expand the Data Tier Applications node right click the data tier application you want to delete and then select Delete Data Tier Application Review the information in the Introduction page and then click Next to begin the de letion process Select the Do Not Show This Page Again check box if you do not want the Introduction page displayed in the future when using the wizard On the Choose Method page specify the method you want to use to delete the data tier application as illustrated in Figure 3 9 The options are Delete Registration Detach Database and Delete Database Click Next to continue E delete Data tier Application a x Choose Method Introduction Help Choose Method Choose the method to delete the DAC Summary Delete DAC Delete registration Removes the DAC metadata from the instance The database and logins are not removed Detach database Removes the DAC metadata from the instance and detaches the database Logins are not removed Delete database Removes the DAC metadata from the instance and drops the database Logins are not removed lt Previous Ls Finish Cancel FIGURE 3 9 Choosing the method with which to delete the DAC with the Delete Data Tier Ap plication Wizard Deleting a Data Tier Application 57 58 Review the information displayed in the Summary page as shown in Figure 3 10
10. m The Utility Control Point UCP The UCP provides the central reasoning point for the SQL Server Utility by using SSMS to organize and monitor SQL Server resource health The UCP collects configuration and performance information from managed instances of SQL Server every 15 minutes Information is stored in the Utility Manage ment Data Warehouse UMDW on the UCP SQL Server performance data is then com pared to policies to help identify resource bottlenecks and consolidation opportunities m The Utility Management Data Warehouse UMDW The UMDW is a relational database used to store data collected by managed instances of SQL Server The UMDW database is automatically created on a SQL Server instance when the UCP is created Its name is sysutility_mdw and it utilizes the Simple Recovery model By default the collection upload frequency is set to every 15 minutes and the data retention period is set to 1 year The SQL Server Utility 23 24 The Utility Explorer user interface A component of SSMS this interface provides a hierarchical tree view for managing and controlling the SQL Server Utility Its uses include connecting to a utility creating a UCP enrolling instances deploying data tier applications and viewing utilization reports affiliated with managed instances and data tier applications You launch Utility Explorer from SSMS by selecting View and then choosing Utility Explorer The Utility Explorer dashboard and list view
11. n 2 e2 e2 e2 pa oe Ser pa Sea FIGURE 8 5 Count windows Aggregations You cannot perform aggregation operations on event streams directly instead you must first create a window to group data into periods of time that you can then aggregate You then create an aggregation as a method of the window and for all aggregations except Count use a lambda expression to assign the result to a field Streamlnsight supports the following aggregation functions a Avg m Sum a Min m Count Application Development 159 Assume you want to apply the Sum and Avg aggregations to field x in an input stream The following example shows you how to use these aggregations as well as the Count aggrega tion for each snapshot window var outputStream from eventWindow in inputStream Snapshot select new sum eventWindow Sum e gt e x avg eventWindow Avg e gt e x count eventWindow Count TopK A special type of aggregation is the TopK operation which you use to rank and filter events in an ordered window stream To order a window stream you use the orderby clause Then you use the Take method to specify the number of events that you want to send to the output stream discarding all other events The following code shows how to produce a stream of the top three events var outputStream from eventWindow in inputStream Snapshot from e in eventWindow orderby e x ascending e y descending select e Take
12. How To Enroll an Instance of SQL Server SQL Server Utility online at http msdn microsoft com en us library ee210563 SQL 105 aspx illustrates how to create a UCP with Windows PowerShell You will need to change the elements inside the quotes to reflect your own desired arguments NOTE When working with Windows Server 2008 R2 you can launch Windows PowerShell by clicking the Windows PowerShell icon on the Start Menu taskbar For more informa tion on SQL Server and Windows PowerShell see SQL Server PowerShell Overview at http msdn microsoft com en us library cc281954 aspx UtilityInstance new object Type Microsoft SqlServer Management Smo Server ComputerName UCP Name Sq1StoreConnection new object Type Microsoft SqlServer Management Sdk Sfc Sq1lStoreConnection Uti lityInstance ConnectionContext SqlConnectionObject Utility Microsoft SqlServer Management Utility Utility CreateUtility Utility SqlStoreConnection ProxyAccount ProxyAccountPassword Multi Server Administration UCP Post Installation Steps When the Create Utility Control Point Wizard is closed the Utility Explorer is invoked and you are automatically connected to the newly created UCP The UCP is automatically en rolled as a managed instance The data collection process also commences immediately The dashboards status icons and utilization graphs associated with the SQL Server Utility display meaningful information after
13. Introducing Microsoft Ross Mistry and Stacia Misner PUBLISHED BY Microsoft Press A Division of Microsoft Corporation One Microsoft Way Redmond Washington 98052 6399 Copyright 2010 by Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission of the publisher Library of Congress Control Number 2010925075 Printed and bound in the United States of America 123456789 WCT 543210 Distributed in Canada by H B Fenn and Company Ltd A CIP catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library Microsoft Press books are available through booksellers and distributors worldwide For further information about international editions contact your local Microsoft Corporation office or contact Microsoft Press International directly at fax 425 936 7329 Visit our Web site at www microsoft com mspress Send comments to mspinput microsoft com Microsoft Microsoft Press Access ActiveX DirectX Expression Expression Blend Hotmail IntelliSense Internet Explorer MS MSDN MS DOS MSN SharePoint Silverlight SQL Server Visual Basic Visual C Visual Studio Win32 Windows Windows Live Windows NT Windows Server and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respecti
14. e Sybase e Any database that can be accessed by using an OLE DB provider or an ODBC driver m Files e Delimited text files txt tab and csv e Files from Excel 97 through Excel 2010 e PowerPivot workbooks published to a PowerPivot enabled Microsoft SharePoint Server 2010 farm Data feeds e SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services Atom data feeds e SharePoint lists e ADO NET Data Services e Commercial datasets such as Microsoft Codename Dallas http pinpoint com en US Dallas TIP Anew feature in SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services is the ability to export an Atom data feed for any report whether you export from a native mode or from an inte grated mode report server If the PowerPivot client is installed on your computer when you perform the export PowerPivot detects the document type and opens a wizard for you to use to import the data directly into a table You might find it beneficial to get some of your data integrated in a report first and take advantage of Reporting Services support for calculations aggregations data sources and refresh schedules before you bring the data into PowerPivot The wizard walks you through the process of specifying connection information for the source and selecting data to import If your source is a database you can choose to select either tables or views or to provide a query for the data selection Regardless of the data source type the wizard gives you two options for filterin
15. 2009 12 01 2 The CREATE TABLE statement for Parallel Data Warehouse includes the following items m DISTRIBUTION Specifies the column to hash for distributing rows across all com pute nodes in Parallel Data Warehouse m CLUSTERED INDEX Specifies the column for a clustered index if you omit this item from the statement Parallel Data Warehouse stores the table as a heap PARTITION Specifies the boundary values of the partition and the column to use for partitioning the rows Data Management 119 120 In addition you can use a CREATE TABLE AS SELECT statement to create a table from the results of a SELECT statement You might use this technique when you are redistributing or defragmenting a table Here is an example of the syntax for a CREATE TABLE AS SELECT statement CREATE TABLE DimCustomer WITH C CLUSTERED INDEX CustomerID AS SELECT FROM DimCustomer Another option for creating tables is the CREATE REMOTE TABLE statement which you can use to export a table to a non appliance SQL Server database in an SMP architecture To use this statement you must ensure that the target database is available on the appliance s InfiniBand network Data Types Many SQL Server data types supported by SQL Server 2008 are also supported by Parallel Data Warehouse Character and binary strings are supported but you must limit the string length to 8 000 characters Another point to note is that Parallel Data Warehouse uses only
16. FIGURE 2 4 The SQL Server Instance Validation screen Review the Summary Of Instance Enrollment page and then click Next to enroll your instance of SQL Server The following actions will be automatically completed on the Enrollment Of SQL Server Instance page the instance will be prepared for enrollment the cache directory for the collected data will be created and the instance will be enrolled Review the results and click Finish to finalize the enrollment process Repeat the steps to enroll additional instances Enrolling SQL Server Instances 31 32 Enrolling SQL Server Instances by Using Windows PowerShell Windows PowerShell can also be used to enroll instances In fact scripting may be the way to go if there is a need to enroll a large number of instances into a SQL Server UCP Let s say you need to enroll 200 instances for example Using the Enroll Instance Wizard in SSMS can be very time consuming because the wizard is a manual process in which you can enroll only one instance at a time In contrast you can enroll 200 instances with a single script by using Windows PowerShell The following syntax illustrates how to create a UCP by using Windows PowerShell Change the elements in the quotes to match your environment UtilityInstance new object Type Microsoft SqlServer Management Smo Server ComputerName UCP Name Sq1StoreConnection new object Type Microsoft SqlServer Management Sdk Sfc SqlStoreConnection U
17. In SQL Server Management Studio connect to the SQL Server 2008 R2 Database En gine instance in which the UCP was created 2 Launch Utility Explorer by clicking View and then selecting Utility Explorer 3 In the Utility Explorer navigation pane click the Connect To Utility icon 4 In the Connect To Server dialog box specify the SQL Server instance running the UCP select the type of authentication and then click Connect 5 Connection to a Utility Control Point is complete Begin monitoring the health state and resource utilization by viewing the dashboards and viewpoints Utility Explorer in SQL Server Management Studio provides a tree view that includes nodes for monitoring and managing settings within the SQL Server Utility The summary dashboard is automatically displayed in the Utility Explorer Content pane when you connect to a UCP You can view additional dashboards and viewpoints by clicking the Managed Instances node or the Deployed Data Tier Applications node in the Utility Explorer navigation pane as dis played in Figure 5 5 Utility Explorer E Production Utility SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO1 ay Deployed Data tier Applications E Managed Instances 4 Utility Administration ve Utility Explorer Fa object Explorer FIGURE 5 5 Utility Explorer and the navigation tree Using the SQL Server Utility for Consolidation and Monitoring 89 The three main dashboards for monitoring and managing resource utilization and
18. Morgan Oslake Senior Program Manager Alan Brewer Senior Programming Writer and Tai Yee Program Manager II a Clustering High Availability Virtualization and Consolidation Symon Perriman Program Manager II Ahmed Bisht Senior Program Manager Max Verun Senior Program Manager Tai Yee Program Man ager Justin Erickson Program Manager Il Zhen Yu Zhao SDET Il Madhan Arumugam Program Manager Lead II and Steven Ekren Senior Program Manager m General Overview and Enhancements Sabrena McBride Senior Product Manager XV xvi And last but not least would like to thank my Microsoft mentors who assisted with my career development and transition to the Microsoft Technology Center in Silicon Valley Kelly Oliver Alex Viera Buck Woody Kevin Tsai and Burzin Patel Ross Mistry he chapters of Part II covering the BI features of Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Tie more complete and more accurate thanks to the efforts of the members of each product team who graciously participated in the review process I d like to thank the following people for their contributions SQL Server 2008 R2 Parallel Data Warehouse Barbara Kess Senior Technical Writer Christian Kleinerman Principal Product Unit Manager Paul Dyke Principal Architect Richard Tkachuk Principal Program Man ager Sadek Noureddine Software Development Engineer and Edward Melomed Senior Program Manager SQL Server 2008 R2 Master Data Services John McAllister
19. and Stop methods The Start method instanti ates the adapters using the adapter factories starts the event processing engine and calls the Start methods for each adapter The Stop method sends a message to the adapters that the query is stopping and then shuts down the query Your application must include the fol lowing code to start and stop the query object query StartQ wait for signal to complete the query query Stop The Management Interface Streamlnsight includes the ManagementService API which you can use to create diagnostic views for monitoring the CEP server s resources and the queries running on the server An other option is to use Windows PowerShell to access diagnostic information Diagnostic Views Your diagnostic application can retrieve static information such as object property values and statistical information such as a cumulative event count after a particular point in time or an aggregate count of events from child objects Objects include the server input and output adapters query operators schedulers and event streams You can retrieve the desired infor mation by using the GetDiagnosticView method and passing the object s URI as a method argument If you are monitoring queries you should understand the transition points at which the server records metrics about events in a stream The name of a query metric identifies the transition point to which the metric applies For example Tot
20. aspx In addition to step by step instructions on how to implement Hyper V and failover clustering this page also gives information on the requirements for using Hyper V and failover clustering which might be helpful because the steps in the following sections assume that a Hyper V cluster is already in place 3 For all nodes that you are including in the failover cluster install Windows Server 2008 R2 full installation or Server Core installation 4 Enable the Hyper V role on each node of the failover cluster 5 Install the Failover Clustering feature on each node of the failover cluster 6 Validate the cluster configuration by using the Validate A Configuration Wizard tool located in Failover Cluster Manager 7 Configure CSV 8 Create a SQL Server VM with Hyper V 9 Set up a SQL Server VM for Live Migration 10 Configure cluster networks for Live Migration Implementing Live Migration for SQL Server 2008 R2 75 76 Enabling CSV Assuming that the Hyper V cluster has already been built the next step is enabling CSV in Failover Cluster Manager Follow the steps in this section to enable CSV on a Hyper V failover cluster running on Windows Server 2008 R2 1 2 On a server in the Hyper V failover cluster click Start click Administrator Tools and then click Failover Cluster Manager In the Failover Cluster Manager snap in verify that CSV is present for the cluster that is being enabled If it is not in the
21. creating 190 PowerPivot for Excel 211 PowerPivot for SharePoint application database 203 architecture of 201 caching 203 content management 204 data feed libraries 205 data refreshing in 205 linked documents creating 205 overview of 10 189 201 Parallel Data Warehouse and 123 prerequisites for 201 System Service 202 203 PowerPivot Gallery 204 205 PowerPivot Managed Extension 203 PowerPivot Management Dashboard 206 PowerPivot reports 196 198 PowerPivot Web Service 203 205 206 PowerShell See Windows PowerShell premium editions See Datacenter edition Parallel Data Warehouse edition processor requirements 14 projection operation 155 publishing reports 180 182 Q query objects 163 query processing Parallel Data Warehouse 121 query templates 154 162 QueryTemplate object 154 R RAM requirements 14 registering DAC definitions 49 55 56 relationships in PowerPivot 194 relative references in expressions 183 RenderFormat global variable 169 170 replicated tables creating 118 120 Report Builder 3 0 183 Report Designer 123 Report Manager 184 186 Report Part Gallery 183 report variables 170 171 Report Viewer 186 Reporting Services 186 188 See also reports 212 PowerPivot for SharePoint reports alternate access mappings 187 cache configuring 179 180 on DAC deployment 54 data synchronization 173 data visualization enhancements 175 178 edit sessio
22. to you using shockproof pallets When it arrives you remove the appliance from the pallets plug it into a power source and connect it to your network Parallel Data Warehouse is a data warehouse appliance that includes all server networking and storage components required to host a data warehouse In addition your purchase of Parallel Data Warehouse includes cables power distribution units and racks Furthermore the components have redundancy to prevent downtime caused by a failure The vendor installs all software at the factory and configures Parallel Data Warehouse to balance CPU memory and disk space After you receive the Parallel Data Warehouse at your location you use a configu ration tool that Parallel Data Warehouse includes to complete the network setup and con figure appliance settings for your environment You can also install Microsoft or third party software to use when copying data between your corporate network and the appliance Processing Architecture A traditional data warehouse deployment of SQL Server is an SMP architecture in which iden tical processors share memory on a single server One physical instance of a database pro cesses all queries You can improve performance by partitioning the data thereby achieving multi threaded parallelization You can add higher powered servers with more CPU memory storage and networking capacity to scale up but the cost to scale up is high By contrast Parallel Data Wa
23. 0 The Parallel Data Warehouse data source extension provides support for the graphical query designer parameterized queries and basic trans actions but it does not support Windows integrated security or advanced transactions To use the Parallel Data Warehouse data source extension you must install the ADO NET data provider for Parallel Data Warehouse on the report server and each computer on which you create reports You can also use Parallel Data Warehouse as a source for report models By using Report Manager or the report server API you can generate a model from a Parallel Data Warehouse database For more precise control of the model you can use the Model Designer in Business Intelligence Development Studio Analysis Services and PowerPivot Parallel Data Warehouse is also a valid data source for Analysis Services databases and Excel PowerPivot models Using the OLE DB provider you can configure an Analysis Services cube to use either multidimensional online analytical processing MOLAP or relational online analytical processing ROLAP storage When using MOLAP storage Analysis Services extracts data from Parallel Data Warehouse and stores it in a separate structure for reporting and analysis By contrast when using ROLAP storage Analysis Services leaves the data in Parallel Data Warehouse At query time Analysis Services translates the multidimensional expression MDX query into a SQL query which it sends to the Parallel Data War
24. 127 128 Master Data Services Configuration Manager Before you can start using MDS to manage your master data you use Master Data Services Configuration Manager This configuration tool includes pages to create the MDS database configure the system settings for all Web services and applications that you associate with that database and configure the Master Data Services Web application On the Databases page of Master Data Services Configuration Manager you specify the SQL Server instance to use for the new MDS database and launch the process to create the database After creating the database you can modify the system settings that govern all MDS Web applications that you establish on the same server You configure system set tings to set thresholds such as time out values or the number of items to display in a list You can also use system settings to manage application behavior such as whether users can copy committed model versions or any model version and whether the staging process logs transactions For e mail notifications you can configure system settings to include a URL to Master Data Manager in e mails to manage the frequency of notifications and whether to send e mails in HTML or text format among other settings Most settings are configurable by using Master Data Services Configuration Manager You can change values for other settings directly in the System Settings table in the MDS database On the Web Configuration page
25. 3 When you need to include the rank in the output stream you use projection to add the rank to each event s payload This is accessible through the Payload property as shown in the following code var outputStream from eventWindow in inputStream Snapshot from e in eventWindow orderby e x ascending e y descending select e Take 3 e gt new x e Payload x y e Payload y rank e Rank Grouping When you want to compute operations on event groups separately you add a group by clause For example you might want to produce an output stream that aggregates the input stream by location and compute the average for field x for each location In the following example the code illustrates how to create the grouping by location and how to aggregate events over a specified column var outputStream from e in inputStream group e by e locationID into eachLocation from eventWindow in eachLocation Snapshot select new avgValue eventWindow Avg e gt e x locationId eachGroup Key 160 3 Complex Event Processing with StreamInsight Joins You can use a join operation to match events from two streams The CEP server first matches events only if they have overlapping time intervals and then applies the conditions that you specify in the join predicate The output of a join operation is a new event that combines pay loads from the two matched events Here is the code to join events from two input streams where field x
26. Analysis Expressions DAX to add custom aggregations calculations and filters to your report DAX is a new expression language for use with PowerPivot for Excel DAX formulas are similar to Excel formulas However rather than working with cells ranges or arrays as in Excel DAX works only with tables and columns You can use DAX either to create calculated columns or to create new measures Calculated Columns A calculated column is the set of values resulting from an expression that you apply to a table column or another calculated column For example you can concatenate values from two separate columns to produce a single string value that displays in a third column You can also perform mathematical operations manipulate strings look up values in related tables or compare values to produce results in a calculated column To add a calculated column click an empty cell under the Add Column column heading and type an expression in the formula bar In your report you can use the new calculated column just like any other column from your PowerPivot data An expression that calculates gross profit looks like this Sales Amount Total Product Cost Measures A measure is a dynamic calculation that is displayed in the value area of the PivotTable Its value depends on the current selection of items in rows and columns and in the report filter A measure differs from a calculated column in that the calculated column values persist in the P
27. D D Era Ces el GS Bh _ Utility Explorer Content x Policy Security Data Warehouse Review the utility management data warehouse UMDW configuration The UMDW is the database on the utility control point that contains all data collected from managed instances of SQL Server Select the data retention period for the UMDW Short l on 1 year UMDW Database Name sysutility_mdw Collection Set Upload Frequency Every 15 minutes Learn more about configuring the UMDW Restore Defaults Ey Discard Changes Ready FIGURE 2 9 Configuring the data retention period 5 Click the Apply button to save the changes Alternatively click the Discard Changes or Restore Defaults buttons as needed TER 2 Multi Server Administration Data Tier Applications sk application developers or database administrators what it was like to work with data driven applications in the past and most probably do not use adjectives such as easy enjoyable or wonderful when they describe their experience Indeed the development deployment and even the management of data driven applications in the past were a struggle This was partly because Microsoft SQL Server and Microsoft Visual Studio were not really outfitted to handle the development of data driven applica tions the ability to create deployment policies did not exist and application developers couldn t effortlessly hand off a single package t
28. Excel Data Options Show Hide Relationship FIGURE 10 3 The Create Linked Table button One of the benefits of using an Excel table as a source for a PowerPivot table is the ability to change the data in the Excel table to immediately update the PowerPivot table Because you cannot make changes to data in the PowerPivot window a linked table is the quickest and easiest way to edit the data in a PowerPivot table It is also a great way to try out different values in what if scenarios or to use variable values in a calculation Another reason you might consider using a linked table is to support Time Intelligence func tions in PowerPivot s formula language Examples of Time Intelligence functions include TotalMTD StartOfYear and PreviousQuarter Often source data includes dates and times but does not have the corresponding attributes to describe these dates and times such as month quarter or year You can create your own table in Excel with the necessary attributes link it to PowerPivot and then use Time Intelligence functions to support analysis involving comparative time periods Copying and Pasting If you do not need to change data after importing into PowerPivot you can copy the data from another Excel workbook and then in the PowerPivot window click the Paste button in the Clipboard group of the PowerPivot ribbon The Paste preview dialog box displays to shows the data to be pasted into PowerPivot Although you
29. GL H102 M Half Finger Gloves M GL H102 L Half Finger Gloves L J 0194 S Short Sleeve Classic Jersey S 0194 M Short Sleeve Classic Jersey M 1 0194 L Short Sleeve Classic Jersey L 0194 x Short Sleeve Classic Jersey XL ata 5 FIGURE 7 3 A collection Master Data Maintenance Master Data Manager is more than a place to define model objects It also allows you to create edit and update leaf members and consolidated members When you add a leaf member you initially provide values for only the Name and Code attributes as shown in Figure 7 4 You can also use a search button to locate and select the parent consolidated member in each hierarchy Member Information ld toh bef bk Name bese Jersey Code b5 9876 Hierarchy Name Parent Geography PAC Parts amp Accessories P ts Product Management CL Clothing Mandatory be in only licit hierarchies require all leaf members Consolidated members can xplicit hierarchy FIGURE 7 4 Adding a new leaf member After you save your entry you can edit the remaining attribute values immediately or at a later time Although a member can have hundreds of attributes and belong to multiple hier archies you can add the new member without having all of this information at your finger tips you can update the attributes at your leisure MDS always keeps track of the missing information displaying it as validation issue information at the bott
30. Hierarchy va Product Derived Category VERSION_1 Permissions User and inherited from group z Hierarchy Member Permissions Hierarchy Member Permission Summary lal Click the Edit button to add or edit permissions Seectfiter E Derived Hierarchy Category ijs Member Source Group Permission Version Bikes Update VERSION_1 KE MENER amp Pp HWholesale Read only VERSION_1 2 Retail Update VERSION_1 Er Root 3 Clothing Read only VERSION_1 E LiWholesale 4 Accessories Update VERSION_1 BZ 2 Retail al gt 7 1 Bikes 3 Clothing J accessories FIGURE 7 18 Member permissions within a hierarchy CHAPTER 7 Master Data Services More specifically the security configuration allows this user to edit only the Bikes and Ac cessories categories in the Retail group but the user cannot edit categories in the Wholesale group Let s look first at the effect of these permissions on the user s experience on the Pro ductCategory page shown in Figure 7 19 The lock icon in the first column indicates that the Components and Clothing categories are locked for editing However the user has Update permission for both Bikes and Accessories and can access the member menu for either of these categories The member menu as shown in the figure allows the user to edit or delete the member view its transactions and add an annotation Furthermore the user can add new members to the entity ProductCategory a X SS Ek
31. In Object Explorer connect to a SQL Server instance containing the DAC you want to upgrade 2 Expand the SQL Server instance and then expand the Management folder 3 Expand the data tier applications tree and select the data tier application that you want to upgrade 4 Right click the data tier application and select Upgrade Data Tier Application This starts the Upgrade Data Tier Application Wizard 5 Review the information on the Introduction page and then click Next to begin the up grade process Select the Do Not Show This Page Again check box if you do not want the Introduction page displayed in the future when using the wizard Upgrading a Data Tier Application 59 60 7 On the Select Package page specify the DAC package that contains the new DAC version to upgrade to Alternatively you can use the Browse button to specify the location of the DAC package When the DAC package is selected you can verify the DAC details such as the application name version number and description in the read only text boxes IMPORTANT Ensure that the DAC package and the original DAC have the same name When invoked the Detect Change page starts off by displaying a progress bar while the wizard verifies differences between the current schema of the database and the objects in the DAC definition The change detection results indicate whether the database objects have changed or remain the same If the database has changed you are warne
32. Master Data Manager as an entity based leaf member view you can query the Product view and see the results in SQL Server Management Studio as shown in Figure 7 12 select from mdm Product z 4 G EA Results E Messages ProductSubCategory ProductSubCategory Name Adjustable Race AR 5381 Parts amp Components Bearing Ball BA 8327 Parts amp Components BB Ball Bearing BE 2349 Parts amp Components Headset Ball Bearings BE 2908 Parts amp Components Blade BL 2036 Parts amp Components LL Crankarm CA 5965 Parts amp Components ML Crankarm CA 6738 Parts amp Components HL Crankarm CA 7457 Parts amp Components Chainring Bolts CB 2903 Parts amp Components VERSION_1 Chainring Nut CN 6137 Parts amp Components Silver FIGURE 7 12 Querying the Product subscription view Administration Of course Master Data Manager supports administrative functions too Administrators use it to manage the versioning process of each master data model and to configure security for individual users and groups of users When you need to make a copy of a master data model on another server as you would when you want to recreate your development environment on a production server you can use the model deployment feature in Master Data Manager Versions MDS uses a versioning management process to support multiple copies of master data With versioning you can maintain an official working copy of master data that no one can cha
33. Parallel Data Warehouse Architecture 0 0 eee eee eee eee 109 Data Warehouse Appliances 109 Processing Architecture 110 The Multi Rack System 110 Hub and Spoke Architecture 115 Data Management 0 eect eee tent kwis 115 Shared Nothing Architecture 115 Data Types 120 Query Processing 121 Data Load Processing 121 Monitoring and Management 0 c eee eee eee 122 Business Intelligence Integration 0 cece eee eee 123 Integration Services 123 Reporting Services 123 Analysis Services and PowerPivot 123 CHAPTER 7 Master Data Services 125 Master Data Management 0 125 Master Data Challenges 125 Key Features of Master Data Services 126 Master Data Services Components seursai eee eee eens 127 Master Data Services Configuration Manager 128 The Master Data Services Database 128 Master Data Manager 128 Data Stewardship sies dinite osans aea ETE a a Ee DE e RA 129 Model Objects 129 Master Data Maintenance 131 Business Rules 132 Transaction Logging 134 Contents integra ON gia cai cif ack en E eg aoa eos N Importing Master Data Exporting Master Data Administr atio Mgs saaa avid detaecececacabl acidleca decline e a N a Versions Security Model Deployment Programmabllity serrer einnar E E The Class Library Master Data Services Web Service Matching Functions CHAPTER 8 Complex Event Processing with Streaminsight Complex Event Processing cece cet
34. Points UCPs Utility Explorer dashboard 89 95 monitoring with 89 overview of 4 21 23 Standard edition 13 StreamInsight aggregation functions 159 160 core engine 146 deploying 149 150 development support 146 event models 147 event windows 156 159 events 147 as hosted assembly 149 join operations 161 ManagementService API 163 overview of 145 query objects 163 as standalone server 149 150 streams 147 TopK operation 160 union operations 161 subscription views MDS 136 support for book xix Sysprep 9 sysutility_mdw See Utility Management Data Warehouse UMDW T tables See also PivotTables calculated columns in 199 exporting 120 loading rows into 122 measures in 199 200 text box orientation in reports 174 Theater view PowerPivot Gallery 204 205 Time Intelligence functions PowerPivot 193 TopK operation 160 transaction logs for MDS 131 134 space allocation 118 Transact SQL functions 143 144 troubleshooting failover clustering 70 tumbling windows 157 158 U UCPs Utility Control Points See Utility Control Points UCPs UMDW Utility Management Data Warehouse See Utility Management Data Warehouse UMDW underutilization thresholds default 34 variance in 85 underutilized instances 91 Unicode compression 10 union operations 161 upgrading data tier applications DACs 59 61 upgrading hardware online 63 upgrading SQL Server in place upgrades 16 17 side by side mi
35. Principal Group Program Manager Reagan Templin Technical Writer and Val Lovicz Principal Program Manager m SQL Server StreamInsight Mark Simms Senior Program Manager Ap plication Platform Customer Advisory Team m SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services Thierry D Hers Group Pro gram Manager Neeraja Divakaruni Program Manager Carolyn Chau Prin cipal Program Manager Lead Lukasz Pawlowski Senior Program Manager Yi Liao Senior Program Manager Prash Shirolkar Program Manager Sean Boon Senior Program Manager and Robert Bruckner Senior Software Development Engineer m SQL Server PowerPivot Dave Wickert Principal Program Manager I d also like to thank Sabrena McBride Senior Product Manager for her review of the entire book Last but not least I d like to thank Ken Jones former product planner for inviting me to this project Karen Szall developmental editor for helping us get started and Maria Gargiulo project editor for patiently but firmly guiding us through the remainder of the project also thank Kathy Krause Rozanne Whalen and Kathleen Atkins for their roles during the copyediting technical review and proofreading processes And finally my thanks go also to Ross Mistry for his work on the chapters of Part and his encouragement during the inevitable challenges related to working with pre release software on a tight schedule Please accept our apologies if we missed anyone Stacia Misner Introdu
36. Query D D DllD e lel GS Sh g Utility Explorer Content Object Explorer Details xX Production Utility SQL2K R2 01 INSTANCEO1 Deployed Data tier Applications Name ion CPU uter CPU File 5 Volume T Instance Name AccountingDB Override SQL2KBR2 01 INSTANCEOS 22 AdventureWorks2005 3 iv g w Override SQL2K8R2 03 INSTANCEO3 2 AdventureWorks2008R2 o E 3 Override SQL2K8R2 03 INSTANCEO3 29 FinanceDB 7 Override SQLZKER2 01 INSTANCE04 Human Resources g 7 Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO4 2 Northwind C o Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCE03 D Test g 7 Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO3 By Test o Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO By Test g g Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO2 4 gt J CPU Utilization Storage Utilization policy Details Property Details Storage Utilization for AdventureWorks2005 E Group files by C Filegroup Volume 1Day p ypwolumetbaszacit c iii AdventureWorks2 EP adventureworks2 12 00 PM 6 00 PM 12 00 AM 6 00 AM FIGURE 5 12 The Storage Utilization tab on the Data Tier Applications viewpoint Using the Data Tier Application Viewpoint CHAPTERS 103 Policy Details The Policy Details tab shown in Figure 5 13 is where a DBA can view the global policies applied to a selected deployed data tier application The Policy Details tab can also be used to create a custom policy that overrides the default gl
37. SAN storage using a single consistent namespace for all volumes on all hosts This provides the foundation for Live Migration and allows for the movement of virtual machines between Hyper V hosts Dynamic virtual machine VM storage It is possible to add or remove virtual hard disk VHD files and pass through disks while a VM is running Support for hot plugging and hot removal of storage is based on Hyper V This is very handy when you are working with dynamic SQL Server 2008 R2 storage workloads which are continu ously evolving Second Level Address Translation SLAT Enhanced processor support and memory management can be achieved with SLAT which is a new feature supported with Hyper V in Windows Server 2008 R2 SLAT leverages Intel Virtualization Technol ogy VT Extended Page Tables EPT and AMD V Rapid Virtualization Indexing RVI technology in an effort to reduce the overhead incurred during mapping of a guest virtual address to a physical address for virtual machines This significantly reduces hypervisor CPU time and saves memory for each VM allowing the physical computer to do more work while utilizing fewer system resources Failover Clustering with Windows Server 2008 R2 If you re unfamiliar with failover clustering don t stop reading to run out and purchase a book on the topic this section begins with an overview of failover clustering It may surprise some readers to know that SQL Server failover clustering has been av
38. SQL Server Management Studio Of x File Edit View Tools Window Community Help i EL New Query iy D D ft Cs e bal GS Hh Utility Explorer Content Object Explorer Details Production Utility SQLZ2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO1 Managed Instances QL Server Instance Name Instance CPU Computer CPU File Space volume Space Policy Type Ge SQL2KER2 01 INSTANCEO1 Override ile SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCED2 C C Override Ek SQLZK8R2 O1 INSTANCE03 7 7 iC Override i SQL2KBR2 01 INSTANCEO4 C C Override ie SQLZK8R2 01 INSTANCE0S Override i SQL2KBR2 02 g O Global Ek SQLZKAR2 02 INSTANCEOZ C O Global ie SQL2K8R2 02 INSTANCEO3 lie SQL2K8R2 02 INSTANCEO4 ie SQLZK8R2 02 INSTANCEOS im SQL2KAR2 03 o O Override ie SQL2KBR2 O3 INSTANCEO2 C g G O Override ie SQLZK8R2 O3 INSTANCE03 C Override ie SOL2K8R2 03 INSTANCED4 g C C O Override CPU Utilization j Storage Utilization Policy Details Property Details CPU Utilization for SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEOL m Interval 1 Day 100 0 100 0 Computer 80 0 80 0 1 Month C 1 Year 60 0 60 0 40 0 40 0 20 0 20 0 wpa 0 0 0 0 12 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 4 00 8 00 AM AM AM PM PM PM AM AM AM Ready FIGURE 1 2 Identifying consolidation opportunities with the SQL Server Utility dashboard and v
39. Server is underutilized when itis less than C x Specify the file space utiization policies for all managed instances of SQL Server Data file Disk space of a data file is overutiized when itis greater than aaj x Disk space of a data file is underutilized when it is less than p Logfile Disk space of a log file is overutlized when itis greater than n z Disk space for a log file is underutiized when it is less than oJ Specify the computer CPU utilization policies for all managed instances of SQL Server CPU of a computer is overutilized when it is greater than i x CPU of a computer is underutilized when it is less than Specify the storage volume utilization policies for all managed instances of SOL Server Disk space of a storage volume is overutilized when it is greater than n4 x Disk space of a storage volume is underutilized when it is less than os z Lean more about global resource utilization policies for managed instances of SOL Server Restore Defaults Apply Discard FIGURE 2 6 Modifying global policies for managed instances Volatile Resource Policy Evaluation The final section on the Policy tab is Volatile Resource Policy Evaluation This section dis played in Figure 2 7 provides strategies to minimize unnecessary reporting noise and un wanted violation reporting in the SQL Server Utility You can choose how frequently the CPU utilization policies can be
40. Template pane select Data Tier Application Specify the name location and solution name for the data tier application as shown in Figure 3 2 and click OK New Project 21x Recent Templates NET Framework 4 Sort by Default z Search Installed Tem 2 Installed Templates n T Date E Visual Basic f SQL Server 2005 Database Project Database be ae gt 4 project for developing and deploying the E Other Languages SQL Server objects used by an application E Other Project Types iF SQL Server 2005 Server Project Database I SQL Server 2005 Wizard Database Modeling Projects Test Projects z SQL Server 2008 Database Project Database 7 6 SQL Server 2008 Server Project Database gt SQL Server 2008 Wizard Database Data tier Application Database Mal Visual Basic SQL CLR Database Project Database a c J Visual C SQL CLR Database Project Database Per user extensions are currently not allowed to load Enable loading of per user extensions Name Database2 Location c users administrator prototype documents visual studio 2010 Projects x Browse Solution Create new solution M Solution name Database2 IV Create directory For solution T Add to source control roc FIGURE 3 2 Selecting the Data Tier Application project template in Visual Studio 2010 Select Project and then click Add New Item to add and create a database object based on the Data Tier Application project t
41. Upgrading is also fairly quick and additional hardware is not required Because the names of the server and instances do not change during the upgrade process applications still point to the old instances As a result this strategy is less time con suming because there is no need to make changes to application connection strings The disadvantage is that there is less granular control over the upgrade process For ex ample when running multiple databases or components a DBA does not have the flexibility to choose individual items for upgrade Instead all databases and components are upgraded to SQL Server 2008 R2 at the same time Note also that the instance remains offline during the in place upgrade This means that if a mission critical database an application or an important line of business application is running a planned outage is required Furthermore if a disaster transpires during the upgrade the rollback strategy can be a complex and time consuming affair A DBA might have to install the operating system from scratch and then install SQL Server and restore all of the SQL Server data SQL Server 2008 R2 High Level In Place Strategy The high level in place upgrade strategy for upgrading to SQL Server 2008 R2 consists of the following steps 1 Ensure that the instance of SQL Server you plan to upgrade meets the hardware and software requirements for SQL Server 2008 R2 2 Review the deprecated and discontinued features in SQ
42. Web services You can also import data by linking to tables in Excel or simply by copying and pasting data Each data source that you add to the workbook becomes a separate table External Data When your data comes from an external data source you use the applicable button in the Get External Data group of the ribbon in the PowerPivot window as shown in Figure 10 2 The button you choose launches the Table Import Wizard for the type of data that you are importing Home Design Be Paste Append E From Data Feeds P ia Data Type Whole Number Sort Smallest to Largest E Freeze p z i K E From Text I Paste Replace ou Format Whole Number Z sortlargestto Smallest A Column Width Paste From From Refresh PivotTable Siar ee Clear All 33 Copy Database Report UJ From Other Sources 9 Sa 9 Clear Sort Filters Clipboard Get External Data Reports Formatting Sort and Filter View FIGURE 10 2 The Get External Data group in the PowerPivot window You can choose from a wide variety of data sources Databases e SQL Server 2005 SQL Server 2008 SQL Server 2008 R2 and Windows Azure e Microsoft Office Access 2003 Access 2007 and Access 2010 e SQL Server 2005 Analysis Services SQL Server 2008 Analysis Services and SQL Server 2008 R2 Analysis Services e Oracle 9i Oracle 10g and Oracle 11g e Teradata V2R6 and Teradata V12 e Informix PowerPivot for Excel 191 e IBM DB2 8 1
43. a report that displays sum marized sales but also allows the user to toggle a report item to display the associated details Rather than export all of the details when the export format is not interactive you can easily omit those details from the rendered output by using the following expression in the Hidden property of the row group containing the details iif RenderFormat IsInteractive False True Page Numbering Speaking of global variables you can use the new Globals OverallPageNumber and Globals OverallTotalPages variables to display the current page number relative to the entire report and the total page count respectively You can use these global variables which are also known as built in fields in page headers and page footers only As explained later in this chapter in the Pagination Properties section you can specify conditions under which to reset the page number to 1 rather than incrementing its value by one The variables Globals PageNumber and Globals TotalPages are still available from earlier versions You can use them to display the page information for the current section of a report Figure 9 5 shows an example of a page footer when the four global variables are used together Section Page 1 of 4 Overall 1 of 16 FIGURE 9 5 Global variables for page counts The expression to produce this footer looks like this Section Page CStr Globals PageNumber of CStr Globals TotalPages Overall
44. adventureworks2005 0 primary E Log File s ES primary if Adventure J Log File s 0 0 MB E master 12 00PM 6 00PM 12 00AM 6 00 AM FIGURE 5 8 The Storage Utilization tab on the Managed Instances viewpoint Independent of how the files are grouped health status is communicated for every data base filegroup database file or volume For example the green arrows in Figure 5 8 indicate that all databases filegroups and data files are underutilized No health states are shown as overutilized Once again the display intervals for the graphs are changed by selecting one of the following options e 1 Day Displays data in 15 minute intervals e 1Week Displays data in one day intervals e 1 Month Displays data in one week intervals e 1Year Displays data in one month intervals Policy Details DBAs can use the Policy Details tab shown in Figure 5 9 to view the global policies applied to a selected managed instance of SQL Server In addition the Policy Details tab can be used to create a custom policy that overrides the default global policy applied to a selected managed instance of SQL Server The display is broken into the following four policies that can be viewed or modified e Managed Instance CPU Utilization Policies e File Space Utilization Policy e Computer CPU Utilization Policies e Storage Volume Utilization Policies CHAPTER 5 Consolidation and Monitoring R Microsoft SQL Server Management S
45. at http msdn microsoft com en us library ee210549 SQL 105 aspx Visual Studio 2010 and Data Tier Application Projects By leveraging the new project DAC template in Visual Studio 2010 data tier developers can create new data tier applications from scratch or edit existing data tier applications by importing them directly into a project Data tier developers then add database objects such as tables views and stored procedures to the data tier application project Data tier devel opers can also define specific deployment requirements for the data tier application When the data tier application project is complete the data tier developer creates a single unit of deployment known as a DAC file package from within Visual Studio 2010 This package is delivered to a database administrator who deploys it to one or more SQL Server 2008 R2 instances Alternatively database administrators can use the DAC package to upgrade an existing data tier application that has already been deployed Launching a Data Tier Application Project Template in Visual Studio 2010 The following steps describe how to launch a data tier application project template in Visual Studio 2010 1 Launch Visual Studio 2010 2 In Visual Studio 2010 select File and then select New Project 3 In the Installed Templates list expand the Database node and then select SQL Server Visual Studio 2010 and Data Tier Application Projects 45 46 4 5 In the Project
46. configuration options 53 with Deploy Data Tier Application Wizard 52 55 overview of 4 report for 54 in Visual Studio 2010 45 46 deploying StreamInsight 149 150 deploying UCPs with Create Utility Control Point Wizard 26 28 prerequisites for 25 26 report saving 28 with Windows PowerShell 28 detaching DAC database 56 Developer edition 13 diagnostic views StreamInsight 163 disconnecting from UCPs 34 disk space consumption 25 disk space requirements 15 DMS Data Movement Service 112 document libraries 204 205 DomainScope property reports 173 DWLoader 122 Dwsql 122 dynamic report formatting 169 170 172 173 dynamic virtual machine storage 64 edge event model 147 edit sessions 183 enrolling instances 29 32 enterprise data warehousing See Parallel Data Warehouse Enterprise edition 12 29 entities MDS 129 130 event classification 154 event stream objects 154 aggregation operations 159 160 consumer objects 162 event types 150 151 event windows 156 159 Excel add ins See PowerPivot for Excel Excel tables linking to PowerPivot tables 193 Excel workbooks 173 193 exporting master data 136 137 exporting tables 120 Express edition 13 expression language 165 171 See also Data Analysis Expressions DAX expressions 183 Extended Protection for Authentication 10 Extract Data Tier Application Wizard 45 49 51 extracting DACs data tier applications 49 51 F Failover Cluster Mana
47. consoli dation efforts are discussed in the next sections These dashboards and viewpoints are m The SQL Server Utility dashboard m The Managed Instance viewpoint m The Data Tier Applications viewpoint Using the SQL Server Utility Dashboard The SQL Server Utility dashboard is the starting place for obtaining summary information about managed instances of SQL Server and deployed data tier applications in the SQL Server Utility The summary of the data as illustrated in Figure 5 6 is sectioned into nine parts and can be viewed in the Utility Explorer Content pane by clicking a Utility Control Point which is the top node in the Utility Explorer tree R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio _jorx File Edit View Tools Window Community Help SL new Query D D D DllD 25 el Gb y Utility Explorer Content well Utilized 5 Managed Instances 14 well utilized 7 Overutilized 6 Overutilized 2 lized 6 lized 2 underutilized 0 El Underutilized 0 Hno Data Available 3 Papka bret Hno Data Available 0 Managed Instan Overutilized ces Data tier Applications with Overutilized Resources Overutilized Instance CPU C1 0 14 Overutilized Data tier Application CPU Cs 0 9 Overutilized Database Files 0 14 Overutilized Database Files 0 9 Overutilized Storage Volumes ME 6 14 Overutilized Storage Volumes MM lt 2 9 Overutilized Computer CPU C _ 0 14 Overu
48. discussion in almost every SQL Server architecture design session or executive briefing session mainly because organizations are beginning to understand the immediate and long term benefits virtualization can offer them SQL Server virtualization not only promises to be very positive and rewarding from an environmental perspective reducing power and thermal costs which translate to green IT it also promises to help organizations achieve strategic business objectives and consolidation goals including lower hardware costs smaller data centers and less management associated with SQL Server As a result increasing numbers of organizations are showing interest in virtualizing their SQL Server workloads including their test staging and even production environments This trend toward virtualization has undoubtedly become stronger with the release of Windows Server 2008 R2 which includes Live Migration and Cluster Shared Volumes CSV By leverag ing Live Migration and CSV organizations can achieve high availability for SQL Server virtual machines VMs In addition it is possible to move virtualized SQL Server 2008 R2 guest oper ating systems between physical Hyper V hosts without any perceived downtime Live Migration Support Through CSV Live Migration is a new Hyper V feature in Windows Server 2008 R2 that is used to increase high availability of SQL Server VMs By leveraging the new Live Migration feature organiza tions can transparently
49. edition however it differs by supporting up to 256 logical processors more than 25 managed instances of SQL Server enrolled into a single Utility Control Point unlimited virtualization multi instance dashboard views and drilldowns policy based resource utilization evaluation high scale complex event processing with Microsoft SQL Server StreamInsight and the potential to sustain up to the maximum amount of memory the operating system will support Parallel Data Warehouse New to the family of SQL Server editions is SQL Server 2008 R2 Parallel Data Warehouse It is a highly scalable appliance for enterprise data warehousing SQL Server 2008 R2 Parallel Data Warehouse uses massively parallel processing MPP technology and hub and spoke architecture to support the largest data warehouse and BI workloads from tens or hundreds of terabytes to more than 1 petabyte in a single solution SQL Server 2008 R2 Parallel Data Warehouse appliances are pre built from leading hardware venders and include both the SQL Server software and appropriate licenses Core Editions The traditional Enterprise and Standard editions of SQL Server are considered to be core edi tion offerings in SQL Server 2008 R2 The following section outlines the features associated with both SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise and Standard Enterprise SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise delivers a comprehensive trusted data platform for demanding mission critical applications BI solution
50. efficiently with large volumes of columnar data in memory For example VertiPaq mode allows you to very quickly sort and filter millions of rows of data Furthermore you can store workbooks on your local drive because VertiPaq compresses the data by tenfold on average Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot The Atom Data Feed Provider Last the add in installs an Atom data feed provider to allow you to import data from Atom data feeds into a PowerPivot workbook A data feed provides data to a client application on request The structure remains the same each time you request data but the data can change between requests Usually you identify the online data source as a URL addressable HTTP endpoint The online data source or data service responds to requests at this endpoint by returning an atomsvs document that describes how to retrieve the data feed When you open an atomsvc document the PowerPivot Atom data feed provider detects the file type and prompts you to load data into PowerPivot When you confirm the load operation the provider connects to the data service which in turn encapsulates the data in XML by using the Atom 1 0 format and sends the data to the provider Data Sources Your first step in the process of developing a PowerPivot workbook is to create data sources and import data into the workbook You can import data from a variety of external data sources including relational or multidimensional databases text files and
51. existing file is not automatically overwritten Instead an exclamation mark appears next to the Browse button The Next button on the page is also disabled until you change the name you specified or select the Overwrite Existing File check box After you have entered all the DAC properties click Next to continue On the Validation And Summary page illustrated in Figure 3 6 review the informa tion presented in the DAC properties summary tree because these settings are used to extract the DAC you specified The wizard checks and validates object dependencies Data Tier Applications 10 confirms that the information is supported by the DAC and displays DAC object issues DAC object warnings and DAC objects that are supported If there are no issues click Next to continue You also have the option to click Save Report to capture the entire report amp Extract Data tier Application Bel x Validation and Summary Introduction Help S ti et Properties Summary Validation and Summary The following settings will be used to extract your DAC Build Package Application name AccountingDB Version 1 0 0 0 Description Corporate Accounting Application Version 1 Save to DAC package file D DAC AccountingDB dacpac B DAC objects Objects supported in a DAC 44 Save Report lt Previous Ls Einish Cancel FIGURE 3 6 The Extract Data Tier Application Wizard s Validation And Summary page NOTE The Ne
52. for business critical applications such as SQL Server 2008 R2 The combination of the two prod ucts produces an impressive package With these two products an organization can achieve maximum performance scalability reliability and availability while at the same time reducing the total cost of ownership associated with its database platform It is a best practice to leverage Windows Server 2008 R2 as the underlying operating system when deploying SQL Server 2008 R2 because the new and enhanced capabilities of Windows Server 2008 R2 can enrich an organization s experience with SQL Server 2008 R2 The new capabilities that have direct impact on SQL Server 2008 R2 include Maximum scalability Windows Server 2008 R2 is capable of achieving unprece dented workload size dynamic scalability and across the board availability and reli ability For instance Windows Server 2008 R2 supports up to 256 logical processors and 2 terabytes of memory in a single operating system instance When SQL Server 2008 R2 runs on Windows Server 2008 R2 the two products together can support more intensive database and BI workloads than ever before SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements Hyper V improvements Building on the approval and success of the original Hyper V release Windows Server 2008 R2 delivers several new capabilities to the Hyper V platform to further improve the SQL Server virtualization experience First availability can be stepped up wit
53. for the report execution process to complete A workaround for this scenario is to create a subscription that uses the NULL deliv ery provider to populate the cache in advance of the first user s request In SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services a better solution is available A new feature called Cache Refresh allows you to establish a schedule to load reports into cache In addition you can configure Cache Refresh to load shared datasets into cache to extend the perfor mance benefit to multiple reports Caching shared datasets is not only helpful for reports but also for any dataset that you use to populate the list of values for a parameter To set up a schedule for the Cache Refresh you must configure stored credentials for the data source Then you configure the caching expiration options for the shared dataset and create a new Cache Refresh Plan as shown in Figure 9 16 A ResellerSales Report Manager Windows Internet Explorer 4 Oj xj lt p Favorites 93 E Suggested Sites Web Slice Gallery http vegas Reports Pages CacheRefreshProperties aspx ItemF XxX lo Bing p e 3 G Home Contoso BI Reseller5ales Report M X ici X Pager Safety gt Tools Home gt Datasets Home My Subscriptions Site Settings Help SQL Server Reporting Services EA Fat Cache Refresh Plan ResellerSales Description Refresh Shared Dataset ResellerSales Refr
54. for very large databases because of the duplicate amount of storage that is required during the migration process SQL Server 2008 R2 High Level Side by Side Strategy The high level side by side migration strategy for upgrading to SQL Server 2008 R2 consists of the following steps 1 Ensure that the instance of SQL Server you plan to migrate to meets the hardware and software requirements for SQL Server 2008 R2 Review the deprecated and discontinued features in SQL Server 2008 R2 by referring to SQL Server Backward Compatibility at http msdn microsoft com en us library cc707787 SQL 105 aspx Although you will not upgrade a legacy instance to SQL Server 2008 R2 it is still ben eficial to run the SQL Server 2008 R2 Upgrade Advisor to ensure that the data being migrated to the new SQL Server 2008 R2 is supported and that there is nothing sug gesting that a break will occur after migration Procure hardware and install the operating system of your choice Windows Server 2008 R2 is recommended Install the SQL Server 2008 R2 prerequisites and desired components Migrate objects from the legacy SQL Server to the new SQL Server 2008 R2 database platform Point applications to the new SQL Server 2008 R2 database platform Decommission legacy servers after the migration is complete Installation Upgrade and Migration Strategies 19 Multi Server Administration ver the years an increasing number of organizations ha
55. functions refer to the Master Data Services Functions Transact SQL topic in SQL Server 2008 R2 Books Online at http msdn microsoft com en us library ee633712 SQL 105 aspx 144 Master Data Services Complex Event Processing with StreamInsight icrosoft SQL Server StreamInsight is a complex event processing CEP engine This M technology is a new offering in the SQL Server family making its first appearance in SQL Server 2008 R2 It ships with the Standard Enterprise and Datacenter editions of SQL Server 2008 R2 StreamInsight is both an engine built to process high throughput streams of data with low latency and a Microsoft NET Framework platform for devel opers of CEP applications The goal of a CEP application is to rapidly aggregate high volumes of raw data for analysis as it streams from point to point You can apply analyti cal techniques to trigger a response upon crossing a threshold or to find trends or excep tions in the data without first storing it in a data warehouse Complex Event Processing Complex event processing is the task of sifting through streaming data to find meaningful information It might involve performing calculations on the data to derive information or the information might be the revelation of significant trends As a development plat form StreamInsight can support most types of CEP applications that you might need Complex Event Processing Applications There are certain industries that
56. gt B Lower values are better Query results E Auto Update Help OK Cancel Field name Operator Value KIMI E Update Error FIGURE 9 22 SharePoint list Query Designer SharePoint Unified Logging Service In SharePoint integrated mode you now have the option to view log information by using the SharePoint Unified Logging Service After you enable diagnostic logging the log files capture information about activities related to Reporting Services in Central Administration calls from client applications to the report server calls made by the processing and rendering engines in local mode calls to Reporting Services Web pages or the Report Viewer Web Part and all other calls related to Reporting Services within SharePoint Having all SharePoint related activity including the report server in one location should help the troubleshooting process Reporting Services Enhancements Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot any business intelligence BI solutions require access to centralized cleansed data M in a data warehouse and there are many good reasons for an organization to continue to maintain a data warehouse for these solutions There are even self service tools available that allow users to build ad hoc reports from this data But for a variety of reasons business users cannot limit thei
57. gt r FIGURE 7 20 Mixed permissions for a derived hierarchy Administration CHAPTER 7 141 142 Model Deployment When you have finalized the master data model structure you can use the model deploy ment capabilities in Master Data Manager to serialize the model and its objects as a package that you can later deploy on another server In this way you can move a master data model from development to testing and to production without writing any code or moving data at the table level The deployment process does not copy security settings Therefore after moving the master data model to the new server you must grant the users access to func tional areas and configure permissions To begin the model deployment you use the Create Package wizard in the System Admin istration area of Master Data Manager You specify the model and version that you want to deploy and whether you want to include the master data in the deployment When you click Finish to close the wizard Master Data Manager initiates a download of the package to your computer and the File Download message box displays You can then save the package for deployment at a later time When you are ready to deploy the package you use the Deploy Package wizard in Master Data Manager on the target server and provide the wizard with the path to the saved pack age The wizard checks to see whether the model and version already exist on the server If so you have the optio
58. in violation before reporting the CPU as overutilized The default evaluation period for processor overutilization is 1 hour 6 hours 12 hours 1 day and 1 week can also be selected The default percentage of data points that must be in violation before a CPU is reported as being overutilized is 20 percent The options range from 0 per cent to 100 percent Managing Utility Administration Settings CHAPTER 2 35 36 File Edit Yiew Tools Window Community Help Anwer Oh D D S Ds oF lS e R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio BEE Utility Explorer Content Policy Security Data Warehouse When you modify a policy there will be a delay before the resources utilization policy indicator is updated in the viewpoints Global Policies for Data tier Applications Global Policies for Managed Instances Volatile Resource Policy Evaluation How frequently should CPU utilization policies be in violation before reporting it as overutiized Evaluate SQL Server Utility policies over this moving time window Short Long 1 hour Percent of SOL Server Ultity policies in violation during the time window before CPU is reported as overutized 0 10 20 Over 1 hour there will be 4 policy evaluations and 1 must be in violation before the CPU is marked as overutiized How frequently should CPU utilization policies be in violation before reporting it as underutilized Evaluate SOL Server Util
59. is created for the collected data and then the instance is enrolled into the designated UCP IMPORTANT A UCP created on SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise can have a maximum of 25 managed instances of SQL Server If more than 25 managed instances are required then you must utilize SQL Server 2008 R2 Datacenter Enrolling SQL Server Instances 29 30 Managed Instance Enrollment Prerequisites As with many of the other tasks in this chapter certain conditions must be satisfied to suc cessfully enroll an instance You must have administrator privileges on the instance of SQL Server The instance of SQL Server must be SQL Server 2008 R2 or higher The SQL Server edition must support instance enrollment The instance of SQL Server cannot be enrolled with any other UCP The instance of SQL Server cannot already be a UCP The instance of SQL Server must have the utility collection set installed The collection sets on the specified instance of SQL Server must be stopped The SQL Server Agent service on the specified instance must be started and configured to start automatically The SQL Server Agent proxy account cannot be a built in account such as Network Service The SQL Server Agent proxy account must be a valid Windows domain account on the specified instance Enrolling SQL Server Instances by Using SSMS The following steps should be followed when enrolling a SQL Server instance via SSMS In Utility Explorer connect to the des
60. is the same value in each event This code creates a new event containing fields x and y from the first event and field y from the second event var outputStream from e1 in inputStream1 join e2 in inputStream2 on e1 x equals e2 x select new el x el y e2 y Another option is to use a cross join which combines all events in the first input stream with all events in the second input stream You specify a cross join by using a from clause for each input stream and then creating a new event that includes fields from the events in each stream By adding a where clause you can filter the events in each stream before the CEP server performs the cross join The following example selects events with a value for field x greater than 5 from the first stream and selects events with a value for field y less than 20 from the second stream performs the cross join and then creates a stream of new events containing field x from the first event and field y from the second event var outputStream from el in inputStream1 from e2 in inputStream2 where el x gt 5 amp amp e2 y lt 20 select new el x e2 y Unions You can also combine events from multiple streams by performing a union operation You can work with only two streams at a time but you can cascade a series of union operations if you need to combine events from three or more streams as shown in the following code var outputStreamTemp inputStream1 Union inputStream2 var outp
61. move SQL Server 2008 R2 VMs from one Hyper V physical host to another Hyper V physical host within the same cluster without disrupting the services of the guest operating system or SQL Server application running on the VM This is achieved via an intricate process First all VM memory pages are transferred from the source Hyper V physi cal host to the destination Hyper V physical host Second any VM modifications to the VMs memory pages on the source Hyper V physical host are tracked These tracked and modified pages are transferred to the physical Hyper V target computer Third the storage handles for the VMs VHD files are moved to the Hyper V target computer Finally the destination VM is brought online The Live Migration feature is supported only when Hyper V is run on Windows Server 2008 R2 Live Migration can take advantage of the new CSV feature within failover clustering in Windows Server 2008 R2 The CSVs let multiple nodes in the same failover cluster concur rently access the same logical unit number LUN Equally important because a Hyper V cluster must be formed as a prerequisite task Live Migration requires the failover clustering feature to be added and configured on all of the servers running Hyper V In addition the Hyper V cluster hosts require shared storage for the cluster nodes This can be achieved by either an iSCSI Serial Attached SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel Storage Area Network SAN Figure 4 5 illustrates a four n
62. network includes redundancy The Control Node The control node is in the control rack and manages client authentication accepts client con nections to Parallel Data Warehouse manages the query execution process which it distrib utes across the compute nodes and serves as the central point for all hardware monitoring To support high availability the control node is a two node active passive cluster in which the passive node instantly takes over if the active node fails for any reason The control node also contains a SQL Server instance To support the distributed architecture of Parallel Data Warehouse the control node con tains the MPP Engine the Data Movement Service DMS and Windows Internet Information Services IIS as shown in Figure 6 2 The MPP Engine coordinates parallel query processing storage of appliance wide metadata and configuration data and authentication and authori zation for the appliance and databases The DMS which runs on most appliance nodes is the communication interface for copying data between appliance nodes IIS hosts a Web applica tion called the Admin Console that you access by using Windows Internet Explorer and use to manage and monitor the appliance status and query performance You can connect to the Parallel Data Warehouse control node by using a variety of client access tools Parallel Data Warehouse integrates with SQL Server 2008 R2 Business Intelligence Scalable Data Warehousing Deve
63. not want the Introduction page displayed in the future when using the wizard 5 On the Select Package page specify the DAC package you want to deploy Alterna tively use the Browse button to specify the location for the DAC package 6 When the DAC package is selected verify the DAC details such as the application name version number and description in the read only text boxes as shown in Fig ure 3 7 Click Next to continue Data Tier Applications 7 fr Deploy Data tier Application oix J Select Package Introduction Help Select the DAC package to deploy Update Configuration Summary DAC package file name with the dacpac extension Deploy DAC D DACAccountingDB dacpac DAC details Application name AccountingD B Version firooo Description Corporate Accounting Application Version 1 lt Previous Next gt Finish Cancel FIGURE 3 7 Specifying a DAC package to deploy with the Deploy Data Tier Application Wizard NOTE Ifa database with the same name already exists on the instance of SQL Server the wizard cannot proceed The wizard then analyzes the DAC package to ensure that it is valid If the DAC package is valid the Update Configuration page is automatically invoked Otherwise an error is displayed You need to address the error s and start over again On the Update Configuration page specify the database deployment properties The options include Name Speci
64. of Master Data Services Configuration Manager you asso ciate the Master Data Services Web application Master Data Manager with an existing Web site or create a new Web site and application pool for it You can also opt to enable the Web service for Master Data Manager to support programmatic access to the application The Master Data Services Database The MDS database is the central repository for all information necessary to support the Mas ter Data Manager application and the MDS Web service This database stores application set tings metadata tables and all versions of the master data In addition it contains tables that MDS uses to stage data from source systems and subscription views for downstream systems that consume master data Master Data Manager Master Data Manager is a Web application that serves as a stewardship portal for business users and a management interface for administrators Master Data Manager includes the fol lowing five functional areas Explorer Use this area to change attributes manage hierarchies apply business rules to validate master data review and correct data quality issues annotate master data monitor changes and reverse transactions m Version Management Use this area to create a new version of your master data model and underlying data uncover all validation issues in a model version prevent users from making changes assign a flag to indicate the current version for subscribing systems
65. of the master data As long as a version has an Open status anyone with access to the model can make changes to it Then you can lock the version for validation and correction and commit the version when the model is ready use If requirements change later you copy a committed version and start the process anew Because MDS is a platform not simply an application you can use the API to integrate your existing applications with MDS and automate the import or export processes Anything that you can do by using Master Data Manager can be built into your own custom application because the MDS API supports all operations This capability also enables Microsoft partners to quickly build master data support into their applications with domain specific user inter faces and transparent application integration Master Data Services Components Although MDS is included on the SQL Server installation media you perform the MDS instal lation separately from the SQL Server installation by using a wizard interface The wizard installs Master Data Services Configuration Manager installs the files necessary to run the Master Data Services Web service and registers assemblies After installation you use the Master Data Services Configuration Manager to create and configure a Master Data Services database in a SQL Server instance that you specify create the Master Data Services Web ap plication and enable the Web service Master Data Services Components
66. ona separate sheet if the report renders in Excel Whether or not you decide to disable the page break you can choose the conditions to apply to reset the page number when the page break occurs by assigning an expression to the ResetPageNumber property To continue with the current example you can use a similar conditional expression for the ResetPageNumber property to prevent the page number from resetting when the report renders as HTML and only allow the reset to occur in all other formats Therefore in HTML format the page number of the report increments by one as you page through it but in other formats excluding Excel you see the page number reset each time a new page is generated for a new year Reporting Services Enhancements Last consider how you can use the PageName property As one example instead of using page numbers in an Excel workbook you can assign a unique name to each sheet in the workbook You might for example use the group expression that defines the page break as the PageName property When the report renders as an Excel workbook Reporting Services uses the page break definition to separate the CalendarYear groups into different sheets of the same workbook and uses the PageName expression to assign the group instance s value to the applicable sheet As another example you can assign an expression to the PageName property of a rect angle data region group or map You can then reference the current value of
67. raw unaggregated data into the cube compresses the data and dynamically restructures the data based on the user s actions The PowerPivot System Service The PowerPivot service runs as a service application on SharePoint called PowerPivot System Service A service application is configurable independently of other service applications and isolates service application data You can install one physical instance of a server but then create multiple service applications to isolate data at the application level Another benefit of the service application model is the ability to delegate administration The PowerPivot System Service listens for requests for PowerPivot data connects to Analy sis Services to manage the loading and unloading of PowerPivot data collects usage data and monitors system health and availability of Analysis Services servers It also provides load Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot balancing across servers for query processing if multiple servers are available Furthermore the PowerPivot System Service manages the connections for active reusable and cached connections to PowerPivot workbooks as well as administrative connections to other Power Pivot System Services on the SharePoint farm To speed up access to data the PowerPivot System Service caches a local copy of a work book and stores it in Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSAS10_50 POWERPIVOT OLAP Backup The service unloads this copy of the workbook f
68. starts Read the information on the Before You Begin page and then click Next You can select the option to hide this page on all future uses of the wizard High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements On the Specify Name And Location page enter the name of the SQL Server VM and specify where it will be stored For example the name SQLServer2008R2 VMO1 and the VM can be stored on Cluster Shared Volume 1 as displayed in Figure 4 6 a New Virtual Machine Wizard Lx Me l Specify Name and Location Before You Begin Choose a name and location for this virtual machine Specify Name and Location The name is displayed in Hyper V Manager We recommend that you use a name that helps you easily Assign Memory identify this virtual machine such as the name of the quest operating system or workload Configure Networking Name SQLServer2008R2 M01 Connect Virtual Hard Disk You can create a folder or use an existing folder to store the virtual machine IF you dont select a Installation Options Folder the virtual machine is stored in the default folder configured for this server Summary I Store the virtual machine in a different location Location S ASA Browse Ji Tf you plan to take snapshots of this virtual machine select a location that has enough free space Snapshots include virtual machine data and may require a large amount of space lt Previous ue Finish Cancel FIGURE 4 6 The Specify Name And Location Screen when a
69. the Utility Administrator role by creating a new SQL Server login that uses Windows Authentication 1 Open Object Explorer in SSMS and expand the folder of the server instance that is running the UCP in which you want to create the new login 2 Right click the Security folder point to New and then select Login 3 On the General page of the Login dialog box enter the name of a Windows user in the Login Name box 4 Select Windows Authentication 5 On the Server Roles page select the check box for the sysadmin role 6 Click OK By default this user is now a Utility Administrator because he or she has been granted the sysadmin role The next example will grant a standard SQL Server user the Utility Reader read only privi leges for the SQL Server Utility dashboard and viewpoints 1 Open Object Explorer in SSMS and expand the folder of the server instance that is running the UCP in which you want to create the new login For this example SQL2K8R2 01 test2 will be used MORE INFO Review the article CREATE LOGIN Transact SQL at the following link for a refresher on how to create a login in SQL Server http technet microsoft com en us library ms189751 aspx 2 Right click the Security folder point to New and then select Login Managing Utility Administration Settings 37 3 On the General page enter the name of a Windows user in the Login Name box 4 Select Windows Authentication 5 Click OK NOTE Unlike in th
70. the query Data Load Processing The design of data load processing in Parallel Data Warehouse takes full advantage of the parallel architecture to move data to the compute nodes You have several options for load ing data into your data warehouse You can use your ETL process to copy files to the Parallel Data Management 121 122 Data Warehouse s Landing Zone You then invoke a command line tool DWLoader and spec ify options to load the data into the appliance Or you can use Integration Services to move data to the Landing Zone and call the loading functionality directly To load small amounts of data you can connect to the control node and use the SQL INSERT statement Queries can run concurrently with load processing so your data warehouse is always avail able during ETL processing DWLoader loads table rows in bulk into an existing table in the appliance You have several options for loading rows into a table You can add all rows to the end of the table by using append mode Another option is to append new rows and update existing rows by using upsert mode A third option is to delete all existing rows first and then to insert all rows into an empty table by using reload mode Monitoring and Management Parallel Data Warehouse includes the Admin Console a Web based application with which you can monitor the health of the appliance query execution status and view other informa tion useful for tuning user queries This appli
71. this prop erty in the page header or footer by using Globals PageName in the expression The value of Globals PageName is first set to the value of the InitialPageName report property when report processing begins and then resets as each report item processes if you have assigned an expression to the report item s PageName property Data Synchronization One of the great features of Reporting Services is its ability to create groups of groups by nesting one type of report item inside another type of report item In Figure 9 8 a list that groups by category and year contains a matrix that groups by month Notice that the months in each list group do not line up properly because data does not exist for the first six months of the year for the Accessories 2005 group Each monthly group displays independently of other monthly groups in the report Accessories 2005 July August September October November December 1 696 3593 3 250 1 938 5 491 4 268 Accessories 2006 January February March April May June July August September 585 2 160 2 200 1 776 5578 4 280 10 478 18 552 15 329 Accessories 2007 January February March April May June July August September 4 727 5563 5333 9 635 12 388 10 631 31 152 54 405 54 756 Accessories 2008 January February March April May June 16 722 19 135 19 052 27 585 40 731 38 569 FIGURE 9 8 Unsynchronized groups A new property DomainScope is available in SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services to fix this problem This
72. to the PowerPivot reports that provide the source data for these Web parts These reports consist of data from an internal reporting database that in turn collects data from the PowerPivot database SharePoint usage log data and other sources You can build new reports using this internal reporting database as a source but you cannot change it In addition to giving you information about the state of the server the dashboard also provides insight into the usage of published workbooks An interactive chart allows you to monitor which workbooks users access most frequently and which workbooks have recent activity You can view this information at the daily or weekly level One section of the dashboard provides information about data refresh activity providing a single location from which you can verify whether data refreshes are occurring as scheduled One Web part in this section lists recent activity for data refresh jobs by workbook and also includes the job duration Another Web part lists the workbooks for which the data refresh job fails and displays the data refresh error message as a tooltip The dashboard is also extensible It includes a link to add new items which you can use to add more workbooks to access from the dashboard page For example you can create a new PowerPivot workbook by using the Usage workbook as a data source and then upload your workbook to the same document library Last the dashboard page includes links to page
73. to the server The main benefit of the edit session is to speed up the preview process and render reports faster The report server saves cached datasets for the edit session These datasets are reused when you preview the report and have made report changes that affect the layout only If you know that the data has changed in the meantime you can use the Refresh button to retrieve current data for the report The cache remains available on the server for two hours and resets whenever you preview the report After the two hours have passed the report server deletes the cache An administrator can change this default period to retain the cache for longer periods if necessary The edit session also makes it easier to work with server objects during report develop ment One benefit is the ability to use relative references in expressions Relative references allow you to specify the path to subreports images and other reports that you might con figure as targets for the Jump To action relative to the current report s location on the report server Another benefit is the ability to test connections and confirm that authentication credentials work before publishing the report to the report server The Report Part Gallery Report Builder 3 0 includes a new window the Report Part Gallery that you can enable from the View tab on the ribbon At the top of this window is a search box in which you can type a string value as shown in Figure 9 19 and searc
74. warehouse whether they are creating reports to support decision making or prototyping solutions that will eventually be part of a larger BI implementation To provide multiple users with centralized access to reports developed with PowerPivot for Excel information technology staff can implement PowerPivot for SharePoint This server side PowerPivot product provides the necessary infrastructure to manage secure refresh and monitor these PowerPivot reports efficiently 189 190 PowerPivot for Excel PowerPivot for Excel is an add in that extends the functionality of Excel 2010 to support analysis of large related datasets on your computer After installing the add in you can import data from external data sources and integrate it with local files and then develop the presentation objects all within the Excel environment You save all your work in a single file that is easy to manage and share The PowerPivot Add in for Excel To create your own PowerPivot workbooks or to edit workbooks that others have created you must first install the PowerPivot add in for Excel 2010 Modifications to Excel When you install the add in several changes are made to Excel First the installation adds the PowerPivot menu to the Excel ribbon Second it adds the PowerPivot window a design environment for working with PowerPivot data within Excel You can use this design environ ment to import millions of rows of data which you can later view a
75. with Sysprep involves a two step procedure that is typically con ducted by using wizards on the Advanced page of the Installation Center In the first step a stand alone instance of SQL Server is prepared This step prepares the image however it stops the installation process after the binaries of SQL Server are installed To initiate this step select the Image Preparation Of A Stand Alone Instance For Sys Prep Deployment option on the Advanced page of the Installation Center The second step completes the configuration of a prepared instance of SQL Server by providing the machine network and account specific information for the SQL Server instance This task can be carried out by selecting the Image Completion Of A Prepared Stand Alone Instance step on the Advanced page of the Installation Center SQL Server 2008 R2 Sysprep is recommended for DBAs seeking to automate the deployment of SQL Server while investing the least amount of their time Analysis Services integration with SharePoint SQL Server 2008 R2 introduces a new option to individually select which feature components to install SQL Server PowerPivot for SharePoint is a new role based installation option in which PowerPivot for SharePoint will be installed on a new or existing SharePoint 2010 server to support SQL Server 2008 R2 Enhancements for DBAs 10 PowerPivot data access in the farm This new approach promises better integration with SharePoint while also enhancing SharePoin
76. you can create a business rule that specifies the required attributes also known as fields for an entity A business entity is likely to have multiple business rules which you can sequence in order of priority as shown in Figure 7 6 Business Rule Maintenance Model Product Z Entity Product z Member type Leaf Attribute all x mee Priority Excluded Name Description Expression Status Notification Modified Date 10 Oo Required fields Required fields a Active 2 7 2010 6 12 06 AM 20 mj DaysToManufacture Days to manufacture a Active 2 7 2010 6 12 06 AM 30 m Std Cost Std cost must be amp amp gt E4 Active 2 7 2010 6 12 06 AM 40 mj FG MSRP Cost FG s must have msrp amp de EH Active 2 7 2010 6 12 06 AM FIGURE 7 6 The Product entity s business rules Figure 7 7 shows an example of a simple condition that identifies the required fields for the Product entity If you omit any of these fields when you edit a Product member MDS notes a validation issue for that member and prevents you from using the master data model until you supply the missing values Master Data Services Version Components S Logical Operators F Conditions B Ff Actions Entity Specific Attributes S ss Product Leaf Attributes ata Name afa Code aia ProductSubCategory a Color sfa Class B aia Style afa Country afa StandardCost Edit Business Rule Required fields E VERSION_1 aA Expression IF ZT C
77. 000 Census Data Map showing population by state iv Overwrite the report part on the report server every time you deploy s report Vo ite th rt part on th rt ti d thi rt Results FIGURE 9 17 The Publish Report Parts dialog box When you first publish the report part Reporting Services assigns it a unique identifier that persists across all reports to which it will be added Note the option in the Publish Report Parts dialog box in Report Designer shown in Figure 9 15 to overwrite the report part on the report server every time you deploy the report In Report Builder you have a different option that allows you to choose whether to publish the report item as a new copy of the report If you later modify the report part and publish the revised version Reporting Services can use the report part s unique identifier to recognize it in another report when another report developer opens that report for editing At that time the report author receives a notification of the revision and can decide whether to accept the change Reusability CHAPTER9 181 Although you can publish report parts in Report Designer and Report Builder 3 0 you can only use Report Builder 3 0 to find and use those report parts More information about Report Builder 3 0 can be found later in this chapter in the Report Builder 3 0 section Atom Data Feed SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services includes a new rendering extension to support exporting re
78. 7 142 143 authentication 127 authorization 138 business rules 132 133 class library 142 143 configuring 128 data stewards 127 database 128 as development platform 142 exporting master data 136 137 flexibility of 126 importing master data 135 installing 127 locking data in 139 140 master data hub 126 overview of 125 permissions 138 tables in 135 transaction logs 131 134 Transact SQL functions 143 144 versioning 127 128 137 138 Web services API 143 measures PivotTables 199 200 members MDS 129 130 memory upgrading online 63 memory requirements 14 Microsoft Assessment and Planning Toolkit 75 Microsoft Press support Web site xix Microsoft SQL Azure 9 migrating SQL Server installations 18 19 migrating virtual machines See Live Migration models MDS defined 129 deploying 142 security settings 139 140 monitoring with SQL Server Utility 89 monitoring DACs 100 105 monitoring settings 34 MPP architecture 110 msdb database creation of 52 disk space consumption 25 MultiLookup function 167 multi rack system Backup node 114 compute node 114 115 control node 112 113 control rack 112 data racks 111 Landing Zone node 114 management node 114 overview of 110 N naming UCPs 27 nesting aggregate functions 168 NET Framework requirement 15 New Virtual Machine Wizard 76 77 Nexus query tool 122 non transactional reference data 125 126 O objects SQL Serv
79. 7472780 Country 13 EnglishProductsubcategoryName 2006 a4 423218 10171435 IE icere vertical E Sicers Horizontal 14 Grand Tot 4372895 98215829 15 16 ag YW Report Filter gaj Legend Fields 5 18 Calendarvear x 19 20 E Axis Fields Cate Values 21 EnglishProducsu Sum of AW Bicyd 22 23 24 25 M4r Datafor Sheet Chart Sheeti lt Sheet lt Sheets tl TJAT m cal Ready Fon ws gt gt FIGURE 10 8 A PivotChart and PivotTable report Cube Functions As an alternative to the symmetrical layout of a PivotTable you can use cube functions in cell formulas to arrange PowerPivot data in a free form arrangement of cells Cube functions introduced in Excel 2007 allow you to query an Analysis Services database and return meta data or values from a cube Because PowerPivot creates an in memory version of an Analysis Services database you can also use cube functions with your PowerPivot data Although you can create a formula that uses a cube function in any cell in your PowerPivot workbook the simplest way to get started with these functions is to convert an existing Pivot Table To do this click the OLAP Tools button on the Options tab under PivotTable Tools and click Convert To Formulas The conversion replaces the row and column labels with a formula using the CUBEMEMBER function and replaces values with the CUBEVALUE function as shown in Figure 10 9 The first argument of either of these functio
80. ANCED2 F T Global i sqL2keR2 02 INSTANCED3 ie SQL2KeR2 02 INSTANCED4 i F Global ie SQL2KeR2 02 INSTANCEOS i squ2Ker2 03 g 7 Global i SqL2KeR2 03 INSTANCEO2 7 Global ie SQL2KeR2 03 INSTANCEO3 7 g Global Ge SQL2KER2 03 INSTANCEDS C E Global 4 ll gt CPU Utilization Storage Utilization Policy Details Property Details CPU Utilization for SQL2K8R2 O1 INSTANCEOL m Interval G 1Day 100 0 100 0 Compute ae 80 0 80 0 C 1 Month C 1Year 60 0 60 0 40 0 40 0 20 0 20 0 0 0 r r z 00 r z 4 00 8 00 12 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 4 00 8 00 12 00 PM AM AM AM M PM PM AM AM AM M Ready FIGURE 2 5 The Managed Instances dashboard Managing Utility Administration Settings After you are connected to a UCP use the Utility Administration node in the Utility Explorer navigation pane to view and configure global policy settings security settings and data warehouse settings across the SQL Server Utility The configuration tabs affiliated with the Utility Administration node are the Policy Security and Data Warehouse tabs The following sections explore the Utility Administration settings available within each tab You must first connect to a SQL Server UCP before modifying settings Connecting to a UCP Before managing or configuring UCP settings a database administrator must connect to a UCP by means of Utility Explorer in SSMS Use t
81. Add a report variable to the report and then add a hidden text box to the data region with the group used to generate a page break Next place the following expression in the text box to force evaluation of the expression for each group instance Variables MyVariable SetValue Now In the previous version of Reporting Services the report variable type was a value just like any text box on the report In SQL Server 2008 R2 the report variable can also be a NET serializable type You must initialize and populate the report variable when the report session begins then you can independently add or change the values of the report variable on each page of the report during your current session Layout Control SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services also includes several new report item properties that you can use to control layout By using these properties you can manage report pagination fill in data gaps to align data groupings and rotate the orientation of text Layout Control CHAPTER 9 171 172 Pagination Properties There are three new properties available to manage pagination Disabled ResetPageNumber and PageName These properties appear in the Properties window when you select a tablix rectangle or chart in the report body or a group item in the Row Groups or Column Groups pane The most common reason you set values for these properties is to define different pag ing behaviors based on the rendering format now that the g
82. An entity contains members which are like the rows in a table as shown in Figure 7 1 Members also known as leaf mem bers are the master data that you are managing in MDS Each leaf member of the entity has multiple attributes which correspond to table columns in the analogy Attributes Name Code ProductSubCategory ProductLine Country Adjustable Race AR 5381 38 NA us Bearing Ball BA 8327 38 NA US Members LL Bottom Bracket BB 7421 5 NA us ML Bottom Bracket BB 8107 5 NA US HL Bottom Bracket BB 9108 5 NA US FIGURE 7 1 The Product entity By default an entity has Name and Code attributes as shown in Figure 7 1 These two at tributes are required by MDS The Code attribute values must be unique in the same way that a primary key column in a table requires unique values You can add any number of addi tional free form attributes to accept any type of data that the user enters the Name attribute of the Product entity shown in Figure 7 1 is one such attribute Data Stewardship 129 130 An entity can also have any number of domain based attributes whose values are mem bers of another related entity In the example in Figure 7 1 the ProductSubCategory attribute is a domain based attribute That is the ProductSubCategory codes are attribute values in the Product entity and they are also members of the ProductSubCategory entity A third type of attribute is the file attribute which you can use to store a file or image You
83. Eal Display Code Code Name Name Code All Attributes ae Si Name Sa E Code ProductGroup D v Bikes 1 2 v Components 2 l v Clothing 2 m v W Accessories 4 j2 UEdit member X Delete member 50 e 1 4 of 4_44 a Bayview member transactions Bannotate member FIGURE 7 19 Mixed permissions for an entity Last Figure 7 20 shows the page for the Category derived hierarchy Recall from Figure 7 19 that the user has Update permission for the Retail group The user can therefore modify the Retail member but not the Wholesale member as indicated by the lock icon to the left of the Wholesale member in the ProductGroup table You can also see the color coding of the labels in the tree view of the Category hierarchy which indicates whether the member is editable by the user The user can edit members that are shown in black but not the mem bers shown in gray When the user selects a member in the tree view the table on the right displays the children of the selected member if the user has the necessary permission Derived Hierarchy Category Filter Criteria la 5 fen AEE P aaa Press CTRL to paste as sibling x eae E e Root 5 Attribute Operator Similarity Level D ha Wholesale D aha 1 Bikes ProductGroup D h 2 Retail D da 3 Clothing amp Eal D a 4 Accessories i All Attributes ab x a v Oj wv 4 s 50 fr 1 2 of 2_44 4
84. K8R2 01 INSTANCEOS 2 Adventureworks2005 C g e Override SQL2KBR2 03 INSTANCEOS fy AdventureWorks2008R2 7 T J O Override SQL2KBR2 03 INSTANCEO3 FinanceDB o Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO4 J Human Resources T T Override SQL2KBR2 01 INSTANCEO4 B Northwind F g Override SQLZK R2 O1 INSTANCE03 H Test g 3 Override SQLZK R2 O1 INSTANCE03 fy Test F E Override SQL2KBR2 01 INSTANCEOL fy Test Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO2 4 X CPU Utilization Storage Utilization Policy Details Property Details Utilization policies for AdventureWorks2008R2 When you modify a policy there will be a delay before the resource utilization policy indicator is updated in the viewpoints w Data tier Application CPU Utilization Policies m T Use the global policy Expand All CPU of a datatier application is overutiized when it is greater than 30 Collapse All CPU of a datatier application is underutilized when it is less than ox Override the global policy O CPU of a data tier application is overutilized when it is greater than 705 CPU of a datatier application is underutilized when it is less than oi x FIGURE 5 13 The Policy Details tab on the Data Tier Applications viewpoint ER5 Consolidation and Monitoring The display is broken up into the following four policies which can be viewed or overridden e Data Tier Application CPU U
85. L Server 2008 R2 Refer to SQL Server Backward Compatibility at http msdn microsoft com en us library cc707787 SQL 105 aspx for more information 3 Ensure that the version and edition of SQL Server that will be upgraded is supported To review all the upgrade scenarios supported for SQL Server 2008 R2 see Version and Edition Upgrades at http msdn microsoft com en us library ms143393 SQL 105 aspx 4 Run the SQL Server Upgrade Advisor for SQL Server 2008 R2 The Upgrade Advisor is a tool included with SQL Server 2008 R2 or downloaded directly from the Microsoft Web site It analyzes the installed components on the SQL Server instance you plan to upgrade to ensure that the system supports SQL Server 2008 R2 The Upgrade Advisor generates a report identifying anomalies that require fixing or attention before the upgrade can begin 5 Install the SQL Server 2008 R2 prerequisites 6 Begin the upgrade to SQL Server 2008 R2 by running Setup Installation Upgrade and Migration Strategies 17 18 Side by Side Migration The term side by side migration describes the deployment of a brand new SQL Server 2008 R2 instance alongside a legacy SQL Server instance When the SQL Server 2008 R2 installation is complete a DBA migrates data from the legacy SQL Server database platform to the new SQL Server 2008 R2 database platform Side by side migration is depicted in Figure 1 6 NOTE lt is possible to conduct a side by side migration
86. L Server Utility is consuming in gigabytes By using the buttons under the Interval heading you can view data in the graph by the following intervals e 1 Day Displays data in 15 minute intervals e 1 Week Displays data in one day intervals e 1 Month Displays data in one week intervals e 1Year Displays data in one month intervals Utility Storage Utilization The bottom right corner shows a pie chart that displays the amount of space used and the amount of free space available on the volume host ing the SQL Server Utility It is worth noting that the data is refreshed every 15 minutes Consolidation and Monitoring This section explained how to obtain summary information for all managed instances of SQL Server DBAs seeking more information might be interested in the Managed Instances node in the tree view of Utility Explorer This node helps database administers gain deeper knowledge of health status and resource utilization data for each managed instances of SQL Server The next section discusses this dashboard TIP When working with the SQL Server Utility dashboard you can click on a link to reveal additional details about a specific policy Using the Managed Instances Viewpoint DBAs can display the Managed Instances viewpoint in the Utility Explorer Content pane by connecting to a UCP and then selecting the Managed Instances node in the Utility Explorer tree The Utility Explorer Content pane displays the viewpoint as shown in Fig
87. Last Changed Date 1 VERSION_1 Version 1 for Model Geography Committed Active Validated 2 8 2010 11 32 31 PM 2 VERSION 2 Version 2 for Model Geography Locked Validated VERSION_1 1 2 8 2010 7 13 01 AM 3 VERSION_2A Version 2A for Model Geography Reorganization Open Validated VERSION_1 1 2 8 2010 11 31 37 PM FIGURE 7 13 Model versions Security MDS uses a role based authorization system that allows you to configure security both by functional area and by object For example you can restrict a user to the Explorer area of Master Data Manager as shown in Figure 7 14 while granting another user access to only the Version Management and Integration Management areas Then within the functional area you must grant a user access to one or more models to control which data the user can see and which data the user can edit You must assign the user permission to access at least one functional area and one model for that user to be able to open Master Data Manager Manage Users Manage Groups User SampleUser Sample User General Membership Functions Models Hierarchy Members Available functions Assigned functions Version Management Integration Management User and Group Permissions System Administration a ay Indicates that the permission was inherited from a group membership FIGURE 7 14 Functional area permissions You can grant a user either Read only or Update permissions for a model That per
88. Latin1_General_BIN2 collation The following data types are supported m Binary and varbinary m Bit m Char and varchar m Date Datetime and datetime2 Datetimeoffset m Decimal m Float and real Int bigint smallint and tinyint m Money and smallmoney m Nchar and nvarchar Smalldatetime Time Scalable Data Warehousing Query Processing Query processing in Parallel Data Warehouse is more complex than in an SMP data ware house because processing must manage high availability parallelization and data movement between nodes In general Parallel Data Warehouse s control node follows these steps to process a query shown in Figure 6 5 1 Parse the SQL statement 2 Validate and authorize the objects 3 Build a distributed execution plan 4 Run the execution plan 5 Aggregate query results 6 Send results to the client application Create query plan Compute Compute Query results Compute ER Compute Aggregate query results Compute nodes process query plan operations in parallel FIGURE 6 5 Query processing steps A query with a simple join on columns of replicated tables or distribution columns of dis tributed tables does not require the transfer of data between compute nodes before execut ing the query By contrast a more complex join that includes a nondistribution column of a distributed table does require Parallel Data Warehouse to copy data among the distributions before executing
89. Member Type Prior Value New Value Added Date Attribute value specitied Product StandardCost AR 5381 Leaf 0 00 2 7 2010 10 23 55 PM Attribute value specified Product ProductSubCategory AR 5381 Leaf 38 2 7 2010 4 00 18 PM Attribute value specified Product ProductSubCategory AR 5381 Leaf 38 2 7 2010 3 59 55 PM Member moved to parent Product Management Product CPT Consolidated AC 2 6 2010 10 10 59 PM Member moved to parent Product Management Product ACC Consolidated AC 2 6 2010 10 10 59 PM Member moved to parent Product Management Product AC Consolidated ROOT 2 6 2010 10 10 59 PM Member moved to parent Product Management Product CL Consolidated ROOT 2 6 2010 10 10 59 PM Member moved to parent Product Management Product SL Consolidated ROOT 2 6 2010 10 10 59 PM Member moved to parent Product Management Product PL Consolidated ROOT 2 6 2010 10 10 59 PM Member moved to parent Product Management Product BK R19B 52 Leaf PL 2 6 2010 10 10 59 PM FIGURE 7 9 The transaction log MDS allows you to annotate any transaction so that you can preserve the reasons for a change to the master data When you select a transaction in the transactions log a new sec tion appears at the bottom of the page for transaction annotations Here you can view the complete set of annotations for the selected transaction if any and you can enter text for a new annotation as shown in Figure 7 10 Transaction Annotations Fl kk Annotation Recategorized product per Jan
90. NESS INTELLIGENCE DEVELOPMENT CHAPTER 6 Scalable Data Warehousing 109 CHAPTER 7 Master Data Services 125 CHAPTER 8 Complex Event Processing with StreamInsight 145 CHAPTER 9 Reporting Services Enhancements 165 CHAPTER10 Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot 189 Contents Introduction xvii CHAPTER 1 SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements 3 SQL Server 2008 R2 Enhancements for DBAs 00000e eens 3 Application and Multi Server Administration Enhancements Additional SQL Server 2008 R2 Enhancements for DBAs 8 Advantages of Using Windows Server 2008 R2 00 eee 10 SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions 0 ccc ccc cece nee ees 11 Premium Editions 12 Core Editions 12 Specialized Editions 13 Hardware and Software Requirements 0 00 00 cee eee eee ee 14 Installation Upgrade and Migration Strategies 00 000 16 The In Place Upgrade 16 Side by Side Migration 18 CHAPTER 2 Multi Server Administration 21 The SQL Server Utility 0 cette nees 21 SQL Server Utility Key Concepts 23 UCP Prerequisites 25 UCP Sizing and Maximum Capacity Specifications 25 What do you think of this book We want to hear from you Microsoft is interested in hearing your feedback so we can continually improve our books and learning resources for you To participate in a brief online survey please visit microsoft com learning booksurvey vii viii Tat eGR a te ite elect Mate sale cere ad arty atlas A Aen
91. NET class or structure of the event type provides you with information about the event payload if you are building a typed adapter The information necessary for the management of stream processing known as event metadata comes from an interface in the adapter API when it creates an event In addition to knowing the event payload and event metadata you must also know whether the shape of the event is a point interval or edge model Having this information available allows you to choose the applicable base class The adapter base classes are listed in Table 8 1 TABLE 8 1 Adapter base classes ADAPTER TYPE INPUT ADAPTER OUTPUT ADAPTER AND EVENT MODEL BASE CLASS BASE CLASS Typed point TypedPointInputAdapter TypedPointOutputAdapter Untyped point PointInputAdapter PointOutputAdapter Typed interval TypedintervallnputAdapter TypedintervalOutputAdapter Untyped interval IntervallnputAdapter IntervalOutputAdapter Typed edge TypedEdgelnputAdapter TypedEdgeOutputAdapter Untyped edge EdgelnputAdapter EdgeOutputAdapter If you are developing an untyped input adapter you must ensure that it can use the con figuration specification during query bind time to determine the event s field types by infer ence from the query s SELECT statement You must also add code to the adapter to populate Application Development 151 the fields one at a time and enqueue the event The untyped output adapter works similarly but instead it must be able to use the con
92. PowerPivot System service which in turn reads the predefined schedule found in the PowerPivot database When a schedule to run is found the PowerPivot System Service gets the list of data sources and the credentials to use and initiates the data refresh If the workbook is not checked out or in edit mode the data refresh job saves the new data to the workbook Linked Documents Your PowerPivot workbook can be used as a data source for other report types When viewing the workbooks in the PowerPivot Gallery you can use the Create Linked Document button to create either a Reporting Services report or a PowerPivot report in Excel You must have the appropriate client application for the report type that you choose That is to build a Reporting Services report you must first install SQL Server 2008 R2 Report Builder 3 0 and to build a PowerPivot report you must install the PowerPivot for Excel add in The query designer in Report Builder and the Field List in Excel display only the fields presented in the source workbook rather than all fields available in that workbook s embedded data The PowerPivot Web Service Another way to use a PowerPivot workbook as a data source is by using the PowerPivot Web Service to connect to the embedded data That way you can reuse the data in multiple places without having to duplicate all the effort required to create the initial workbook Any client PowerPivot for SharePoint 205 206 application that c
93. PowerShell 2 0 features include new and improved Windows Management Instru mentation WMI cmdlets a script debugging feature and a graphical environment for creating scripts DBAs can improve their productivity with Windows PowerShell by simplifying automating and consolidating repetitive tasks and server management processes across a distributed SQL Server environment SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions SQL Server 2008 R2 is available in nine different editions The editions were designed to meet the needs of almost any customer and are broken down into the following three categories m Premium editions m Core editions m Specialized editions SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions 11 12 Premium Editions The premium editions of SQL Server 2008 R2 are meant to meet the highest demands of large scale datacenters and data warehouse solutions The two editions are Datacenter For the first time in the history of SQL Server a datacenter edition is of fered SQL Server 2008 R2 Datacenter provides the highest levels of security reliability and scalability when compared to any other edition SQL Server 2008 R2 Datacenter de livers an enterprise class data platform that provides maximum levels of scalability for organizations looking to run very large database workloads In addition this edition of fers the best platform for the most demanding virtualization and consolidation efforts It offers the same features and functionality as the Enterprise
94. QL Server Management Studio in the data tier applications node Extracting a Data Tier Application with SQL Server Management Studio 49 50 Description This property is optional Use it to describe the DAC If this section is completed the information is saved in the msdb database under the data tier applications node in Management Studio amp Extract Data tier Application M x J Sy Set Properties Introduction Help Set Properties Set the DAC properties Validation and Summary Application name Build Package AccountingDB Version use x x x x where x is a number fi oo 0 Description i Accounting Application Version 1 Save to DAC package file include dacpac extension with the file name D DAC AccountingDB dacpac Browse IV Overwrite existing file The application name version and description are displayed in SQL Server Management Studio after the DAC has been deployed lt Previous Ls Finish Cancel FIGURE 3 5 Specifying DAC properties when using the Extract Data Tier Application Wizard Next indicate where the DAC package file is to be saved Remember to use the appro priate extension dacpac Alternatively click the Browse button and identify the name and location for the DAC package file You also have the option to select the Overwrite Existing File check box to replace a DAC package with the same name If you choose a name that already exists for a DAC package the
95. R2 01 INSTANCE04 The volume space for SQL2K8R2 02 SQL2K8R2 02 INSTANCEO2 SQL2K8R2 03 SQL2K8R2 03 INSTANCEO2 SQL2K8R2 03 INSTANCEO3 and SQL2K8R2 03 INSTANCE04 are all overutilized and the remainder of managed instances are well utilized The Managed Instances list view columns and utilization tabs are discussed in more detail in the next sections The Managed Instances List View Columns The health status of each managed instance of SQL Server in the Managed Instances list view is analyzed against four types of utilization and the current policy in place for each Instance CPU This column indicates processor utilization of the managed instance The health state is determined by the global CPU Utilization For All Managed Instances Of SQL Server policy which is predetermined for all managed instances of SQL Server However by clicking on the Policy Tab in the bottom half of the view DBAs can over ride this global policy to configure overutilization and underutilization policies for a single instance The CPU Utilization tab shows the CPU utilization history for the selected managed instance of SQL Server Computer CPU This column communicates computer processor utilization where the managed instance resides Health is based on the settings of two policies the CPU utilization policy in place for the computer and the configuration setting for the Vola tile Resource Evaluation policy The CPU Utilization tab shows the processor utilizati
96. Reader role to the Utility Reader security group on the Security tab in the Utility Administration node within Utility Explorer By following these steps you provide access to all of your database administrators in a fraction of the time In addition the use of RBA makes it quite easier to manage the ongoing maintenance of security of the SQL Server Utility The Data Warehouse Tab You view and modify the data retention period for utilization information collected for man aged instances of SQL Server on the Data Warehouse tab in the Utility Administration node in Utility Explorer In addition the UMDW Database Name and Collection Set Upload Frequency elements can be viewed however they cannot be modified in this version of SQL Server 2008 R2 There are plans to allow these settings to be modified in future versions of SQL Server The following steps illustrate how to modify the data retention period for the UMDW Launch SSMS and connect to a UCP through Utility Explorer Select the Utility Administration node in Utility Explorer Click the Data Warehouse tab in the Utility Explorer Content pane Managing Utility Administration Settings 39 In the Utility Explorer Content pane select the desired data retention period for the UMDW as displayed in Figure 2 9 The options are 1 month 3 months 6 months 1 year or 2 years R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio BEE File Edit View Tools Window Community Help i LL New Query D
97. ServiceHost class and a class to provide an API for operations related to business rules Microsoft MasterDataServices Services DataContracts Contains classes to represent models and model objects Microsoft MasterDataServices Services MessageContracts Contains classes to represent requests and responses resulting from MDS operations Microsoft MasterDataServices Services ServiceContracts Contains an inter face that defines the service contract for MDS operations based on WCF related to business rules master data metadata and security NOTE For more information about the MDS class libraries refer to the Master Data Ser vices Class Library topic in SQL Server 2008 R2 Books Online at http msdn microsoft com en us library ee638492 SQL 105 aspx Master Data Services Web Service MDS includes a Web services API as an option for creating custom applications that integrate MDS with an organization s existing applications and processes This API provides access to the master data model definitions as well as to the master data itself For example by using this API you can completely replace the Master Data Manager Web application TIP For a code sample that shows how to use the Web service in a client application see the following blog entry by Val Lovicz Principal Program Manager on the MDS team Getting Started with the Web Services API in SQL Server 2008 R2 Master Data Services at http sqlblog com blogs mds_team archi
98. Studio to initiate any of the actions mentioned in this section such as importing or creating a data tier application can refer to the article Creating and Managing Databases and Data tier Applications in Visual Studio at http msdn microsoft com en us library dd193245 VS 100 aspx Data Tier Applications Extracting a Data Tier Application with SQL Server Management Studio The Extract Data Tier Application Wizard is another tool that you can use for creating a new data tier application The wizard is in SQL Server 2008 R2 Management Studio In this meth od the wizard works its way into an existing SQL Server database reads the content of the database and the logins associated with it and ensures that the new data tier application can be created Finally the wizard either creates a new DAC package or communicates all errors and issues that need to be addressed before one can be created This approach comes with a big advantage The extraction process can be applied to many versions of SQL Server not just SQL Server 2008 R2 For example database administrators can use the wizard to generate a DAC package from SQL Server 2000 SQL Server 2005 SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2 databases IMPORTANT DAC definitions remain unregistered when you use the Extract Data Tier Application Wizard Database administrators must use the Register Data Tier Applica tion Wizard in SQL Server 2008 R2 Management Studio to register a DAC defini
99. U Is Reported As Overutilized setting to 30 percent Over 12 hours there will be 48 policy evaluations Fourteen of these must be in violation before the CPU is marked as overutilized CHAPTER 2 Multi Server Administration The Security Tab From a security and authorization perspective there are two security roles associated with a UCP The first role is the Utility Administrator and the second role is the Utility Reader The Utility Administrator is ultimately the superuser who has the ability to manage any setting or view any dashboard or viewpoint associated with the UCP For example a Utility Admin istrator can enroll instances manage settings in the Utility Administration node and much more The second security role is the Utility Reader which has rights to connect to the SQL Server Utility observe all viewpoints in Utility Explorer and view settings on the Utility Ad ministration node in Utility Explorer You can use the Security tab in the Utility Administration node of Utility Explorer to view and provide Utility Reader privileges to a SQL Server login By default logins that have sysadmin privileges on the instance running the UCP automatically have full administrative privileges over the UCP A database administrator must use a combination of both Object Ex plorer and the Security Tab in Utility Administration to add or modify login settings affiliated with the UCP For example the following steps grant a new user
100. a measure are very basic although repre sentative of the common ways that you would use DAX Table 10 1 lists the types of functions that DAX provides TABLE 10 1 DAX Function Types FUNCTION TYPE EXAMPLE Date and time WEEKDAY OrderDate 1 Filter and value FILTER ProductSubcategory EnglishProductSubcategoryName Road Bikes Information IsNumber OrderQuantity Logical IF OrderQuantity lt 10 low IFC OrderQuantity lt 100 medium S high Math and trig ROUND SalesAmount DiscountAmount 2 200 CHAPTER 10 Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot DESCRIPTION Returns the number of the weekday where Sunday 1 and Saturday 7 Returns a subset of a table based on the filter expression Returns TRUE if the value is numeric and FALSE if it is not Returns the second argument s value if the first argument s condi tion is TRUE and otherwise returns the third argument s value Returns the value of the first argu ment rounded to the number of digits specified in second argument FUNCTION TYPE EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION Statistical AVERAGEX Resel lerSales Evaluates the expression in the SalesAmount second argument for each row of TotalProductCost the table in the first argument and then calculates the arithmetic mean Text CONCATENATE FirstName Returns a string that joins two text LastName items Time Intelligence DATEADD OrderDate 10 day Returns a table of dates obtain
101. able valued m Function Scalar m Index Clustered m Index Non clustered m Index Unique m Login m Schema m Stored Procedure Transact SQL m Table Check Constraint m Table Collation m Table Column including computed columns m Table Constraint Default m Table Constraint Foreign Key m Table Constraint Index m Table Constraint Primary Key m Table Constraint Unique m Trigger DML Data Tier Applications m Type User defined Data Type m Type User defined Table Type m User m View Database administrators do not have to worry about looking for unsupported objects This laborious task is accomplished with the Extract Data Tier Application Wizard Unsupported objects such as DDL triggers service broker objects and full text catalog objects are identified and reported by the wizard Unsupported objects are identified with a red icon that represents an invalid entry Database administrators must also pay close attention to objects with a yellow icon because this communicates a warning A yellow icon usually warns database administra tors that although an object is supported it is linked to and quite reliant on an unsupported object Database administrators need to review and address all objects with red and yellow icons The wizard does not create a DAC package until unsupported objects are removed For a list of some common supported objects review the topic SQL Server Objects Supported in Data tier Applications
102. administrators using the Extract Data Tier Application Wizard in SQL Server Management Studio generate a DAC from an existing database The DAC package is then deployed to a SQL Server 2008 R2 instance In both methods the deployment creates a DAC definition that is stored in the msdb system database and a user database that stores the objects identified in the DAC definition Finally the applications connect to the database associ ated with the DAC Database administrators use the Utility Control Point and Utility Explorer in SQL Server Management Studio to centrally manage and monitor data tier applications at scale Common Uses for Data Tier Applications Data tier applications are used in a multitude of ways to serve many different needs For example organizations may use data tier applications when they need to Deploy a data tier application for test staging and production instances of the Data base Engine m Create DAC packages to tighten integration handoffs between data tier developers and database administrators m Move changes from development to production m Upgrade an existing DAC instance to a newer version of the DAC by using the Upgrade Data Tier Wizard m Compare database schemas between two data tier applications m Upgrade database schemas from older versions of SQL Server to SQL Server 2008 R2 for example to extract a data tier application from SQL Server 2000 and then deploy the package on SQL Server 2008 R2 m Consid
103. aging SQL Server VMs in VMM libraries By using virtual servers organizations can take advantage of powerful features such as multi core technology and they can achieve better handling of disk access and greater mem ory support In addition Hyper V improves scalability and performance for a SQL Server VM High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements NOTE The Microsoft Assessment and Planning Toolkit can be used to identify whether or not an organization s SQL Server systems are good candidates for virtualization The toolkit also includes tools for SQL Server inventory assessments and intuitive reporting A down load of the Microsoft Assessment and Planning Toolkit is available on the Microsoft Down load Center at http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 67240b76 3148 4e49 943d 4d9ea7f77730 amp displaylang en Implementing Live Migration for SQL Server 2008 R2 Follow these steps to take advantage of Live Migration for SQL Server 2008 R2 VMs 1 Ensure that the hardware software drivers and components are supported by Microsoft and Windows Server 2008 R2 2 Set up the hardware shared storage and networks as recommended in the failover cluster deployment guides NOTE Hyper V Using Hyper V and Failover Clustering the TechNet article at the following link includes step by step instructions on how to implement Hyper V and failover clustering http technet microsoft com en us library cc732181 WS 10
104. ailable since Microsoft SQL Server 7 0 Back in those days failover clustering proved to be quite a challenge to set up It was necessary to install multiple Microsoft products to form the Microsoft cluster environment High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements including Internet Information Services IIS Cluster Server SQL Server 7 0 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Distributed Transaction Coordinator MSDTC 2 0 and sometimes the Windows NT 4 0 Option Pack Moreover the hardware support driver support and documentation were not as forthcoming as they are today Many IT organizations came to believe that failover clustering was a difficult technology to install and maintain That has all changed thanks to the efforts of the SQL Server and Failover Clustering product groups at Microsoft Today forming a cluster with SQL Server 2008 R2 on Windows Server 2008 R2 is very easy In addition the two technologies combined provide maximum availability compared to previous versions espe cially for database administrators who want to virtualize their SQL Server workloads Now that you know some of the history behind failover clustering it s time to take a closer look into what failover clustering is all about and what it means for organizations and database administrators A SQL Server failover cluster is built on the foundation of a Windows failover cluster while providing high availability and protecting the whole instance of SQL Server in t
105. al Outgoing Event Count pro vides the total number of events that the output adapter has dequeued from the engine The following four transition points relate to query metrics m Incoming The event arrival at the input adapter Consumed The point at which the input adapter enqueues the event into the engine m Produced The point at which the event leaves the last query operator in the engine m Outgoing The event departure from the output adapter The Management Interface 163 Windows PowerShell Diagnostics For quick analysis you can use Windows PowerShell scripts to view diagnostic information rather than writing a complete diagnostic application Before you can use a Windows Pow erShell script the StreamInsight server must be running a query If the server is running as a hosted assembly you must expose the Web service You start the diagnostic process by loading the Microsoft ComplexEventProcessing assem bly from the Global Assembly Cache GAC into Windows PowerShell by using the following code PS C gt System Reflection Assembly LoadWithPartialName Microsoft ComplexEventProcessing Then you need to create a connection to the StreamInsight host process by using the code in this example PS C gt server Microsoft ComplexEventProcessing Server Connect http localhost StreamInsight Then you can use the GetDiagnosticView method to retrieve statistics for an object such as the Event Manager as shown in the f
106. al and analytical master data management by providing a master data hub to centrally organize maintain and manage your master data This master data hub supports these capabilities with a scalable and exten sible infrastructure built on SQL Server and the Windows Communication Foundation WCF APIs By centralizing the master data in an external system you can more easily align all busi ness applications to this single authoritative source You can adapt your business processes to use the master data hub as a System of Entry that can then update downstream systems An other option is to use it as a System of Record to integrate data from multiple source systems into a consolidated view which you can then manage more efficiently from a central location Either way this centralization of master data helps you improve and maintain data quality Because the master data hub is not specific to any domain you can organize your master data as you see fit rather than force your data to conform to a predefined format You can easily add new subject areas as necessary or make changes to your existing master data to meet unique requirements as they arise The master data hub is completely metadata driven so you have the flexibility you need to organize your master data Master Data Services In addition to offering flexibility MDS allows you to manage master data proactively Instead of discovering data problems in failed ETL processes or inaccurate repo
107. allation and Configuration RS Utility Scripting SharePoint Lists as Data Sources SharePoint Unified Logging Service cee 183 CHAPTER 10 Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot 189 POWerPIVOUTOF EXCelis i 4f cscsaiiian bia dp tciteon bind dh nana diy diac 190 The PowerPivot Add in for Excel 190 Data Sources 191 Data Preparation 193 PowerPivot Reports 196 Data Analysis Expressions 199 PowerPivot for SharePoint 0 c eects 201 Architecture 201 Content Management 204 Data Refresh 205 Linked Documents 205 The PowerPivot Web Service 205 The PowerPivot Management Dashboard e eee e eee 206 Index 207 About the Authors 215 What do you think of this book We want to hear from you Microsoft is interested in hearing your feedback so we can continually improve our books and learning resources for you To participate in a brief online survey please visit microsoft com learning booksurvey Contents xiii Acknowledgments would like to first acknowledge Shirmattie Seenarine for assisting me on this title couldn t have written this book without your assistance in such a short timeframe with everything else going on in my life Your hard work contributions edits and perseverance are much appreciated Thank you to fellow SQL Server MVP Kevin Kline for introducing me to the former SQL Server product group manager Matt Hollingsworth who started the chain of events that led up to this book In additi
108. am Object You can create an event stream object from an unbound stream or a user defined input adapter factory You might want to develop a query template to register on the CEP server without binding it to an adapter In this case you can use the Create method of the EventStream class to obtain an event stream that has a defined shape but without binding information To do this you can adapt the following code CepStream lt PayloadType gt inputStream CepStream lt PayloadType gt Create inputStream If you are using the implicit server development model you can create an event stream object from an input adapter factory and an input configuration With this approach you do not need to implement an adapter but you must specify the event shape The following example illustrates the syntax to use CEPStream lt PayloadType gt inputStream CepStream lt PayloadType gt Create streamName typeof AdapterFactory myConfig EventShape Point The QueryTemplate Object When you use the explicit server development model for standalone server deployment you can create a QueryTemplate object that you can reuse in multiple bindings with differ ent input and output adapters To create a QueryTemplate object you use code similar to the following example QueryTemplate myQueryTemplate application CreateQueryTemplate myQueryTemplate outputStream 154 3 Complex Event Processing with StreamInsight Queries After you creat
109. an connect to Analysis Services directly can use the PowerPivot Web Service You simply use the SharePoint URL for the workbook instead of an Analysis Services server name in the connection string of the provider For example if you have a workbook named Bike Sales xlsx in the PowerPivot Gallery located at http lt servername gt PowerPivot Gallery the SharePoint URL to use as an Analysis Services data source is http lt servername gt PowerPivot Gallery Bike Sales xIsx The PowerPivot Management Dashboard PowerPivot for SharePoint includes several tools for configuring the service application and for monitoring usage in a management dashboard All management tools are accessible to farm and service administrators in Central Administration The easiest way to access settings related to PowerPoint for SharePoint is to use the PowerPivot Management Dashboard The PowerPivot Management Dashboard displays data for one service application at a time In this dashboard you can see a collection of Web parts and PowerPivot reports that display data that is collected daily from multiple sources One of the Web parts displays a chart showing CPU and memory usage over time to help you determine whether the server is running at maximum capacity or whether it is underutilized Another Web part shows trending of query response times which you can use to determine whether queries are responding within configurable thresholds The dashboard page includes links
110. ansact SQL For Parallel Data Warehouse the statement includes options for specifying whether the table uses a replicated or a distributed strategy and whether to store the table with a clustered in dex or with a heap You can also use this syntax to create partitions by specifying the partition boundary values Scalable Data Warehousing NOTE Parallel Data Warehouse does not use the Transact SQL partition schema or parti tion function Also you can create a clustered index only when you use CREATE TABLE To create a nonclustered index you use CREATE INDEX Here is an example of the syntax to create a replicated table CREATE TABLE DimProduct K ProductId BIGINT NOT NULL Description VARCHAR 50 CategoryId INT NOT NULL ListPrice DECIMAL 12 2 WITH C DISTRIBUTION REPLICATE This syntax instructs Parallel Data Warehouse to create a table on all compute nodes Sub sequent commands to insert or delete data affect data in each copy of the table Here is an example of the syntax to create a distributed table CREATE TABLE FactSales C CustomerlId BIGINT SalesId BIGINT Productid BIGINT SaleDate DATE Quantity INT Amount DECIMAL 15 2 WITH C DISTRIBUTE HASH CustomerlId CLUSTERED INDEX SaleDate PARTITION SaleDate RANGE RIGHT FOR VALUES C 2009 01 01 2009 02 01 2009 03 01 2009 04 01 2009 05 01 2009 06 01 2009 07 01 2009 08 01 2009 09 01 2009 10 01 2009 11 01
111. ar to its predecessor Windows Server 2008 R2 continues to supports up to 16 nodes within a failover cluster and organizations can also protect their applications from site failures with SQL Server multi site failover cluster support by using stretched VLANs built on Windows Server support for multi site clusters 63 64 Windows Server 2008 R2 Hyper V The Hyper V virtualization technology im provements in Windows Server 2008 R2 were the most sought after and anticipated enhancements for Windows Server 2008 R2 It is now possible to virtualize heavy SQL Server workloads because Windows Server 2008 R2 scales far beyond its predecessors In addition database administrators can achieve increased virtualization availability by leveraging new technologies such as Clustered Shared Volumes CSV and Live Migra tion both of which are included in Windows Server 2008 R2 Guest clustering with SQL Server 2008 R2 in Windows Server 2008 R2 Hyper V is also supported Live Migration and Hyper V By leveraging Live Migration and CSV two new technologies included with Hyper V and failover clustering on Windows Server 2008 R2 it is possible to move virtual machines between Hyper V hosts within a failover cluster without downtime It is worth noting that CSV and Live Migration are indepen dent technologies CSV is not required for Live Migration Cluster Shared Volumes CSV CSV enables multiple Windows servers running Hyper V to access Storage Area Network
112. art so that the slicer selection can filter an entire report If two slicers are related a selection of items in one slicer automatically highlights and filters the related items in the second slicer For example if you select a year in one slicer the quarters related to that year in a second slicer will also be selected as shown in Figure 10 10 A B c D E l F G H l 1200000 Sum of Year K AW Sum of 2004 2005 2006 1000000 Bicycle Industry 1 2001 2002 RowLabels T Sales Bicycle Sales 200 2002 yee sares A ats 2006 Q1 441613 7061423 4 2003 2007 2008 5 2003 2007 2008 2006 Q2 433992 7270302 4 2003 sods 2006 Q3 367129 7472780 5 i 2006 Q4 423218 10171435 EM quartercode mae GrandTotal 1665952 31975940 7 400000 m 2006 s 200601 J 200602 J 3 2006 a3 200604 200000 E ias o m l 12 Mountain Road Bikes Touring 13 Bikes Bikes 14 2002 Q3 15 2003 16 303 22 2004Q1 18 19 200402 2004 3 20 Lal iil FIGURE 10 10 Selecting Year slicer values also selects QuarterCode slicer values 198 CHAPTER 10 Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot Data Analysis Expressions The ability to combine data from multiple sources into a single PivotTable is amazingly pow erful but you can create even more powerful reports by enriching the PowerPivot data with Data
113. as a comparison of a dataset value to a goal You then define the rules that determine which indicator properly represents the status For example you might create an expression that compares SalesAmount to a goal You could then assign a green check mark if SalesAmount is within 90 percent of the goal a yellow exclamation point if it is within 50 percent of the goal and a red X for everything else Maps A map element is a special type of data visualization that combines geospatial data with other types of data to be analyzed You can use the built in Map Gallery as a background for your data or you can use an ESRI shapefile For more advanced customization you can use SQL Server spatial data types and functions to create your own polygons to represent geographi cal areas points on a map or a connected set of points representing a route Each map can have one or more map layers each of which contains spatial data for drawing the map ana lytical data that will be projected onto the map as color coded regions or markers and rules for assigning colors marker size and other visualization properties to the analytical data In addition you can add Bing Maps tile layers as a background for other layers in your map Data Visualization CH 9 177 178 Although you can manually configure the properties for the map and each map layer the easiest way to get started is to drag a map from the Toolbox window to the report body if you are using Busin
114. as needed if you want to achieve a certain look By placing data bars in a tablix you can compare each group s value to the minimum and maximum values within the range of values across all groups as shown in Figure 9 11 In this example Accessories 2005 is the minimum sales amount and Bikes 2007 is the maximum sales amount The length of each bar allows you to visually assess whether a group is closer to the minimum or the maximum or some ratio in between such as the Bikes 2008 group which is about half of the maximum sales Sales Amount 8 2005 20 235 5 2006 92735 3 2007 296 533 lt 2008 161 794 2005 7 395 349 g 2006 19 956 015 D Fe 2007 25 551 775 D 2008 13 399 243 B 2005 34 376 F 2006 485 587 Z 2007 871 864 2008 386 013 g 2005 615 475 2 2006 3 610 092 fj 3 2007 5 482497 E 2008 2 091 012 j FIGURE 9 11 Data bars Data Visualization 175 176 Sparklines Like data bars sparklines can be used to include a data visualization alongside the detailed data Whereas a data bar usually shows a single point a sparkline shows multiple data points over time making it easier to spot trends You can choose from a variety of sparkline types such as columns area charts pie charts or range charts but most often sparklines are represented by line charts As you can see in Figure 9 12 sparklines are pretty bare compared to a chart You do not see axis labels tick marks or a legend to help yo
115. ation 1 Week 80 0 80 0 C 1 Month ries 60 0 40 0 20 0 RNAS 0 0 12 00 4 00PM 8 00PM 12 00 4 00AM 8 00 AM 12 00 4 00PM 8 00PM 12 00 4 00 AM 8 00 AM PM AM PM AM FIGURE 5 11 The data tier application viewpoint Resource utilization for each deployed data tier application is presented in the list view lo cated at the top of the Utility Explorer Content pane Health state icons appear at the right of each deployed data tier application and provide summary status for each deployed data tier application based on the utilization category Three icons are used to indicate the health state of each deployed data tier application A green check mark indicates that the deployed data tier application is well utilized and does not violate any policies A red arrow indicates that the deployed data tier application is overutilized and a green arrow indicates underutiliza tion The lower half of the view contains tabs for CPU utilization storage volume utilization access policy definitions and property details for each data tier application For example the computer CPU and volume space for the AccountingDB and FinanceDB data tier applications shown in Figure 5 11 are underutilized In addition the application CPU and the file space utilization for all deployed data tier applications are well utilized and the volume space for AdventureWorks2005 and AdventureWorks2008R2 are overutilized The data tier ap
116. ation and Moni toring a discussion on consolidation strategies teaches readers how to improve resource optimization This chapter also explains how to use the new dashboard and viewpoints to gain insight into application and database utilization and it also covers how to use capacity policy violations to help identify consolidation oppor tunities maximize investments and ultimately maintain healthier systems In Part Il Business Intelligence Development readers discover components new to the SQL Server data platform as well as significant enhancements to the reporting component Chapter 6 Scalable Data Warehousing introduces the data warehouse appliance known as SQL Server 2008 R2 Parallel Data Warehouse by explaining its architecture reviewing data layout strategies for optimal query performance and describing the integration points with SQL Server BI com ponents In Chapter 7 Master Data Services readers learn about master data management concepts and the new Master Data Services component Chapter 8 Complex Event Processing with StreamInsight describes scenarios that benefit from complex event analysis and it illustrates how to develop applications that use the SQL Server StreamInsight engine for complex event processing Chapter 9 Reporting Services Enhancements reviews all the new features available in SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services that support self service reporting and address common rep
117. ative Tools on the Start menu In the Failover Cluster Manager snap in if the cluster that will be configured is not dis played in the console tree right click Failover Cluster Manager Click Manage A Cluster and then select or specify the cluster If the console tree is collapsed expand the tree under the cluster you want Click Services And Applications In the Action pane click Configure A Service Or Application If the Before You Begin page of the High Availability Wizard appears click Next High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements 11 12 On the Select Service Or Application page shown in Figure 4 9 click Virtual Machine and then click Next High Availability Wizard Select Service or Application Before You Begin Select the service or application that you want to configure for high availability IE Generic Script Description DF Generic Service virtual machine is a virtualized Internet Storage Name Service ISNS Server computer system running on a physical Select Virtual Machine emain 2 Message Queuing computer Multiple virtual machines can Configure High E Other S run on one computer Availability Ga Other Server fe Print Server Summary w Remote Desktop Connection Broker irtua e J WINS Server More about services and applications you can configure for high availability lt Previous nee Cancel FIGURE 4 9 Selecting the service and applicati
118. atone es Creating a UCP by Using SSMS 26 Creating a UCP by Using Windows PowerShell 28 UCP Post Installation Steps 29 Enrolling SQL Server Instances 0 e ccc eects 29 Managed Instance Enrollment Prerequisites 30 Enrolling SQL Server Instances by Using SSMS 30 Enrolling SQL Server Instances by Using Windows PowerShell 32 The Managed Instances Dashboard 32 Managing Utility Administration Settings 0 008 33 Connecting to a UCP 33 The Policy Tab 34 The Security Tab 37 The Data Warehouse Tab 39 CHAPTER 3 Data Tier Applications 41 Introduction to Data Tier Applications 0 0 e eee eee 41 The Data Tier Application Life Cycle 42 Common Uses for Data Tier Applications 43 Supported SQL Server Objects 44 Visual Studio 2010 and Data Tier Application Projects 45 Launching a Data Tier Application Project Template in Visual Studio 2010 45 Importing an Existing Data Tier Application Project into Visual Studio 2010 47 Extracting a Data Tier Application with SQL Server Management Studio 0 eee eee 49 Installing a New DAC Instance with the Deploy Data Tier Application Wizard 00 e eee eae 52 Registering a Data Tier Application 0 cece eee eee 55 Deleting a Data Tier Application 00 56 Upgrading a Data Tier Application 0 ee eee 59 CHAPTER 4 High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements Enhancements to High Availabil
119. authentication is not enabled by default in Reporting Services You must modify the RSReportServer config file by following the instructions in SQL Server Books Online in the topic How to Configure Basic Authentication in Reporting Services at http msdn microsoft com en us library cc281309 aspx RDL Sandboxing When you grant external users access to a report server the security risks multiply enormously and additional steps must be taken to mitigate those risks Reporting Services now supports configuration changes through the use of the RDL Sandboxing feature on the report server to isolate access to resources on the server as an important part of a threat mitigation strategy Resource isolation is a common requirement for hosted services that have multiple tenants on the same server Essentially the configuration changes allow you to restrict the external resources that can be accessed by the server such as images XLST files maps and data sources You can also restrict the types and functions used in expressions by namespace and by member and check reports as they are deployed to ensure that the restricted types are not in use You can also restrict the text length and the size of an expression s return value when a report executes With sandboxing reports cannot include custom code in their code blocks nor can reports include SQL Server 2005 custom report items or references to named parameters in expressions The trace log will ca
120. base CREATE DATABASE DW WITH AUTOGROW ON REPLICATED_SIZE 50 DISTRIBUTED SIZE 10000 LOG_SIZE 25 X This statement uses the following options m AUTOGROW This option specifies whether to enable or disable the automatic growth feature This feature allows Parallel Data Warehouse to manage the growth of data and log files as needed over time m REPLICATED SIZE This specifies the total space in gigabytes allocated to replicated tables and associated data on each compute node Parallel Data Warehouse stores replicated tables in a SQL Server filegroup on each compute node DISTRIBUTED SIZE This specifies the total space in gigabytes allocated to distrib uted tables on the appliance Parallel Data Warehouse divides the space among all dis tributions on the compute nodes and stores each distribution in a separate SQL Server filegroup In the SN architecture of Parallel Data Warehouse each distribution has its own set of disks for storage This set of disks is configured as a logical unit number LUN LOG SIZE This option specifies the total space in gigabytes allocated to the transac tion log on the appliance You should plan for the log file size to be large enough to accommodate the largest data load that you expect The automatic growth feature adjusts the log size as needed if you underestimate the required log file size CREATE TABLE The CREATE TABLE statement syntax varies slightly from its syntax in standard Tr
121. base administrators and developers can upgrade their existing deployed data tier applications to a new version of the DAC by simply building a new DAC package that contains the new or updated schema and properties The upgrade can be accomplished by using Windows PowerShell commands or the Up grade Data Tier Application Wizard in SQL Server Management Studio The tools are intend ed to upgrade a deployed DAC to a different version of the same application For example an organization may want to upgrade the Accounting DAC from version 1 0 to version 2 0 The upgrade wizard first preserves the database that will be upgraded by making a copy of it It then creates a new database that includes the schema and objects of the new version of the DAC The original database s mode is then set to read only and the data is copied to the new version After the data transfer is complete the new DAC assumes the original database name The renamed DAC remains on the SQL Server instance There are a few actions that data tier developers and database administrators should always perform before a data tier application upgrade First the schema associated with the original DAC should be compared to the new DAC Second database administrators must confirm that the amount of data held in the existing DAC does not exceed the size limit of the new DAC database To upgrade a data tier application by using the Upgrade Data Tier Ap plication Wizard follow these steps 1
122. blems further is data that has no official home in the organization s data management infrastructure Older data might be archived and no longer available in operational systems Other data might reside only in e mail or in a Microsoft Access database on a computer sitting under someone s desk Some organizations try their best not to add another system dedicated to master data management to minimize the number of systems they must maintain However ultimately they find that neither existing applications nor ETL processes can be sufficiently extended to accommodate their requirements Proper master data management requires a wide range of functionality that is difficult if not impossible to replicate through minor adaptations to an organization s technical infrastructure Last the challenges associated with analytic master data stem from the need to man age dimensions more effectively For example analysts might require certain attributes in a business intelligence Bl solution but these attributes might have no source in the line of business applications on which the BI solution is built In such a case the ETL developer can easily create a set of static attributes to load into the BI solution but what happens when the analyst wants to add more attributes Moreover how gracefully can that solution handle changes to hierarchical structures Key Features of Master Data Services The goal of MDS is to address the challenges of both operation
123. cannot directly edit the data after adding it to PowerPivot you can replace it by pasting in fresh data or add to it by appending additional data To do this you use the Paste Replace or Paste Append button respectively Data Preparation After importing data into tables your next step is to prepare the data for analysis by defining relationships between tables You can also choose to enhance the data by applying filters and modifying column properties PowerPivot for Excel 193 194 Relationships By building relationships between the data you can analyze the data as if it all came from a common source Relationships enable you to use related data in the same PivotTable even though the underlying data actually comes from different sources Defining relationship between columns into two PowerPivot tables is similar to defining a foreign key relationship between two columns in a relational database Excel power users can understand defining relationships as analogous to using the VLOOKUP function to reference data elsewhere In addition to consolidating data for PivotTables there are other benefits of building relationships You can filter data in a table based on data found in related columns or you can use the formula language to perform a lookup of values in a related column These techniques provide alternative ways to eliminate data redundancy which keeps the workbook smaller When you import related tables at the same time the Tabl
124. cation runs on IIS on the control node and is accessible by using Internet Explorer The Admin Console allows you to view these options Appliance Dashboard Displays status details such as utilization metrics for CPUs disks and the network and displays activity on the nodes Queries Activity Displays a list of running queries and queries recently completed with related errors if any and provides the ability to drill down to details to view the query execution plan and node execution information Load Activity Displays load plans the current state of loads and related errors if any Backup and Restore Displays a log of backup operations m Active Locks Displays a list of locks across all nodes and their current status Active Sessions Displays active user sessions to aid monitoring of resource contention Application Errors Displays error event information Node Health Displays hardware and software alerts and allows an administrator to view the health of specific nodes To manage database objects you might need to query the tables or view the objects The version of SQL Server Management Studio included with SQL Server 2008 R2 is not currently compatible with Parallel Data Warehouse but you can still use other tools For example you can use a command line utility Dwsql to query a table Using Dwsql is similar to using Sql cmd An alternative with a graphical user interface is the Nexus query tool from Coffing Data Wareho
125. ce BI collaboration and tight integration with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Microsoft SharePoint 2010 and SQL Server PowerPivot for SharePoint make it the best database platform available SQL Server 2008 R2 is considered to be a minor version upgrade of SQL Server 2008 However for a minor upgrade it offers a tremendous amount of new breakthrough capabilities that DBAs can take advantage of Microsoft has made major investments in the SQL Server product as a whole however the new features and breakthrough capabilities that should interest DBAs the most are the advancements in application and multi server administration This section introduces some of the new features and capabilities Application and Multi Server Administration Enhancements The SQL Server product group has made sizeable investments in improving application and multi server management capabilities Some of the main application and multi server admin istration enhancements that allow organizations to better manage their SQL Server environ ments include The SQL Server Utility This is a new manageability feature used to centrally monitor and manage database applications and SQL Server instances from a single management interface known as a Utility Control Point UCP Instances of SQL Server data tier applications database files and volumes are managed and viewed within the SQL Server Utility The Utility Control Point UCP As the central reasoning point for th
126. ch processing is complete you can review the status of the batch in the staging batch log which is available in Master Data Manager as shown in Figure 7 11 Staging Batches ID Name Model Version Status Started Completed Records Errors 1 ChartOfAccounts VERSION_1Not Running 2 6 2010 9 56 57 PM 2 6 2010 9 57 11 PM 3519 0 2 Customer VERSION _1Not Running2 6 2010 10 02 58 PM2 6 2010 10 04 25 PM 103290 0 3 Product VERSION_1Not Running2 6 2010 10 10 26 PM2 6 2010 10 11 00 PM 13479 0 FIGURE 7 11 The staging batch log If the log indicates any errors for the staging batch you can select the batch in the log and then view the Staging Batch Errors page to see a description of the error for each record that did not successfully load into the MDS database You can also check the Status_ID column of the staging table to distinguish between successful and failed records which have a column value of 1 and 2 respectively At this point you should return to the source system and update the pertinent records to correct the errors The next steps would be to truncate the staging table to remove all records and finally to load the updated records At this point you can create a new staging batch and repeat the process until all records successfully load Exporting Master Data Of course MDS is not a destination system for your master data It can be both a system of entry and a system of record for applications important to the daily operations of
127. compute node Replicated table FIGURE 6 3 Replicated strategy Distributed Strategy One of the keys to performance in an MPP architecture is the distribution of large tables across multiple nodes as shown in Figure 6 4 To distribute a fact table you simply select a column from the table to use as the distribution column and when data is loaded into the table Parallel Data Warehouse automatically spreads the rows across all of the compute CHAPTER6 Scalable Data Warehousing nodes in the appliance There are performance considerations for the selection of a distribution column such as distinctness data skew and the types of queries executed on the system For a detailed discussion of the choice of distributed tables refer to the product documentation To distribute the rows in the fact table a hash function assigns each row to one of many stor age locations based on the distribution column Each compute node has 8 storage locations called distributions for the hashed rows If a data rack has 8 compute nodes the data rack has 64 distributions which are queried in parallel Each table row belongs to one Compute nodes distribution Distributed table FIGURE 6 4 Distributed strategy It is not essen
128. console tree right click Failover Cluster Manager click Manage A Cluster and then select or specify the cluster to be configured Right click the failover cluster and then choose Enable Cluster Shared Volumes The Enable Cluster Shared Volumes dialog box opens Read and accept the terms and restrictions associated with CSV Then click OK In this step you add storage to the CSV You can do this either by right clicking Cluster Shared Volumes and selecting Add Storage or by selecting Add Storage under Actions In the Add Storage dialog box select from the list of available disks and then click OK After the disk or disks selected have been added they appear in the Results pane for Cluster Shared Volumes NOTE SystemDrive ClusterStorage is the CSV storage location for each node associated with the failover cluster Folders for each volume added to the CSV are stored in this location Administrators needing to view the list of volumes can do so in Failover Cluster Manager Creating a SQL Server VM with Hyper V Before leveraging Live Migration organizations must follow the instructions in this section to create a SQL Server VM with Hyper V in Windows Server 2008 R2 Ensure that the Hyper V role is installed on the server that you use to create the SQL Server 2008 R2 VM Click Start click Administrative Tools and then click Hyper V Manager In the Action pane click New and then click Virtual Machine The New Virtual Machine Wizard
129. ction ur purpose in ntroducing Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 is to point out both O the new and the improved in the latest version of SQL Server Because this version is Release 2 R2 of SQL Server 2008 you might think the changes are relatively minor more than a service pack but not enough to justify an entirely new version However as you read this book we think you will find that there are a lot of exciting enhancements and new capabilities engineered into SQL Server 2008 R2 that will have a positive impact on your applications ranging from improvements in operation to those in management It is definitely not a minor release Who Is This Book For This book is for anyone who has an interest in SQL Server 2008 R2 and wants to understand its capabilities In a book of this size we cannot cover every feature that distinguishes SQL Server from other databases and consequently we assume that you have some familiarity with SQL Server already You might be a data base administrator DBA an application developer a power user or a technical decision maker Regardless of your role we hope that you can use this book to discover the features in SQL Server 2008 R2 that are most beneficial to you How Is This Book Organized SQL Server 2008 R2 like its predecessors is more than a database engine It is a collection of components that you can implement either separately or as a group to form a scalable data platform In broad term
130. d Microsoft SQL Server Parallel Data Warehouse covered in Chapter 6 Scalable Data Warehousing as new options in the Type drop down list To build a dataset with any of these sources you can use a graph ical query designer or type a query string applicable to the data source provider type You can also use SQL Server PowerPivot for SharePoint as a data source although this option is not included in the list of data source providers Instead you use the SQL Server Analysis Services provider and then provide the URL for the workbook that you want to use as a data source You can learn more about using a PowerPivot workbook as a data source in Chapter 10 Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot Expression Language Improvements There are several new functions added to the expression language as well as new capa bilities for existing functions These improvements allow you to combine data from two different datasets in the same data region create aggregated values from aggregated values define report layout behavior that depends on the rendering format and modify report variables during report execution 165 166 Combining Data from More Than One Dataset To display data from more than one source in a table or in any data region for that matter you must create a dataset that somehow combines the data because a data region binds to one and only one dataset You could create a query for the dataset that joins the data if b
131. d is quite useful for troubleshooting a failover cluster Administrators who run tests relating to the specific issues they are experiencing are likely to yield valuable information and answers on how to address their issues For ex ample if you are experiencing issues with Multipath I O MPIO a specific driver or shared storage after a successful implementation of a failover cluster the wizard would identify the problem for quick resolution 70 High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements The Windows Server 2008 R2 Best Practices Analyzer Another tool available in Windows Server 2008 R2 is a server management tool referred to as the Best Practices Analyzer BPA The BPA determines how compliant a server role is by comparing it against best practices in eight categories security performance configuration policy operation pre deployment post deployment and BPA prerequisites In each catego ry the effectiveness trustworthiness and reliability of a role is taken into consideration Each role measured by the BPA will be assigned one of the following three severity levels Non compliant Compliant or Warning A server role not in agreement with best practice guide lines is labeled as Noncompliant and a role in agreement with best practice guidelines is labeled as Compliant Server roles inherit the Warning severity level when a BPA scan detects compliance but also a risk that the server role will fall out of compliance Databas
132. d that there may be data loss if you proceed with the upgrade as illustrated in Figure 3 11 Select the Proceed Despite Possible Loss Of Changes check box and click Next to continue Fs Upgrade Data tier Application Ioi x ay Detect Change LS Introduction Help SG SEIFERT Compare objects between the deployed DAC definition and database Detect Change Summary Upgrade DAC Change detection results L The database AccountingDB has changed IV Proceed despite possible loss of changes The wizard detected that changes were made directly to the database using a method other than upgrading the DAC These changes may not be preserved in the upgraded database However the original database is preserved and renamed during the upgrade process and you can migrate the appropriate changes from the original database after the upgrade is complete Save Report lt Previous Lsm Finish Cancel FIGURE 3 11 The Detect Change page of the Upgrade Data Tier Application Wizard Data Tier Applications NOTE lf the database has changed it is a best practice to review the potential data losses before you proceed and verify that this is the outcome you want for the upgrad ed database However the original database is still preserved renamed and maintained on the SQL Server instance Any data changes can be migrated from the original data base to the new database after the upgrade is complete The next page includ
133. d viewpoints in the Utility Explorer Content pane by connecting to a UCP and then selecting the Deployed Data Tier Application node in the Utility Explorer tree The Utility Explorer Content pane displays the view as illustrated in Figure 5 11 that communicates the health and utilization status for the application CPU the computer CPU file space and volume space Consolidation and Monitoring R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio jor x File Edit View Tools Window Community Help i H new Query D D a Ces e el GS Hh g Utility Explorer Content Object Explorer Details zx Production Utility SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO1 Deployed Data tier Applications Name Aj jon CPU Computer CPU File Space Volume Policy T Instance Name 2 AccountingDB O iC Override SQL2K6R2 01 INSTANCEOS J AdventureWorks2005 ga 3 o Override SQLZK8R2 03 INSTANCE03 T Adventureworks2008R2 o v or Override SQL2K8R2 O3 INSTANCEOS T FinanceDB 7 D T Override SQL2K6R2 01 INSTANCEO4 2 Human Resources 7 3 Override SQLZKER2 O1 INSTANCE04 29 Northwind o 7 Override SQL2K8R2 O1 INSTANCEOS gy Test o C OJ Override SQL2ZK8R2 01 INSTANCEOS 2 Test 3 OJ T Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEOL D Test o o Override SQLZK8R2 01 INSTANCE02 4 CPU Utilization storage Utilization Policy Details Property Detais CPU Utilization for AccountingDB m Interval Apay 100 0 100 0 E Deployed Data tier Applic
134. de control management or interface functions It contains several types of nodes that Parallel Data Warehouse uses to process user queries to load and back up data and to manage the appliance Some of the nodes serve as intermediaries between the corporate network and the private network that connects the nodes in both the control rack and data rack You never interact directly with the data rack you submit a data load or a query to the control rack which then coordinates the processes between nodes to complete your request Most Parallel Data Warehouse activity involves coordination with the control node To sup port high availability the control node is a two node active passive cluster If the active node fails for any reason the passive node takes over The redundancy between the two nodes ensures the appliance can recover quickly from a failure Parallel Data Warehouse uses multiple networking technologies The control rack servers connect to the corporate network by using the corporate Ethernet The compute node serv ers connect to their dedicated database storage by using a Fibre Channel network A high speed InfiniBand network internally connects all the servers in the appliance to one another Because InfiniBand is much faster than a Gigabit Ethernet network it is better suited for the Parallel Data Warehouse nodes which must transfer high volumes of data and be as fast as possible For high availability the switching fabric of each
135. de migration when installing SQL Server 2008 R2 The following sections elaborate on the different strategies The In Place Upgrade An in place upgrade is the upgrade of an existing SQL Server installation to SQL Server 2008 R2 When an in place upgrade is conducted the SQL Server 2008 R2 setup program replaces the previous SQL Server binaries with the new SQL Server 2008 R2 binaries on the same machine SQL Server data is automatically converted from the previous version to SQL Server 2008 R2 This means that data does not have to be copied or migrated In the example in Figure 1 5 a DBA is conducting an in place upgrade on a SQL Server 2005 instance running on Server 1 When the upgrade is complete Server 1 still exists but the SQL Server 2005 instance including all of its data is now upgraded to SQL Server 2008 R2 Pre migration Post migration gt Upgrade Server 1 Server 1 SQL Server 2005 SQL Server 2008 R2 FIGURE 1 5 An in place upgrade from SQL Server 2005 to SQL Server 2008 R2 NOTE SQL Server 2000 SQL Server 2005 and SQL Server 2008 are all supported for an in place upgrade to SQL Server 2008 R2 Unfortunately earlier editions such as SQL Server 7 0 and SQL Server 6 5 cannot be upgraded to SQL Server 2008 R2 CHAPTER SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements In Place Upgrade Pros and Cons The in place upgrade strategy is usually easier and considered less risky compared to the side by side migration strategy
136. deployment and maintenance is simplified because the solution comes preassembled from certified hardware vendors Integration with Microsoft SQL Azure The client tools included with SQL Server 2008 R2 allow DBAs to connect to SQL Azure a cloud based service SQL Azure is part of the Windows Azure platform and offers a flexible and fully relational database solution in the cloud The hosted database is built on SQL Server technologies and is completely managed Therefore organizations do not have to install configure or deal with the day to day operations of managing a SQL Server infrastructure to support their database needs Other key benefits offered by SQL Azure include simplification of the provisioning process support for Transact SQL and transparent failover Yet an other enhancement affiliated with SQL Azure is the Generate And Publish Scripts Wiz ard which now includes SQL Azure as both a source and a destination for publishing scripts SQL Azure has something for businesses of all sizes For example startups and medium sized businesses can use this service to create scalable custom applications and larger businesses can use SQL Azure to build corporate departmental applications Installation of SQL Server with Sysprep Organizations have been using the System Preparation tool Sysprep for many years now to automate the deployment of operating systems SQL Server 2008 R2 introduces this technology to SQL Server Installing SQL Server
137. der the VM name click Settings In the left pane click Automatic Start Action Implementing Live Migration for SQL Server 2008 R2 79 80 4 Under Automatic Start Action for the What Do You Want This Virtual Machine To Do When The Physical Computer Starts question select Nothing as shown in Figure 4 8 Then click Apply and OK FRB Settings for SQLServer2008R2 M01 ID x Sqlserver2008R2 vM01 7 q IG a _ Hardware I Automatic Start Action I Add Hardware i B105 What do you want this virtual machine to do when the physical computer starts Boot from CD Nothing its C Automatically start if it was running when the service stopped 2024 MB m C Always start this virtual machine automatically Processor 1 Virtual processo Automatic start delay E IDE Controller 0 Specify a startup delay to reduce resource contention between virtual machines amp Hard Drive Startup delay seconds erver2 S E IDE Controller 1 DVD Drive None B3 SCSI Controller Network Adapter Public Virtual Network comi None FF com2 None bX Diskette Drive None Management er ver 20 Integration Services All services offered 6 Snapshot File Location C ClusterStorage Wolume1 SQLSe iD Automatic Start Action None Is Automatic Stop Action Save FIGURE 4 8 Configuring the Automatic Start Action Setting screen Launch Failover Cluster Manager from Administr
138. e Current Owner lt none gt lt none gt Nodet E Add storage Client Access Name Capacity Other Resources E Add a resource lt none gt Total 0 Bytes z Free Space 0 Bytes Disable auto start IP Addresses Percent Free 0 EE Show Dependency Report X Delete E Properties zi This action will live migrate the virtual machine to node NODE2 lt none gt FIGURE 4 12 Initiating Live Migration for a SQL Server VM 6 Verify that the VM successfully migrated to the node selected The VM should be listed under the new node in Current Owner Implementing Live Migration for SQL Server 2008 R2 Consolidation and Monitoring oday s competitive economy dictates that organizations reduce cost and improve Tew in their database environments This means the large percentage of organiza tions out there running underutilized Microsoft SQL Server installations must take con trol of their environments in order to experience significant cost savings and increased activity Thankfully enhancements in hardware and software technologies have unlocked new opportunities to reduce costs through consolidation Consolidation reduces the number of physical servers in an organization s environment directly impacting costs in numerous areas including but not limited to hardware administration power consump tion and licenses Equally important by leveraging the new SQL Server Utility feature in Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 orga
139. e NULL E Schema Comparisons Address nvarchar 6 COLLATE SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS NULL E Gy Schema Objects City nvarchar 15 COLLATE SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS NULL m E Database Level Objects Region nvarchar 15 COLLATE SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS NULL E B Schemas PostalCode nvarchar 10 COLLATE SQl_Latin1 General CP1_CI_AS NULL a a ET Country nvarchar 15 COLLATE SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS NULL a aei HomePhone nvarchar 24 COLLATE SQL_Latinl_General_CP1_CI_AS NULL DA Synonyms Extension nvarchar 4 COLLATE SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS NULL E De Tables Photo image NULL a Constraints Notes ntext COLLATE SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS NULL D D Indexes ReportsTo int NULL Gu keys PhotoPath nvarchar 255 COLLATE SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS NULL C Statistics CONSTRAINT PK_Employees PRIMARY KEY CLUSTERED E Triggers S Categories table sql EmployeeID ASC SS CustomerCustomerDemo table sql WITH PAD_INDEX OFF STATISTICS_NORECOMPUTE OFF IGNORE_DUP_KEY OFF 3 CustomerDemographics table sql ALLOW_ROW_LOCKS ON ALLOW_PAGE_LOCKS ON Customers table sql CONSTRAINT FK_Employees Employees FOREIGN KEY ReportsTo 53 Employees table sql REFERENCES Employees EmployeeID S EmployeeTerrtories table sql i k SS Order Details table sql INT CK_Birthdate CHECK BirthDate lt getdate WETA Ck_Birthdate BirthDate lt g 0 E orders tebia sdl SS Products
140. e Import Wizard automatically detects that they are related and creates the detected relationships You can also manually create relationships by using the Create Relationship button on the Design tab of the Power Pivot ribbon as shown in Figure 10 4 NOTE Acolumn cannot participate in more than one relationship and you cannot create circular relationships E Home Design H By Add a eS jii we FIF Delete Hide and Calculation Existing Unhide Options Connections e Lag Undo x Es Redo Manage Table Relationship Relationships Properties Columns Calculations Connections Relationships Properties Edit FIGURE 10 4 The Create Relationship button Filters After you import data into PowerPivot you cannot delete rows from the resulting PowerPivot table To keep your workbook as small as possible you should apply filters during the import process to exclude unneeded rows right away After completing the import you can modify the table properties to add a filter and then update the table to keep only rows that meet the filter criteria You can also apply filters to the imported data if you want the data to be available for other purposes later while hiding specific rows from the presentation layer in the current report You can filter by name in the same way that you normally filter in Excel by selecting from a list of values in a column to identify the rows that you want to keep As an alterna
141. e SQL Server Utility the Utility Control Point collects configuration and performance information from managed instances of SQL Server every 15 minutes After data has been collected from the managed instances the SQL Server Utility dashboard and viewpoints in SQL Server Management Studio SSMS provide DBAs with a health summary of SQL Server resources through policy evaluation and historical analysis For more information on the SQL Server Utility Utility Control Points and managing instances of SQL Server see Chapter 2 Multi Server Administration Data tier applications A data tier application DAC is a single unit of deployment containing all of the database s schema dependant objects and deployment require ments used by an application A DAC can be deployed in one of two ways it can be authored by using the SQL Server data tier application project in Visual Studio 2010 or it can be created by extracting a DAC definition from an existing database with the Extract Data Tier Application Wizard in SSMS Through the use of DACs the deploy ment of data applications and the collaboration between data tier developers and DBAs is significantly improved For more information on authoring deploying and managing data tier applications see Chapter 3 Data Tier Applications Utility Explorer dashboards The dashboards in the SQL Server Utility offer DBAs tremendous insight into resource utilization and health state for managed ins
142. e administrators find this tool instrumental in achieving success with their failover cluster setup First the Windows Server 2008 R2 BPA can help database administrators reduce best practice violations by scanning one or more roles installed on a server running Windows Server 2008 R2 On completion the BPA creates a report that itemizes every best practice violation from the most severe to the least severe It is also possible to customize a BPA report For example database administrators can omit results they deem unnecessary or unimportant Last administrators can also perform BPA tasks by using either the Server Man ager GUI or Windows PowerShell cmdlets Running the Best Practices Analyzer The BPA is installed by default on all editions of Windows Server 2008 R2 except the Server Core installation option If BPA is installed on your edition run it in Server Manager Follow these steps 1 Click Start click Administrative Tools and then select Server Manager 2 Open Roles from the navigation pane Next select the role to be scanned with BPA 3 Open the Summary section in the details pane Next open the Best Practices Analyzer area 4 Click Scan This Role to initiate the scan 5 When the scan is complete review the results in the Best Practices Analyzer results window Failover Clustering with Windows Server 2008 R2 71 72 SQL Server 2008 R2 Virtualization and Hyper V Virtualization is one of the hottest topics of
143. e an event stream object you write a LINQ expression on top of the event stream object You use LINQ expressions to define the fields for output events to filter events before query processing to group events into subsets and to perform calculations aggre gations and ranking You can even use LINQ expressions to combine events from multiple streams through join or union operations Think of LINQ expressions as the questions you ask of the streaming data Projection The projection operation which occurs in the select clause of the LINQ expression allows you to add more fields to the payload or apply calculations to the input event fields You then project the results into a new event by using field assignments You can create a new event type implicitly in the expressions or you can refer to an existing event type explicitly Consider an example in which you need to increment the fields x and y from every event in the inputStream stream by one The following code example shows how to use field assign ments to implicitly define a new event type by using projection var outputStream from e in inputStream select new x e x 1 y e y 1 To refer to an existing event type you cannot use the type s constructor you must use field assignments in an expression For example assume you have an existing event type called myEventType You can change the previous code example as shown here to reference the event type explicitly var ou
144. e classes 151 installing MDS Master Data Services 127 instances See also managed instances SQL Server instances enrolling 29 32 utilization monitoring 91 validating 31 viewing 91 Integration Services 123 InteractiveSize property reports 172 Internet Explorer requirement 15 interval event model 147 J join operations 161 L Landing Zone node 114 linked documents 205 linked tables 193 LINQ expressions 155 Live Migration See also Hyper V benefits of 87 88 configuring virtual machines for 79 82 implementing 75 initiating 83 overview of 64 72 load activity monitoring 122 look and feel properties 169 170 Lookup function 166 LookupSet function 168 M managed instances See also instances SQL Server instances global policies for 34 health status of 91 maximum number of 29 210 importing master data overutilized resources 92 processor utilization 96 underutilized resources 92 viewing 91 Managed Instances viewpoint Utility Explorer 95 100 management node 114 management utilities See Best Practices Analyzer BPA SQL Server Utility ManagementService API 163 maps 177 178 massively parallel processing MPP 9 master data 125 126 Master Data Manager areas in 128 129 batch creation 135 136 data maintenance with 131 data stewards 127 model deployment 142 subscription view creating 136 Master Data Services Configuration Manager 128 MDS Master Data Services API 12
145. e hardware requirements for a typical SQL Server 2008 R2 installation Typical installations include SQL Server 2008 R2 Standard and Enterprise running on Windows Server operating systems If you need information for Itanium based systems or compatible desktop operating systems see Hardware and Software Requirements for Installing SQL Server 2008 R2 at http msdn microsoft com en us library ms143506 SQL 105 aspx TABLE 1 1 Hardware Requirements HARDWARE COMPONENT REQUIREMENTS Processor Processor type 64 bit x64 a Minimum AMD Opteron AMD Athlon 64 Intel Xeon with Intel EM64T support Intel Pentium IV with EM64T support m Processor speed minimum 1 4 GHz 2 0 GHz or faster recommended Processor type 32 bit m Intel Pentium Ill compatible processor or faster m Processor speed minimum 1 0 GHz 2 0 GHz or faster recommended Memory RAM Minimum 1 GB Recommended 4 GB or more Maximum Operating system maximum SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements HARDWARE COMPONENT Disk Space REQUIREMENTS Database Engine 280 MB Analysis Services 90 MB Reporting Services 120 MB Integration Services 120 MB Client components 850 MB SQL Server Books Online 240 MB TABLE 1 2 Software Requirements SOFTWARE COMPONENT Operating system NET Framework SQL Server support tools and software Internet Explorer Virtualization REQUIREMENTS Windows Server 2003 SP2 x64 Datacenter Enterprise or Stan dard editi
146. e or PivotChart You can convert a PivotTable to a collection of cube function formulas if you prefer a free form layout of your PowerPivot data Regardless of which layout you choose for the report you can add slicers to support interac tive filtering PivotTables You create a report by selecting a layout template from the PivotTable menu available from the PivotTable button on the PowerPivot ribbon as shown in Figure 10 7 and specifying a target worksheet in the Excel workbook You can create a layout independently of the avail able templates by selecting Single PivotTable or Single PivotChart as many times as you need and targeting a different location on the same worksheet for each object ie PivotTable ia PivotChart iia ai Chart and Table Horizontal Chart and Table Vertical He aa Two Charts Horizontal Two Charts Vertical iil Four Charts Flattened PivotTable FIGURE 10 7 Report layout templates NOTE The standard Excel ribbon also includes buttons for building a PivotTable or PivotChart but you must use the buttons on the PowerPivot ribbon when you want to use PowerPivot data Assume that you select the Chart And Table Horizontal template Placeholders for the chart and table appear on the worksheet and a new worksheet appears in the workbook to 196 Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot store the data that you selected for the chart Just as you do with a standard PivotTable or Pivo
147. e previous example do not assign this user the sysadmin role on the Server Role page If you do the user will automatically become a Utility Administrator and not a Utility Reader on the UCP 6 In Utility Explorer connect to the UCP instance in which you created the login SQL2K8R2 01 Test2 7 Select the Utility Administration node and then select the Security tab in the Utility Explorer Content pane 8 Next to the newly created user SQL2K8R2 01 Test2 as shown in Figure 2 8 grant the Utility Reader privilege and then click Apply Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio BEE File Edit Yiew Tools Window Community Help EL New Query D D D fo G oF le GS g Utility Explorer Content x Policy Security Data Warehouse l Select the logins from this instance of SQL Server that will be granted read only privileges for the SQL Server Utility dashboard and viewpoints These logins will be added to the Utility Reader role To remove a login from the Utility Reader role clear the check box Logins that have sysadmin privileges on this instance of SQL Server are administrators on the utility control point To grant sysadmin privileges to a login or add logins to this list use SQL Server Object Explorer Login Utility Reader Note M5_PolicyEventProcessingLogin mi M5_PolicyTsqlExecutionLogin m NT AUTHORITYISYSTEM w Reader privileges for this login cannot be
148. eWorks2008R2 Deployed Date 1 30 2010 1 47 AM Trustworthy False Collation SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AaS Compatibility Level Yersion80 Encryption Enabled False Recovery Model Full Last Reported Time 2 3 2010 9 05 AM FIGURE 5 14 The Property Details tab on the Data Tier Applications viewpoint Using the Data Tier Application Viewpoint 105 Business Intelligence Development Stacia MISNER CHAPTER6 Scalable Data Warehousing 109 CHAPTER 7 Master Data Services 125 CHAPTER8 amp Complex Event Processing with Streaminsight 145 CHAPTER 9 Reporting Services Enhancements 165 CHAPTER 10 Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot 189 Scalable Data Warehousing icrosoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Parallel Data Warehouse is an enterprise data ware house appliance based on technology originally created by DATAllegro and acquired by Microsoft in 2008 In the months following the acquisition Microsoft re vamped the product by changing it from a product that used the Linux operating system and Ingres database technologies to a product based on SQL Server 2008 R2 and the Windows Server 2008 operating system SQL Server 2008 Enterprise has many features supporting scalability and data warehouse performance that Parallel Data Warehouse uses to its advantage The combination of SQL Server scalability and performance with a massively parallel processing MPP architecture in Parallel Data Warehouse creates a powerful new opt
149. ed by adding the number of days specified in the second argument or other period as specified by the third argument to the column specified in the first argument PowerPivot for SharePoint PowerPivot for SharePoint provides server side support for PowerPivot workbooks by extending the capabilities of SharePoint and Excel Services in SharePoint SharePoint provides centralized management of the PowerPivot workbooks and Excel Services manages data queries and the rendering of the query results in the browser Installation of PowerPivot for SharePoint adds services to the SharePoint farm and includes a document library template content types dashboards and Web parts that provide access to PowerPivot reports and support monitoring their usage Architecture PowerPivot for SharePoint requires SharePoint Enterprise Edition and Excel Services You must install Analysis Services with SharePoint Integration on a SharePoint Web front end In SharePoint Central Administration you configure the PowerPivot System Service and activate the PowerPivot feature on the target site collection PowerPivot for SharePoint uses a scalable architecture shown in Figure 10 12 that allows you to add or remove instances as needed when you require more or less processing capacity When you add an instance the Share Point autodiscovery feature ensures that the new instance can be found and the PowerPivot System Service has a load balancing feature that will use
150. ed storage utilization is displayed for each database filegroup or a specific database file which is based on the node selected in the tree view If the Volume option button is selected storage uti lization history is displayed according to file space used by all data files and all log files located on the storage volume The tree view also can be expanded to present storage utilization information and history for each volume and database file associated with a volume Using the Managed Instances Viewpoint 97 98 R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio _jorx File Edit View Tools Window Community Help jad New Query D D D Dy Ge bal Go eh Utility Explorer Content Object Explorer Details Production Utility SQL2KBR2 01 INSTANCEO1 Managed Instances Override L Server Instance Name File SQL2KER2 02 INSTANCEOZ Global E SQL2KeR2 02 INSTANCEOS Ge SQL2keR2 02 INSTANCED4 Ge SQL2K8R2 02 INSTANCEOS Ge sqL2keR2 03 7 7 g Override Ge SQL2K8R2 03YINSTANCEOZ 7 7 F Override Ge SQLZK8R2 O3 INSTANCEO3 g W O Override 3 7 amp i SQL2K8R2 03 INSTANCEO4 CPU Utilization Storage Utilzation Policy Details Property Details Storage Utilization for SQL2K8R2 03 INSTANCEO3 Group files by Database C volume a L AdventurewWorks a primary ufi Adventure 1 BB Log File s za Adventure 0 G4
151. ehouse control node for query processing Business Intelligence Integration 123 Master Data Services icrosoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Master Data Services MDS is another new technology M in the SQL Server family and is based on software from Microsoft s acquisition of Stratature in 2007 Just as SQL Server Reporting Services SSRS is an extensible reporting platform that ships with ready to use applications for end users and administrators MDS is both an extensible master data management platform and an application for develop ing managing and deploying master data models MDS is included with the Datacenter Enterprise and Developer editions of SQL Server 2008 R2 Master Data Management In the simplest sense master data refers to nontransactional reference data Put an other way master data represents the business entities people places or things that participate in a transaction In a data mart or data warehouse master data becomes dimensions Master data management is the set of policies and procedures that you use to create and maintain master data in an effort to overcome the many challenges associated with managing master data Because it s unlikely that a single set of policies and procedures would apply to all master data in your organization MDS provides the flexibility you need to accommodate a wide range of business requirements related to master data management Master Data Challenges As an organization grows
152. emplate Some of the database objects included in the template are scalar valued function schema table index login stored proce dure user user defined table type view table valued function trigger user defined data type database role data generation plan and inline function Figure 3 3 illustrates the syntax for creating a sample Employees table schema for a data tier application in Visual Studio 2010 The Solution Explorer pane also includes the other schema objects specifically the tables associated with the data tier application Data Tier Applications oDatabasel Microsoft Visual Studio Administrator BEE File Edit View Project Build Debug Team Data Tools Architecture Test Analyze Window Help iJe ga Wgl BBlal2 2 9 O Gle wa eee QeRneer aga New Query 3 3 Database aa ph a d o O Solemd Source Jagal PA Employees table sql not connected x ages E Solution Explorer ECREATE TABLE dbo Employees Bilsa EmployeeID int IDENTITY 1 1 NOT NULL E Databaset LastName nvarchar 2 COLLATE SQL _Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS NOT NULL E Dy Properties FirstName nvarchar 1 COLLATE SQL_Latini_General_CP1_CI_AS NOT NULL FE Database sqlsettinas Title nvarchar 3 COLLATE SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS NULL GS Serverselection sqlpolicy TitleofCourtesy nvarchar 25 COLLATE SQL_Latini_General_CP1_CI_AS NULL Gal References BirthDate datetime NULL Gi Data Generation Plans HireDate datetim
153. en sion provider that allows you to access SharePoint 2007 or SharePoint 2010 lists After you SharePoint Integration 187 188 create the data source using the Microsoft SharePoint List connection type and provide credentials for authentication you must supply a connection string to the site or subsite in the form of a URL that references the site or subsite That is use a connection string such as http MySharePointWeb MySharePointSite or http MySharePointWeb MySharePointSite Subsite A query designer is available with this connection provider as shown in Figure 9 22 allowing you to select fields from the list to include in your report ox OP Edit as Text 7 Import Run Query i SharePoint Lists Selected fields 2 E Content Type E Title Title E Indicator Value L E Modified E Indicator Comments LI E Created E Indicator Goal Threshold LJ E Created By E Indicator Warning Threshold E Modified By E Version E Attachments E Edit link to edit item E Title linked to item A Title linked to item with edit m E pe icon linked to document E Item Child Count E Folder Child Count Applied Filters T ce ean S Description E Indicator Comments B Indicator Value B Indicator Goal Threshold B Indicator Warning Threshold B Formatted indicator value E Formatted indicator goal E Formatted indicator warning E Detail Link x
154. ents m Developer Developer includes all of the features and functionality found in Data center however it is strictly meant to be used for development testing and demon stration purposes only It is worth noting that it is possible to transition a SQL Server Developer installation that is used for testing or development purposes directly into production by upgrading it to SQL Server 2008 Enterprise without reinstallation m Web Ata much more affordable price compared to Datacenter Enterprise and Stan dard SQL Server 2008 R2 Web is focused on service providers hosting Internet facing Web serving environments Unlike Workgroup and Express this edition doesn t have a small database size restriction and it supports four processors and up to 64 GB of memory SQL Server 2008 R2 Web does not offer the same premium features found in Datacenter Enterprise and Standard however it is still the ideal platform for hosting Web sites and Web applications m Workgroup Workgroup is the next SQL Server 2008 R2 edition and is one step be low the Web edition in price and functionality It is a cost effective secure and reliable database and reporting platform meant for running smaller workloads than Stan dard For example this edition is ideal for branch office solutions such as branch data storage branch reporting and remote synchronization Similar to Web it supports a maximum database size of 524 terabytes however it supports only two proce
155. ents it is receiving from the source or writing events it is sending to the event consumer It makes calls as necessary to push or pull events into or from the event stream using calls to Enqueue or Dequeue Calls to Enqueue and Dequeue return the state of the adapter If Enqueue returns FULL or Dequeue returns EMPTY the adapter transitions to a suspended state and can no longer produce or consume events When the adapter is ready to resume it calls Ready which then causes the server to call Resume and the cycle of enqueuing and dequeuing begins again from the point in time at which the adapter was suspended Application Development 153 Another task the adapter must perform is classification of an event That is the adapter must specify the event kind as either INSERT or Current Time Increment CTI The adapter adds events with the INSERT event kind to the stream as it receives data from the source It uses the CTI event kind to ignore any additional INSERT events it receives afterward that have a start time earlier than the timestamp of the CTI event Query Templates Query templates encapsulate the business logic that the CEP server instantiates as a standing query instance to process filter and aggregate event streams To define a query template you first create an event stream object In a standalone server environment you can create and register a query template as an object on the CEP server for reuse The Event Stre
156. eople needed most of the time However if you needed to use the result of an aggregate function as input for another aggregate function and weren t willing or able to put the data into a SQL Server Analysis Services cube first you had no choice but to preprocess the results in the dataset query In other words you were required to do the first level of aggregation in the dataset query and then you could perform the second level of aggregation by using an expression in the report Now with SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services you can nest an aggregate func tion inside another aggregate function Put another way you can aggregate an aggregation The example table in Figure 9 4 shows the calculation of average monthly sales for a selected year The dataset contains one row for each product which the report groups by year and by month while hiding the detail rows Reporting Services Enhancements Date Sales Amount 2006 74 281 39 January 585 41 February 2 159 96 March 2 200 33 April 1776 41 May 5 577 84 June 4 279 54 July 7 448 83 August 13 974 33 September 11 458 59 October 7 421 16 November 9 594 93 December 7 774 07 Product Average 83 84 Monthly Average 6 190 12 FIGURE 9 4 Aggregation of an aggregation Here is the expression for the value displayed in the Monthly Average row Avg Sum Fields SalesAmount Value EnglishMonthName Conditional Rendering Expressions The expression language in SQL Se
157. eploy the CEP server as a standalone server when applications need to share event streams or metadata objects For example you can reuse event types adapter types and query templates and thereby minimize the impact of changes to any of these metadata objects across applications by maintaining a single copy You can run the CEP server as an executable or you can configure it as a Windows service If you want to run it as a service application you can use StreamlnsightHost exe as a host process or develop your own host process Streamlnsight Architecture 149 If you choose to deploy CEP as a standalone server there are some limitations that affect the way you develop applications First you can use only the explicit server development model which is described in the next section of this chapter when developing CEP applica tions for a standalone server Second you must connect to the CEP server by using the Web service Uniform Resource Identifier URI of the CEP server host process Application Development You start the typical development cycle for a new CEP application by sampling the existing data streams and developing functions to process the data You then test the functions re view the results and determine the changes necessary to improve the functions This process continues in an iterative fashion until you complete development As part of the development of your CEP application you create event types adapters and query
158. er NOTE Parallel Data Warehouse does not use the domain controller on the management node for user authentication The Compute Node Each compute node is the host for a single SQL Server instance and runs the DMS to commu nicate with and transfer data to other appliance nodes Each compute node stores a subset of each user database Before parallel query processing begins Parallel Data Warehouse copies Scalable Data Warehousing any necessary data to each compute node so that it can process the query in parallel with other compute nodes without requiring data from other locations during processing This feature called data colocation ensures that each compute node can execute its portion of the parallel query with no effect on the query performance of the other compute nodes Hub and Spoke Architecture Rather than using Parallel Data Warehouse exclusively for a data warehouse you can use a hub and spoke architecture to support both a corporate data warehouse and special purpose data marts These data marts reside on servers outside of the appliance The data warehouse at the hub is the primary data source for the spokes A spoke can be a data mart a host for Analysis Services or even a development or test environment You can enforce business rules and data quality standards for all data at the hub and then you can quickly copy data as needed from the Parallel Data Warehouse to the spokes residing outside the appliance Data Manageme
159. er 45 operating system requirements 15 output adapters 151 overutilized instances 91 overutilized threshold default 34 P page headers and footers 170 page numbering in reports 170 PageName property reports 173 pagination report 172 173 Parallel Data Warehouse Admin Console 122 architecture of 109 115 automatic growth feature toggling 118 configuring 110 control node 112 113 creating tables 118 120 data load processing 121 122 data types supported in 120 DDL extensions 117 distributed strategy 116 117 networking technologies 112 overview of 9 109 query processing 121 replicated strategy 116 shared nothing SN architecture 115 120 Parallel Data Warehouse edition 12 pasting data into PowerPivot 193 PivotCharts creating 196 PivotTables See also tables converting to formulas 197 creating 196 measures 199 200 point model 147 policies changing 36 defaults restoring 36 managing 34 violation reporting settings 35 PowerPivot database 203 PowerPivot for Excel Analysis Services engine 190 Atom data feed importing 191 columns formatting 195 copying and pasting data into 193 creating databases 118 cube functions 197 data sources creating 191 193 data types changing 195 filtering data 194 hiding columns 196 installing 190 modifications made by 190 overview of 189 relationships in 194 slicers 198 Time Intelligence functions 193 VertiPaq storage mode 202 workbook
160. er next generation development which is achieved by importing an existing version of a DAC into Visual Studio and then modifying the schema objects or de ployment strategies m Author database objects by using source code control systems such as Team Foundation Server m Integrate data tier applications with Microsoft SQL Azure Currently it is possible to deploy register and delete Upgrading of data tier applications with SQL Azure is likely to be supported in future releases Introduction to Data Tier Applications 43 44 Real World O rganizations looking to accelerate and standardize deployment of database applications within their database environments should leverage data tier applications included in SQL Server 2008 R2 By utilizing data tier applications an organization captures intent and produces a single deployment package providing a more reliable and consistent deployment experience than ever before In addition data tier applications facilitate streamlined collaboration between development and database administrator teams which improves efficiency Supported SQL Server Objects Every DAC contains objects used by the application including schemas tables and views However some objects are not supported in data tier applications The following list can help you become acquainted with some of the SQL Server objects that are supported m Database role m Function Inline Table valued Function Multistatement T
161. eration requires data that is not already on the requisite compute nodes Parallel Data Warehouse copies data to these nodes temporarily for use during query execution Data Management 115 116 You design the data layout on the appliance to avoid or minimize data movement for par allel queries by using either a replicated or a distributed strategy for storage When planning which strategy to implement you consider the types of joins that the parallel queries require Some tables require a replicated strategy whereas others require a distributed strategy Replicated Strategy For best performance you can add small tables such as dimension tables in a star schema to Parallel Data Warehouse by using a replicated strategy Parallel Data Warehouse makes a copy of the table on each compute node as shown in Figure 6 3 You then perform the initial load of the table followed by any subsequent inserts updates or deletes as if you were working with a single table without the need to manage each copy of the table Parallel Data Warehouse handles all changes to the table for you When a query performs a join on a repli cated dimension Parallel Data Warehouse joins the dimension to the portion of the fact table that exists on the same compute node All compute nodes run the query in parallel and can find data very quickly because the complete dimension table is on each compute node Compute nodes All table rows are copied to each
162. es a summary of the settings that will be used to upgrade the data tier application Review the information displayed in the Summary page and the DAC properties tree to ensure that the actions to be taken are correct and then click Next to continue The Upgrade DAC page shown in Figure 3 12 includes results such as the success or failure of each action performed during the upgrade process Some of the actions tested include m Validating the upgrade m Preparing system tables in msdb m Preparing the deployment script m Creating the new database m Creating schema objects in the database m Setting the source database as read only m Disconnecting users from the existing source database m Preparing scripts to copy data from the database m Disabling constraints on the database m Setting the database to read write m Renaming the database m Upgrading the DAC metadata in msdb to reflect the new DAC version Review the result for every action You can also click Save Report to capture the entire report Then click Finish to complete the upgrade Upgrading a Data Tier Application 61 Es Upgrade Data tier Application OF x ae Upgrade DAC E Introduction Help Select Package Upgrading the DAC Detect Change Summary Action Result Upgrade DAC Validating upgrade Success Preparing system tables in msdb in the SQL Server instance SQL2K8R Success Preparing deployment script Success
163. esh the cache according to the following schedule ltem specific schedule At 6 00 AM every Mon of every week starting 12 22 2009 Shared schedule Select a shared schedule OK Cancel Ei 4 a ad 4 eer Gaal GAGA Ed eee ae CS a FIGURE 9 16 The Cache Refresh Plan window Report Parts After developing a report you can choose which report items to publish to the report server as individual components that can be used again later by other report authors who have permissions to access the published report parts Having readily accessible report parts in a central location enables report authors to build new reports more quickly You can publish any of the following report items as report parts tables matrices rectangles lists images charts gauges maps and parameters HAPTER9 Reporting Services Enhancements You can publish report parts both from Report Builder 3 0 and Report Designer in Business Intelligence Development Studio In Report Designer the Report menu contains the Publish Report Parts command In the Publish Report Parts dialog box shown in Figure 9 17 you select the report items that you want to publish You can replace the report item name and provide a description before publishing i Publish Report Parts p iol x Select report parts to publish These report parts will be published to the report server when this report is deployed W Report parts a v 4 Map_Population 2
164. ess Intelligence Development Studio or click the map in the ribbon if you are using Report Builder 3 0 This starts the Map Wizard which walks you through the configuration process by prompting you for the source of the spatial data defining the map itself and the source of the analytical data to display on the map You then decide how the report should display this analytical data by color coding elements on the map or by using a bubble to represent data values on the map at specified points Next you define the rela tionship between the map s spatial data and the analytical data by matching fields from each dataset For example the datasets for the map shown in Figure 9 14 have matching fields for the two letter state codes In the next step you specify the field in your analytical data to display on the map and you configure the visualization rules to apply such as color ranges In the figure for example the rule is to use darker colors to indicate a higher population Census Data C 520 000 3 200 000 fH 7 000 000 12 000 000 WEEE 21 000 000 37 000 000 3 200 000 7 000 000 WEE 12 000 000 21 000 000 FIGURE 9 14 A map using colors to show population distribution Reusability SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services has several new features to support reusability of components Report developers with advanced skills can build shared datasets and report parts that can be used by others Then f
165. essing with StreamInsight The final step is to create a NET assembly for the adapter At minimum the adapter includes a constructor a Start method a Resume method and either a ProduceEvents or ConsumeEvents method depending on whether you are developing an input adapter or an output adapter You can see the general structure of the adapter class in the following code example public class TextFilePointInput PointInputAdapter public TextFilePointInput TextFileInputConfig configInfo CepEventType cepEventType T oon F public override void StartQ ch apa public override void Resume see a private void ProduceEvents Mase J Using the constructor method for an untyped adapter such as TextFilePointIinput as in the example you can pass the configuration parameters from the adapter factory and the event type object that passes from the query binding The constructor also includes code to con nect to the event source and to map fields to the event payload After the CEP server instan tiates the adapter it invokes the Start method which generally calls the ProduceEvents or ConsumeEvents method to begin receiving streams The Resume method invokes the ProduceEvents or ConsumeEvents method again if the CEP server paused the streaming and confirms that the adapter is ready The core transformation and queuing of events occurs in the ProduceEvents method This method iterates through either reading the ev
166. example Production Utility Users will see this name in the SQL Server Utility Explorer when connected to the UCP lt Previous Eins Cancel FIGURE 2 3 The Specify The Instance Of SQL Server page NOTE Using a meaningful name is beneficial and easier to remember especially when you plan on implementing more than one UCP within your SQL Server infrastructure For example to easily distinguish between multiple UCPs you might name the UCP that manages the production servers Production Utility and the UCP for Test Servers Test Utility When connected to the UCP users will be able to distinguish between the dif ferent control points in Utility Explorer On the Utility Collection Set Account page there are two options available for identi fying the account that will run the utility collection set The first option is a Windows domain account and the second option is the SQL Server Agent service account Note that the SQL Server Agent service account can only be used if the SQL Server Agent service account is leveraging a Windows domain account For security purposes it is recommended that you use a Windows domain account with low privileges Indicate that the Windows domain account will be used as the SQL Server Agent proxy account for the utility collection set and then click Next to continue Creating a UCP 27 28 8 On the next page the SQL Server instance is compared against a series of prerequisites before t
167. figuration specification to retrieve query processing results from a dequeued event The next step is to develop an AdapterFactory object as a container class for your input and output adapters You use an AdapterFactory object to share resources between adapter implementations and to pass configuration parameters to adapter constructors Recall that an untyped adapter relies on the configuration specification to properly handle an event s payload structure The adapter factory must implement the Create and Dispose methods as shown in the following code example which shows how to create adapters for events in a text file public class TextFileInputFactory IInputAdapterFactory lt TextFi leInputConfig gt public InputAdapterBase Create TextFileInputConfig configInfo EventShape eventShape CepEventType cepEventType InputAdapterBase adapter default InputAdapterBase if CeventShape EventShape Point adapter new TextFilePointInput configInfo cepEventType else if eventShape EventShape Interval adapter new TextFileIntervalInput configInfo cepEventType else if CeventShape EventShape Edge adapter new TextFileEdgeInput configInfo cepEventType else throw new ArgumentException string Format CultureInfo InvariantCulture TextFileInputFactory cannot instantiate adapter with event shape 0 eventShape ToStringO return adapter public void Dispose 152 3 Complex Event Proc
168. first two buttons above the table allow a user with Update permissions to add or delete a member but those buttons are unavailable here because the user has Read only permission The user can also navigate through the hierarchy in the tree view on the left side of the page but the labels are gray to indicate the Read only status for every member of the hierarchy 7 Derived Hierarchy Color Filter Criteria z E Press CTRL to paste as sibling 5 PT las Root A Attribute Operator Similarity Level D h Bix Black D h atu Blue Color i D ha GRN Green OGR y D dha MLT Multi a i Be ic Attributes vo 50 F 1 14 of 14 as in FIGURE 7 17 Read only permission on a hierarchy At this point in the example the user has Update permission on the ProductCategory en tity which allows the user to edit any member of that entity However you can apply a more granular level of security by changing permissions of individual members of the entity within a hierarchy As shown in Figure 7 18 you can override the Update permission at the entity level by specifying Read only permission on selected members The tree view on the left side of the page shows a lock icon for the members to which Read only permissions apply and a pencil icon for the members for which the user has Update permissions User SampleUser Sample User General Membership Functions Models Hierarchy Members ip
169. ft SQL Server 2008 Reporting Services Step by Step and the coauthor of Business Intelligence Making Better Decisions Faster Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Analysis Services Step by Step and Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Administrator s Com panion She is also a Microsoft Certified IT Professional Bl and a Microsoft Certified Technology Specialist Bl Stacia lives in Las Vegas Nevada with her husband Gerry You can contact Stacia via e mail at smisner datainspirations com 215 What do you think of this Dook We want to hear from you To participate in a brief online survey please visit microsoft com learning booksurvey Tell us how well this book meets your needs what works effectively and what we can do better Your feedback will help us continually improve our books and learning resources for you Thank you in advance for your input Microsoft Press Stay in touch To subscribe to the Microsoft Press Book Connection Newsletter for news on upcoming books events and special offers please visit microsoft com learning books newsletter
170. fy the name of the deployed DAC and database m Data File Path Accept the default location or use the Browse button to specify the location and path where the data file will reside Log File Path Accept the default location or use the Browse button to specify the location and path where the transaction log file will reside Installing a New DAC Instance with the Deploy Data Tier Application Wizard R 53 54 10 The next page includes a summary of the settings that are used to deploy the data tier application Review the information displayed in the Summary page and DAC proper ties tree to ensure that the actions taken are correct and then click Next to continue The Deploy DAC page shown in Figure 3 8 includes results such as success or failure based on each action performed during the deployment process These actions include preparing system tables in msdb preparing deployment scripts creating the database creating schema objects affiliated with the database renaming the database and reg istering the DAC in msdb Review the results for every action to confirm success You can also click Save Report to capture the entire report Then click Finish to complete the deployment E Deploy Data tier Application Ioi x g i j Deploy DAC Introduction Help Select Package Deploying the DAC Update Configuration Summary Action Result Deploy DAC Preparing system tables in msdb in the SQL Server instance SQL2K9R Success
171. g the data before you import it First you can select specific columns rather than importing every column from the source table Second you can apply a filter to a column to select the row values to include in the import By applying these filtering options you can eliminate unnecessary overhead in your workbook reducing both the file size of the workbook and the amount of time necessary to refresh and recalculate the workbook TIP When you are working with large datasets you should use the filtering options to import only the columns you need for analysis By limiting the workbook to the essential columns you can import more rows of data 192 Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot Linked Tables If your data is in an Excel table already or if you convert a range of data into an Excel table you can add the table to your workbook in the Excel window and then use the Create Linked Table button to import the data into the PowerPivot window You can find this button on the PowerPivot ribbon in the Excel window as shown in Figure 10 3 After the data is available in the PowerPivot window you can then enhance it by defining relationships with other tables or by adding calculations rie i Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View PowerPivot r A m x fs R x fl a lA a PowerPivot New sure PivotTable Create Update Settings Field Detection List ele Window Measure Measure Settings Linked Table All Launch Measures Report
172. ger 80 failover clustering See also CSV Cluster Shared Volumes benefits of 65 best practices compliance testing 11 71 connecting by multiple networks 65 enhancements in Windows Server 2008 63 guest model 67 68 history of 64 65 traditional model 65 troubleshooting 70 validating prerequisites for 68 70 feedback on book xix file space utilization monitoring 96 filtering operation 155 filtering PowerPivot data 192 194 formatting reports dynamically 169 170 172 173 free edition See Express edition functions aggregate 168 cube 197 Lookup 166 LookupSet 168 MultiLookup 167 Split 167 Time Intelligence 193 Transact SQL 143 144 G Generate And Publish Scripts Wizard 9 global monitoring settings 34 guest failover clustering 67 68 H hardware upgrading online 63 hardware requirements 14 15 headers and footers 170 hierarchies MDS 130 high availability enhancements 63 64 hopping windows stream 157 hot adding hardware 63 hub and spoke architecture 115 Hyper V See also Live Migration virtualization benefits of 74 on guest failover clustering 67 68 improvements in 11 overview of 64 system requirements for 73 74 uses for 74 virtual machines creating with 76 79 Hyper V Integration Services tool 79 Hyper V Integration Services tool 209 importing master data 135 indicators in reports 176 177 InfiniBand network 110 112 in place upgrades 16 17 input adapters bas
173. gisters a DAC instance by storing the DAC definition in the msdb system database creates the new database and then populates the database with all the database objects defined in the DAC If a DAC is installed on a managed instance of the Database Engine the Data Tier Application is monitored by the SQL Server Util ity The DAC can be viewed in the Deployed Data Tier Applications node of the Management Studio Utility Explorer and reported in the Deployed Data Tier Applications details page NOTE Data tier applications can be deployed only on Database Engine instances of SQL Server running SQL Server 2008 R2 Unfortunately SQL Server 2008 SQL Server 2005 and SQL Server 2000 are not supported when you are deploying data tier applications How ever upcoming SQL Server cumulative updates or service packs will include functionality for down level support Follow these steps to deploy a DAC package to an existing SQL Server 2008 R2 Database Engine instance 1 In Object Explorer connect to the SQL Server instance in which you plan to deploy the Data Tier Application 2 Expand the SQL Server instance and then expand the Management folder 3 Right click the Data Tier Applications node and then select Deploy Data Tier Applica tion to invoke the Deploy Data Tier Application Wizard 4 Review the information in the Introduction page and then click Next to begin the deployment process Select the Do Not Show This Page Again check box if you do
174. gration 18 19 user defined functions UDFs 161 Utility Administrator 37 utility collection set account specifying 27 30 Utility Control Points UCPs 21 22 capacity specifications 25 connecting to 33 34 89 creating 26 29 disconnecting from 34 enrollment of 29 frequency of data collection 23 managed instances maximum number of 29 msdb database 25 52 naming 27 overview of 4 23 prerequisites for deployment 25 26 report on creation of 28 SQL Server edition required for 26 validating 28 Utility Control Points 213 Utility Explorer See also SQL Server Utility dashboard and list views 5 24 data refreshing in 29 Data Tier Applications viewpoint 100 105 launching 24 Managed Instances viewpoint 95 99 user interface 24 Utility Administration node 33 36 Utility Management Data Warehouse UMDW 23 collection upload frequency 23 data retention period modifying 39 40 disk space consumption 25 verifying 29 Utility Reader 37 38 utility storage utilization history 94 95 utilization policies 6 34 35 V Validate A Configuration Wizard 68 70 validating failover clustering setup 68 70 validating instances 31 validating UCPs 28 validation reports 28 31 VertiPaq storage mode 190 202 violation reporting settings 35 virtual machines automatic start action configuring 79 80 configuring for Live Migration 79 82 creating with Hyper V 76 79 high availability configuring 81 82 live migratio
175. h for report parts published to the report server where the name or the description of the report part contains the search string You can also search by additional criteria such as the name of the creator or the date created To use the report part simply drag the item from the list onto the report body The ability to find and use report parts is available only within Report Builder 3 0 You can use Report Designer to create and publish report parts but not to reuse them in other reports Report Builder 3 0 183 Properties Report Part Gallery population pP Add Criteria am Name Created by Modit Map_Populat Created by CONTOSO Administrator Created 12 22 2009 3 39 15 AM Modified by CONTOSO Administrator Modified 12 22 2009 3 39 15 AM Server path Report Parts Map_Population Description 2000 Census Data Map showing population by state FIGURE 9 19 The Report Part Gallery Report Access and Management In this latest release of Reporting Services you can benefit from a few enhancements that improve access to reports and to management operations in Report Manager in addition to an additional feature that supports sandboxing of the report server environment Report Manager Improvements When you open Report Manager for the first time you will immediately notice the improved look and feel The color scheme and layout of this Web application had not changed since the product s first re
176. h the introduction of Live Migration which makes it possible to move SQL Server virtual machines VMs between Hyper V hosts without service interruption Second Hyper V can make use of up to 64 logical processors in the host processor pool which allows for consolidation of a greater number of SQL Server VMs on a single Hyper V host Third Dynamic Virtual Machine Storage a new feature allows for the addition of virtual or physical disks to an existing VM without requiring the VM to be restarted Windows Server 2008 R2 Server Manager Server Manager has been optimized in Windows Server 2008 R2 It is usually used to centrally manage and secure multiple server roles across SQL Server instances running Windows Server 2008 R2 Remote management of connections to remote computers is achievable with Server Manager Server Manager also includes a new Best Practices Analyzer tool to report best prac tice violations Best Practices Analyzer BPA Although there are only a few roles on Windows Server 2008 R2 that the BPA can collect data for this tool is still a good investment because it helps reduce best practice violations which ultimately helps fix and prevent deterioration in performance scalability and downtime Windows PowerShell 2 0 Windows Server 2008 R2 ships with Windows Power Shell 2 0 In addition to allowing DBAs to run Windows PowerShell commands against remote computers and run commands as asynchronous background jobs Windows
177. have the option to organize attributes into attribute groups Each attribute group con tains the name and code attributes of the entity You can then assign the remaining attributes to one or more attribute groups or not at all Attribute groups are securable objects You can organize members into hierarchies Figure 7 2 shows partial data from two types of hierarchies On the left is an explicit hierarchy which contains all members of a single enti ty On the right is a derived hierarchy which contains members from multiple related entities Explicit Hierarchy Geography non mandatory Derived Hierarchy Category TEEN COTE p EEEE p Press CTRL to paste as sibling Press CTRL to paste as sibling Eata Root Esta Root a E 7 sia NAm North America 4 B M a 1 Wholesale F B M ss US United States B 7 sfa 2 Components B 7 eB BIKE Bikes B M sfa 10 Forks 7 aia BK R64Y 38 Road 550 W YLO 38 I ata FK 1639 LL Fork I ais BK R64Y 40 Road 550 W YLO 40 a I aia FK 5136 ML Fork a FIGURE 7 2 Product hierarchies In the explicit hierarchy you create consolidated members to group the leaf members For example in the Geography hierarchy shown in Figure 7 2 North America United States and Bikes are all consolidated members that create multiple levels for summarization of the leaf members In a derived hierarchy the domain based attribute values of an entity define the levels For example in the Category hierarchy in
178. he UCP is created Failed conditions are displayed in a validation report Cor rect all issues and then click the Rerun Validation button to verify the changes against the validation rules To save a copy of the validation report for future reference click Save Report and then specify a location for the file To continue click Next NOTE As mentioned in the prerequisite steps before these instructions SQL Server Agent is by default not configured to start automatically during the installation of SQL Server 2008 R2 Use the SQL Server Configuration Manager tool to configure the SQL Server Agent service to start automatically on the specified instance 9 Review the options and settings selected on the Summary Of UCP Creation page and click Next to begin the installation 10 The Utility Control Point Creation page communicates the steps and report status af filiated with the creation of a UCP The steps involve preparing the SQL Server instance for UCP creation creating the UMDW initializing the UMDW and configuring the SQL Server Utility collection set Review each step for success and completeness If you wish save a report on the creation of the UCP operation Next click Save Report and choose a location for the file Click Finish to close the Create Utility Control Point Wizard Creating a UCP by Using Windows PowerShell Windows PowerShell can be used instead of SSMS to create a UCP The following syntax available in the article
179. he event of a server failure Failover clustering allows organizations to meet their high availability uptime requirements through redundancy in their SQL Server infrastructure by eliminating single points of failure for the clustered application The server that is used to form a cluster can be either physical or virtual The next section introduces the different types of failover clusters that can be achieved with these two products SQL Server 2008 R2 and Windows Server 2008 R2 which work very well with one another Traditional Failover Clustering The traditional SQL Server failover cluster has been around for years With a traditional failover cluster there are two or more nodes servers connected to shared storage A quorum is formed between all nodes in the failover cluster and this quorum determines the health and number of failures the failover cluster can sustain Communication between cluster nodes is required for cluster operations and is achieved by using two or more independent networks that connect the nodes of a cluster to avoid a single point of failure SQL Server 2008 R2 is installed on all nodes within a failover cluster If a node in the cluster fails the SQL Server instance automatically fails over to a surviving node within the failover cluster Note that the failover is seamless from an end user or application perspective Like its predecessor SQL Server 2008 R2 delivers single instance and multiple instance failover cluster c
180. he following procedure to connect to a UCP 1 Launch SSMS and connect to an instance of SQL Server 2 Select View and then Utility Explorer Managing Utility Administration Settings CHAPTER2 33 34 3 On the Utility Explorer toolbar click the Connect To Utility icon 4 Inthe Connect To Server dialog box specify a UCP instance and then click Connect 5 After you are connected you can deploy data tier applications manage instances and configure global settings NOTE Itis not possible to connect to more than one UCP at the same time Therefore before attempting to connect to an additional UCP click the Disconnect From Utility icon on the Utility Explorer toolbar to disconnect from the currently connected UCP The Policy Tab You use the Policy tab to view or modify global monitoring settings Changes on this tab are effective across the SQL Server Utility You can view the Policy tab by connecting to a UCP through Utility Explorer and then selecting Utility Administration Select the Policy tab in the Utility Explorer Content pane Policies are broken down into three sections Global Policies For Data Tier Applications Global Policies For Managed Instances and Volatile Resource Policy Evaluation To expand the list of values for these options click the arrow next to the policy name or click the policy title Global Policies For Data Tier Applications Use the first section on the Policy tab Global Polices For Data Tier Appl
181. he instance is enrolled If there are any failures preventing the enrollment of the SQL Server instance correct them and then click Rerun Validation To save the validation report click Save Report and specify a location for the file Click Next to continue Create Utility Control Point Jor aw Ae ey SQL Server Instance Validation Introduction Help Sse HRT Validating the SQL Server instance SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO1 Specify Account The following conditions must be validated before the UCP can be created Action Result Summary You must have administrator privileges on the instance of SQL Server Success UCP Creation The instance of SOL Server must be version 10 50 or higher Success The SQL Server edition must support UCP creation The instance of SOL Server cannot be enrolled with any other UCP The instance of SQL Server cannot already be a UCP There cannot be a database named sysutiity_mdw on the specified instanc Success The collection sets on the specified instance of SOL Server must be stopped Success The SQL Server Agent service on the specified instance must be started an Success The SQL Server Agent service account cannot be a built in account such a Success aieiciciaiciaio a The SQL Server Agent service account must be a valid Windows domain ac Success i Rerun Validation Save Report lt Previous Eirish Cancel_
182. he security example Figure 7 16 shows that this user has Read only permissions for the Product model as indicated by the lock icon and Deny permissions on all other models as indicated by the stop symbol in the Model Permis sions tree view on the left In the Model Permissions Summary table on the right you can see the assigned permissions at each level of the model hierarchy Notice that the user has Update permission on leaf members of the ProductCategory entity User SampleUser Sample User General Membership Functions Models Hierarchy Members a Model Permissions All User and inherited from group Model Permissions Model Permission Summary 3 Models ChartOf ccounts Customer Geography Type Name Source Group Permission Metadata Model ChartofAccounts Deny aiga product Model Customer Deny gt Model Geography Deny gt Model Metadata Deny Leaf Member Type Product ProductCategory Leaf Update Model Product Read only FIGURE 7 16 A user s model permissions With Read only access to the model except for the ProductCategory entity the user can view data for all other entities or hierarchies such as Color as shown in Figure 7 17 but cannot edit the data in any way Notice the lock icons in the Name and Code columns in the Administration 139 140 Color table on the right side of the page These icons indicate that the values in the table are not editable The
183. ications to view or configure global utilization policies for data tier applications You can set underutilization or overutilization policy thresholds for data tier applications by specifying a percentage in the controls on the right side of each policy description For example it is possible to configure underutilized and overutilized settings for CPU utilization and file space utilization for data files and logs Click the Apply button to save changes or click the Discard or Restore Default buttons as needed By default the overutilized threshold is 70 percent and the underutilized threshold is 0 percent Global Policies For Managed Instances Global Policies For Managed Instances is the next section on the Policy tab Here you can set global SQL Server managed instance application monitoring policies for the SQL Server Util ity As illustrated in Figure 2 6 you can set underutilization and overutilization thresholds to manage numerous issues including processor capacity file space and storage volume space Multi Server Administration R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio ol x File Edit View Tools Window Community Help Duwa DID D DIDIS Mal Hg _ Utility Explorer Content x security Data Warehouse Specify the CPU utilization policies for all managed instance of SQL Server CPU of a managed instance of SQL Server is overutiized when itis greater than n x CPU of a managed instance of SAL
184. iewpoints Customization of utilization thresholds and policies DBAs can customize the utilization threshold and policies for managed instances of SQL Server and deployed data tier applications to suit the needs of their environments For example DBAs can specify the CPU utilization policies file space utilization policies computer CPU utilization policies and storage volume utilization policies for all managed instances of SQL Server Furthermore they can customize the global utilization policies for data tier applications For example a DBA can specify the CPU utilization policies and file space utilization poli cies for all data tier applications The default policy setting for overutilization is 70 per cent whereas underutilization is set to 0 percent By customizing the utilization threshold policies DBAs can maintain higher service levels for their SQL Server environments Figure 1 3 illustrates the SQL Server Utility In this figure a Utility Control Point has been deployed and is collecting health state and resource utilization data from managed instances of SQL Server and deployed data tier applications A DBA is making use of the SQL Server Utility dashboards and viewpoints included in SSMS to proactively and efficiently manage the database SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements environment This can be done at scale with information on resource utilization throughout the managed database environment as a result of centra
185. ilities empowering end users through self service business intelligence BI bolstering efficiency and collaboration between database administrators DBAs and ap plication developers and scaling to accommodate the most demanding data workloads This chapter introduces the new SQL Server 2008 R2 features capabilities and edi tions from a DBA s perspective It also discusses why Windows Server 2008 R2 is recom mended as the underlying operating system for deploying SQL Server 2008 R2 Last SQL Server 2008 R2 hardware and software requirements and installation strategies are also identified SQL Server 2008 R2 Enhancements for DBAs Now more than ever organizations require a trusted cost effective and scalable data base platform that offers efficiency and managed self service BI These organizations face ever changing business conditions in the global economy IT budget constraints and the need to stay competitive by obtaining and utilizing the right information at the right time With SQL Server 2008 R2 they can meet the pressures head on to achieve these demanding goals This release delivers an award winning enterprise class database plat form with robust capabilities that improve efficiency through better resource utilization end user empowerment and scaling out at lower costs Enhancements to scalability and performance high availability enterprise security enterprise manageability data ware housing reporting self servi
186. ined approach to enabling Reporting Services integration than was possible in earlier versions Another important improvement is the addition of support for alternate access mappings with Reporting Services Alternate access mappings allow users from multiple zones such as the Internet and an intranet to access the same report items by using different URLs You can configure up to five different URLs to access a single Web application that provides access to Reporting Services content with each URL using a different authentication provider This functionality is important when you want to use Windows authentication for intranet users and Forms authentication for Internet users RS Utility Scripting Report server administrators frequently use the rs exe utility to perform repetitive administra tive tasks such as bulk deployment of reports to the server and bulk configuration of report properties Lack of support for this utility in integrated mode had been a significant problem for many administrators so having this capability added to integrated mode is great news SharePoint Lists as Data Sources Increasing numbers of companies use SharePoint lists to store information that needs to be shared with a broader audience or in a standard report format Although there are some creative ways you could employ to get that data into Reporting Services custom code was always part of the solution SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services has a new data ext
187. int StreamEventOrder FullyOrdered Query myQuery application CreateQuery query myQuerybinder query description Rather than enqueuing CTls in the input adapter code you can define the CTI behavior by using the AdvanceTimeSettings class as an optional parameter in the BindProducer method For example to send a CTI after every 10 events set the CTI s timestamp as the most recent event s timestamp and drop any event that appears later in the stream but has an end time stamp earlier than the CTI use the following code var ats new AdvanceTimeSettings 10 TimeSpan FromSeconds 0 AdvanceTimePolicy Drop queryBinder BindProducer querysource myInputAdapter inputConf EventShape Interval ats The Event Stream Consumer Object After you define the query logic in an application that uses the implicit server development model you can use the output adapter factory to create an event stream consumer object You can pass this object directly to the CepStream ToQuery method without binding the query template to the output adapter as you can see in the following example Query myQuery outputStream ToQuery lt ResultType gt typeof MyOutputAdapterFactory outputConf EventShape Interval StreamEventOrder FullyOrdered Complex Event Processing with StreamInsight The Query Object In both the explicit and implicit development models you create a query object With that object instantiated you can use the Start
188. ion for hosting a very large data warehouse Parallel Data Warehouse Architecture Parallel Data Warehouse does not install like other editions of SQL Server Instead it is a data warehouse appliance that bundles multiple software and hardware technologies including SQL Server into a platform well suited for a very large data warehouse A key characteristic of this platform is the MPP architecture which enables fast data loads and high performance queries This architecture consists of a multi rack system which paral lelizes queries across an array of dedicated servers connected by a high speed network to deliver results at speeds that are typically faster than possible with a traditional sym metric multiprocessing SMP architecture Data Warehouse Appliances You purchase a data warehouse appliance as preassembled and preconfigured integrat ed components with all software preinstalled When you place an order for an appliance with an authorized vendor you specify the number of appliance racks that you want to purchase The vendor works with you to add options such as an optional backup node and to optimize the system to meet your requirements for faster query performance and for storage of high data volumes The vendor then assembles industry standard hardware components and loads the operating system SQL Server and Parallel Data 109 110 Warehouse software When the assembly process is complete the vendor ships the appliance
189. ion section in its entirety to gain a comprehensive understanding of its overall health status For example the first set of the following bullets interpret the health of managed instances After managed instances are analyzed and explained then the health of data tier applications is reviewed from beginning to end Managed Instance Health This section is located in the top left corner of the Util ity Explorer Content pane and summarizes the health status of all managed instances of SQL Server in the SQL Server Utility Health status is illustrated in a pie chart and has four possible designations e Well Utilized The number of managed instances of SQL Server that are not vio lating resource utilization policies is displayed e Overutilized A SQL Server instance is marked as overutilized if any of the follow ing conditions are true m CPU resources for the instance of SQL Server are overutilized m CPU resources of the computer that hosts the SQL Server instance are overutilized m The instance contains data or log files with overutilized storage space m The instance contains data or log files that reside on volumes with overutilized storage space e Underutilized A SQL Server instance is marked as underutilized if it is not marked as overutilized and any of the following conditions are true m CPU resources allocated to the instance of SQL Server are underutilized m CPU resources of the computer that hosts the SQL Server i
190. ion window click Start Follow the prompts to install the Windows Server 2008 R2 operating system When the operating system installation is complete install SQL Server 2008 R2 J Real World A an operating system is set up best practice guidelines recommend the installation of the Hyper V Integration Services tools for every VM that was created The Hyper V Integration Services tool provides virtual server client VSC code which ultimately increases Hyper V performance of the VM from an I O memory management and network performance perspective Hyper V Integration Services is installed by connecting to the VM and selecting Insert The Integration Services Setup Disk from the Action Menu of the Virtual Machine Connection win dow Click Install in the AutoPlay dialog box to install the tools Configuring a SQL Server VM for Live Migration Organizations interested in using Live Migration need to set up a VM for Live Migration This is accomplished by reconfiguring the automatic start action for the VM and then preparing the VM for high availability by using Failover Cluster Manager The following steps illustrate this series of actions in more detail 1 2 Create a SQL Server 2008 R2 VM based on the steps in the previous section Verify that the VM is using CSV In Hyper V Manager under Virtual Machines highlight the VM created in the previ ous steps SQLServer2008R2 VMO01 in the example in this chapter In the Action pane un
191. ired SQL Server Utility for example Production Utility expand the UCP and then select Managed Instances Right click the Managed Instances node and select Enroll Instance The Enroll Instance Wizard is launched Review the introduction message and then click Next to begin the enrollment process If you want you can select the Do Not Show This Page Again check box On the Specify The Instance Of SQL Server page click the Connect button to specify the instance of SQL Server to enroll in the UCP Supply the SQL Server instance name and then click Connect in the Connect To Server dialog box Click Next to proceed The Utility Collection Set Account page is invoked There are two options available for specifying an account to run the utility collection set The first option is a Windows domain account and the second option is the SQL Server Agent service account You can use the SQL Server Agent service account only if the SQL Server Agent service account is leveraging a Windows domain account For se curity purposes it is recommended that you use a Windows domain account with low privileges Specify the Windows domain account to be used as the SQL Server Agent proxy account for the utility collection set and then click Next to continue Multi Server Administration 10 11 As shown in Figure 2 4 a series of conditions will be evaluated against the SQL Server instance to ensure that it passes all of the prerequisites before t
192. it either by using the Create Utility Control Point Wizard in SSMS or by leveraging Windows PowerShell scripts The high level steps for creating a UCP include specifying the instance of SQL Server in which the UCP will be created choosing the account to run the utility control set ensuring that the instance is validated and passes the conditions test reviewing the selections made and final izing the UCP deployment Although the setup is fairly straightforward the following conditions must be met to suc cessfully deploy a UCP You must have administrator privileges on the instance of SQL Server The instance of SQL Server must be SQL Server 2008 R2 or higher The SQL Server edition must support UCP creation The instance of SQL Server cannot be enrolled with any other UCP The instance of SQL Server cannot already be a UCP There cannot be a database named sysutility_mdw on the specified instance of SQL Server The collection sets on the specified instance of SQL Server must be stopped The SQL Server Agent service on the specified instance must be started and configured to start automatically The SQL Server Agent proxy account cannot be a built in account such as Network Service The SQL Server Agent proxy account must be a valid Windows domain account on the specified instance Creating a UCP by Using SSMS It is important to understand how to effectively use the Create Utility Control Point Wizard in SSMS to create a SQL Ser
193. it to the StProv field in Dataset1 and then combining the results into an array that you can then transform into a comma separated list by using the Join function Here is the expression in the Territory column Join MultiLookup Split Fields StateProvinceCode Value Fields StProv Value Fields StProvName Value Datasetl Expression Language Improvements 167 168 When there is a one to many relationship between the source and destination values you use the LookupSet function This function accepts a single value from the source dataset as input and returns an array of matching values from the destination dataset You could then use the Join function to convert the result into a delimited string as in the example for the MultiLookup function or you could use other functions that operate on arrays such as the Count function as shown in Figure 9 3 Dataset2 Salesperson CustomerName Code Dataset2 K Gregersen Customer Counts T Yee Salesperson Customer Count L Miller David Campbell 3 Tsvi Reiter 1 a LFranrk FIGURE 9 3 LookupSet function results The Customer Count column uses this expression LookupSet Fields SalespersonCode Value Fields SalesperonCode Value Fields CustomerName Value Dataset2 Length Aggregation The aggregate functions available in Reporting Services since its first release with the SQL Server 2000 platform provided all the functionality most p
194. ither the Register Data Tier Application Wizard or Windows PowerShell Unlike the Extract Data Tier Application Wizard which creates a dacpac file from an existing database the Register Data Tier Application Wizard creates a DAC in place by registering the DAC definition and metadata in the msdb system database A DAC registra tion can be performed only on a Database Engine instance running SQL Server 2008 R2 Use the following steps to register a data tier application from an existing database by us ing the Register Data Tier Application Wizard in Management Studio 1 In Object Explorer connect to a SQL Server instance containing the database you want to register as a data tier application 2 Expand the SQL Server instance and then expand the Databases folder 3 Invoke the Register Data Tier Application Wizard by right clicking the desired data base selecting Tasks and then selecting Register As Data Tier Application 4 Review the information on the Introduction page and then click Next to begin the registration process Select the Do Not Show This Page Again check box if you do not want the Introduction page displayed in the future when using the wizard Registering a Data Tier Application 55 56 5 On the Set Properties page complete the DAC properties by typing in the application name version and description as described here Application name This refers to the name of the DAC This value cannot be altered and i
195. ity planning 25 Carousel view PowerPivot Gallery 204 205 class library MDS 142 143 Cluster Shared Volumes CSV See CSV Cluster Shared Volumes collections MDS 130 comma separated lists of values converting into arrays 167 Compact edition 14 complex event processing CEP See also StreamInsight adapters 151 154 application development cycle 150 application language 146 applications for 145 146 defined 145 diagnostic views 163 filtering operation 155 input adapters 148 output adapters 149 overview of 145 projection operation 155 query instances 149 query templates 154 server 147 149 compression Unicode 10 compute node 114 115 118 connecting to UCPs 33 34 89 consolidation of databases 86 goals of 85 management strategies 5 with virtualization 87 88 control node 112 113 207 control racks 112 count windows 159 CPU overutilized 92 upgrading online 63 CREATE DATABASE statement 118 Create Package wizard 142 CREATE REMOTETABLE statement 120 CREATE TABLE statement 118 120 Create Utility Control Point Wizard 26 28 CSV Cluster Shared Volumes See also failover clustering adding storage to 76 enabling 76 overview of 64 storage location 76 cube functions 197 D DAC file packages 45 DACs data tier applications benefits of 44 configuration options 53 defined 41 definition registration 49 definition storage 43 deleting 56 58 deploying 4 45 52 55 detaching da
196. ity policies over this moving time window Shot Long 1 week Percent of SQL Server Utility policies in violation during the time window before CPU is reported as underutilized 0 Uk 100 90 Over 7 week there will be 672 policy evaluations and 604 must be in violation before the CPU is marked as underutilized Leam more about reducing noise in CPU utilization policies Restore Defaults Apply Discard x Ready FIGURE 2 7 Volatile resource policy evaluation The next set of configurable elements allows you to determine how frequently CPU utiliza tion polices should be in violation before the CPU is reported as being underutilized The de fault evaluation period for processor underutilization is 1 week Options range from 1 day to 1 month The default percentage of data points that must be in violation before a CPU is reported as being underutilized is 90 percent You can choose between 0 percent and 100 percent To change policies use the slider controls to the right of the policy descriptions and then click Apply You can also restore default values or discard changes by clicking the buttons at the bottom of the display pane ZINN Ana W REAL WORLD lige say you configure the CPU overutilization polices by setting the Evaluate SQL Server Utility Polices Over This Moving Time Window setting to 12 hours and the Percent Of SQL Server Utility Polices In Violation During The Time Window Before CP
197. ity with Windows Server 2008 R2 Failover Clustering with Windows Server 2008 R2 Traditional Failover Clustering Guest Failover Clustering Enhancements to the Validate A Configuration Wizard The Windows Server 2008 R2 Best Practices Analyzer SQL Server 2008 R2 Virtualization and Hyper V Live Migration Support Through CSV Windows Server 2008 R2 Hyper V System Requirements Practical Uses for Hyper V and SQL Server 2008 R2 Implementing Live Migration for SQL Server 2008 R2 Enabling CSV Creating a SQL Server VM with Hyper V Configuring a SQL Server VM for Live Migration Initiating a Live Migration of a SQL Server VM CHAPTER 5 Consolidation and Monitoring SQL Server Consolidation Strategies 00 0 cee eee eee Consolidating Databases and Instances Consolidating SQL Server Through Virtualization Using the SQL Server Utility for Consolidation and Monitoring Using the SQL Server Utility Dashboard 0008 Using the Managed Instances Viewpoint 0000 The Managed Instances List View Columns The Managed Instances Detail Tabs Using the Data Tier Application Viewpoint 000 The Data Tier Application List View The Data Tier Application Tabs a3 64 65 67 68 71 woah 72 73 74 75 76 76 79 83 PART Il BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE DEVELOPMENT CHAPTER 6 Scalable Data Warehousing 109
198. l machines between physical hosts This is much more beneficial for a virtualized environment running SQL Server 2008 R2 Real World W hen you use guest failover clustering make sure that the virtualized guest operating systems used for the nodes in the guest failover cluster are not on the same physical Hyper V host If this situation exists you have a physical host running Hyper V which means that you have created a single point of failure For example if a single physical host running all of the guest operating systems sud denly failed all the nodes associated with the guest failover cluster would no longer be available ultimately causing the whole SQL Server failover cluster instance to fail This could be catastrophic in a mission critical production environment This prob lem can be avoided however if you use multiple Hyper V hosts and Live Migration and ensure that each guest operating system is running on a separate Hyper V host Enhancements to the Validate A Configuration Wizard As mentioned earlier in this chapter organizations in the past found it difficult to implement a SQL Server failover cluster One thing that clearly stood out was the need for an intuitive tool that could verify whether or not an organization s configuration met the failover clustering prerequisites This issue was addressed with the introduction of Windows Server 2008 which offered for the first time a tool called the Validate A Configuration Wizard
199. lease until now When you open a report for viewing you notice that more screen space is allocated to the Report Viewer as shown in Figure 9 20 All of the space at the top of the screen has been eliminated 184 CH R Reporting Services Enhancements id afk of2 7 b bi 100 a Find Next kAd 8 B Home gt Reference Reports gt Population Map Home My Subscriptions Site Settings Help Census Data 520 000 3 200 000 HEEE 7 000 000 12 000 000 MEEI 21 000 000 37 000 000 3 200 000 7 000 000 WEE 12 000 000 21 000 000 FIGURE 9 20 Report Viewer Notice also that the Report Viewer does not include a link to open the report properties Rather than requiring you to open a report first and then navigate to the properties pages Report Manager gives you direct access to the report properties from a menu on the report listing page as shown in Figure 9 21 Another direct access improvement to Report Manager is the ability to test the connection for a data source on its properties page Population Map X Move X Delete 4 Edit in Report Builder E Subscribe Create Linked Report View Report History Security Manage amp Download FIGURE 9 21 The report menu Report Access and Management CHAPTER9 185 186 Report Viewer Improvements The display of reports is also improved in the Report Viewer available in this release of SQL Server which now supports AJAX Asy
200. lized visibility In addition a data tier devel oper is building a data tier application with Visual Studio 2010 the newly created DAC package will be deployed to a managed instance of SQL Server through the Utility Control Point Utility dashboard to monitor health state Managed instance Managed instance Upload collection Upload collection data set is SSMS Managed instance Utility Control Point Delivery DAC package onto managed instance DAC Developer Q Visual Studio 2010 FIGURE 1 3 The SQL Server Utility including a UPC managed instances and a DAC SQL Server 2008 R2 Enhancements for DBAs CHAPTER 1 7 In the example in Figure 1 4 a DBA has optimized hardware resources within the environ ment by modifying the global utilization policies to meet the needs of the organization For example the global CPU overutilization policies of a managed instance of SQL Server and computer have been configured to be overutilized when the utilization is greater than 85 percent In addition the global file space and storage volume overutilization policies for all managed instances of SQL Server have been changed to 65 percent R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio _ ol x File Edit View Tools Window Community Help i TA New Query D c D fo Oy oF a 3 e Utility Explorer Content Object Explorer Details x Policy Security Data Wareho
201. lobal variable RenderFormat is available For example assume that you create a tablix that summarizes sales data by year and group the data with the CalendarYear field as the outermost row group When you click the CalendarYear group item in the Row Groups pane you can access several properties in the Properties window as shown in Figure 9 7 Those properties however are not available in the item s Group Properties dialog box Properties Tablix Member oe au Name CalendarYear PageBreak BreakLocation Between Disabled iif Globals RenderFormat Name HTML4 0 True False ResetPageNumber iif Globals RenderFormat Name HTML4 0 False True zl PageName Fields CalendarYear alue hd ResetPageNumber FIGURE 9 7 Pagination properties Assume also that you want to insert page breaks between each instance of CalendarYear only when you export the report to Excel After setting the BreakLocation property to Be tween you set the Disabled property to False when the report renders as Excel by using the following expression iif Globals RenderFormat Name EXCEL False True Reporting Services keeps as many groups visible on one page as possible and adds a soft page break to the report where needed to keep the height of the page within the dimen sions specified by the InteractiveSize property when the report renders as HTML However when the report renders in any other format each year appears on a separate page or
202. lopment Studio SQL Server Integration Services SQL Server Analysis Services and SQL Server Reporting Services The Nexus client is the query editor that you can use to submit queries by using SQL statements to Parallel Data Warehouse Parallel Data Warehouse also includes DWSQL a command line tool for submitting SQL statements to the control node These client tools use Data Direct s SequeLink client drivers that support the following data access driver types m ODBC m OLE DB m ADO NET SQL Server SMP SQL database Appliance nodes Control rack Data rack Client access tools Control Compute SQL IIS Data DMS S BI ASRS 5 Admin a iei _ Console Ee SQL Server NEXUS query SQL Server editor User data Landing Zone Landing tool Coms FIGURE 6 2 Appliance software Parallel Data Warehouse Architecture 113 114 The Landing Zone Node The Landing Zone is a high capacity data storage node in the control rack that contains tera bytes of disk space for temporary storage of user data before loading it into the appliance Using your ETL processes to move data to the Landing Zone you can either copy data to the Landing Zone and then load it into the appliance or you can load data directly without first storing it on the Landing Zone With either approach the Landing Zone uses the appliance s high speed fabric to copy that data in parallel into the data rack To perform parallel data loading you can use SQL Se
203. lumn to make it easier to explore the data as you scroll horizontally zE E From Data Feeds d ia Data Type Whole Number J Sort Smallest to Largest E Freeze H g sa C From Text l Format Whole Number Z Sort Largest to Smallest A Column Width From Refresh PivotTable mien Rss Clear All Report LJ From Other Sources lt 7 9 530 Sto p Clear Sort Filters Clipboard Get External Data Report Formatting Sort and Filter FIGURE 10 6 The Home tab of the PowerPivot ribbon Although the Table Import Wizard detects and sets column data types you can use the Data Type drop down list on the ribbon to change a data type if necessary You might need to adjust data types to create a relationship between two tables for example PowerPivot supports only the following data types m Currency m Decimal Number m Text m TRUE FALSE m Whole Number PowerPivot for Excel CHAPTER 10 195 You can use the Hide and Unhide button on the Design tab shown in Figure 10 4 to control the appearance of a column in the PowerPivot window and also in the PivotTable Field List For example you might choose to display a column in the PowerPivot window but hide that column in the PivotTable window because you want to use it in a formula for a calculated column PowerPivot Reports A PowerPivot report is an Excel worksheet that presents your PowerPivot data in a summa rized form by using at least one PivotTabl
204. mInsight s CEP server includes a core engine that is built to process high throughput data The engine achieves high performance by executing highly parallel queries and using in memory caches to avoid incurring the overhead of storing data for processing The engine can handle data that arrives at a steady rate or in intermittent bursts and can even rearrange data that arrives out of sequence Queries can also incorporate nonstreaming data sources such as master reference data or historical data maintained in a data warehouse You write your CEP applications using a NET language such as Visual Basic or C for rapid application development In your applications you embed declarative queries using Lan guage Integrated Query LINQ expressions to process the data for analysis StreamlInsight also includes other tools for administration and development support The CEP server has a management interface and diagnostic views that you can use to develop applications to monitor Streamlnsight For development support StreamInsight includes an event flow debugger that you can use to troubleshoot queries An example of a situation that might require troubleshooting is the arrival of a larger number of events than expected Streamlnsight Architecture As with any new technology you will find it helpful to have an understanding of the Stream Insight architecture before you begin development of your first CEP application Your ap plication must rest
205. me Therefore you should instead think of a window as a way to partition time that is useful for performing operations on events occur ring between the two points of time that define a window In Figure 8 2 each unlabeled box below the input stream represents a window and con tains multiple events for the period of time that the window covers In this example the input stream contains three events but the first three windows contain two events and the last window contains only one event Thus a count aggregation on each window yields results different from a count aggregation on an input stream 0 60 90 120 Time minutes 3 Us events 2 e3 0 e el e2 1 2 5 e C e3 FIGURE 8 2 Event windows in an input stream Complex Event Processing with StreamInsight As you might guess the key to working with windows is to have a clear understanding of the time span that each window covers There are three types of window streams that Stream Insight supports hopping windows snapshot windows and count windows In a hopping windows stream each window spans an equal time period In a snapshot windows stream the size of a window depends on the events that it contains By contrast the size of a count windows stream is not fixed but varies according to a specified number of consecutive event start times To create a hopping window you specify both the time span that the window covers also known as window size and the time spa
206. mission level applies to all objects in the model unless you specifically override the permissions for a particular object the new permission cascades downward to lower level objects Similarly you can grant permissions on specific members of a hierarchy and allow the permissions to cascade to members at lower levels of the hierarchy To understand how security works in MDS let s configure security for a sample user and see how the security settings affect the user experience As you saw earlier in Figure 7 14 the user can access only the Explorer area in Master Data Manager Accordingly that is the only functional area that is visible when the user accesses Master Data Manager as shown in 138 Master Data Services Figure 7 15 An administrator with full access privileges would instead see the full list of func tional areas on the home page eS Microsoft SQLServer 2008 r2 Master Data Services nome Model Product z Version Merson Status Open Explorer lt j Manage hierarchies entities members and attributes FIGURE 7 15 The Master Data Manager home page for a user with only Explorer permissions Data security begins at the model level When you deny access to a model the user does not even see it in Master Data Manager With Read only access a user can view the model structure and its data but cannot make changes Update permissions allow a user to see the data as well as make changes to it To continue t
207. models that StreamInsight uses The interval event model represents events with a fixed duration such as a stock bid price that is valid only for a certain period of time The edge event model is another type of duration model but it represents an event with a duration that is unknown at the time the event starts such as a Web user session The point model represents events that occur at a specific point in time such as a Web user s click entry in a Web log The CEP Server The CEP server is a run time engine and a set of adapter instances that receive and send events as shown in Figure 8 1 You develop these adapters in a NET language and register the assemblies on the CEP server which then instantiates the adapters at run time Input adapters receive data as a continuous stream from event stores such as sensors on a factory floor Web servers data feeds or databases The data passes from the input adapter to the CEP engine which processes and transforms the data by using standing queries which are query instances that the CEP engine manages The engine then forwards the query results to output adapters which connect to event consumers such as pagers monitoring devices dashboards and databases The output adapters can also include logic to trigger a response based on the query results Streamlnsight Architecture 147 148 Event Sources Q Data feeds Event stores Web servers Devices and databases and sensors Input Adap
208. mponent that can be managed by a UCP Other components such as Analysis Services and Reporting Services are not supported After all these prerequisites are met you can deploy the UCP However before installing the UCP it is beneficial to size the UMDW accordingly and understand the maximum capacity specifications associated with a UCP UCP Sizing and Maximum Capacity Specifications The wealth of information captured during capacity planning sessions can help an organiza tion better understand its environment and make informed decisions when designing the UCP implementation In the case of the SQL Server Utility it is helpful to know that each SQL Server UCP can manage and monitor up to 100 computers and up to 200 SQL Server Database Engine instances Both computers and instances can be either physical or virtual Additional UCPs should be provisioned if there is a need to monitor more computers and instances Disk space consumption is another area you should look at in capacity planning For instance the disk space consumed within the UMDW is approximately 2 GB of data per year for each managed instance of SQL Server whereas the disk space used by the msdb database on the UCP instance is approximately 20 MB per managed instance of SQL Server Last a SQL Server UCP can support up to a total of 1 000 user databases The SQL Server Utility 25 26 Creating a UCP The UCP is relatively easy to set up and configure You can deploy
209. n SQL Server Management Studio Moreover if a database resides on a utility managed instance resource utilization associated with the data tier application can be viewed in Utility Explorer after you connect to a Utility Control Point Deleting a Data Tier Application Database administrators may encounter occasions when they need to delete a data tier applica tion from an instance of SQL Server This is accomplished by using the Delete Data Tier Applica tion Wizard in SQL Server Management Studio Database administrators should be aware that they will be prompted by the wizard to choose one of three predefined options for handling the database linked to the application before the DAC is deleted The three options are Delete Registration This method keeps the associated database and login in place while deleting the DAC metadata from the instance Detach Database This method detaches the associated database and removes the DAC metadata Detaching the associated database means that although the data files log files and logins remain in place the database can no longer be refer enced by an instance of the Database Engine Data Tier Applications Delete Database The DAC metadata and the associated database are dropped The data and log files are deleted Logins are not removed To delete the DAC follow these steps In Object Explorer connect to a SQL Server instance containing the data tier applica tion you plan to delete
210. n between the start of one window and the start of the next window also known as hop size For example assume that you need to create win dows that cover a period of one hour and a new window starts every 15 minutes as shown in Figure 8 3 In this case the window size is one hour and the hop size is 15 minutes Here is the code to create a hopping windows stream and count the events in each window var outputStream from eventWindow in inputStream HoppingWindow TimeSpan FromHours 1 TimeSpan FromMinutes 15 select new count eventWindow Count 0 30 60 90 120 Time minutes Input events Hopping windows FIGURE 8 3 Hopping windows When there are no gaps and there is no overlap between the windows in the stream hopping windows are also called tumbling windows Figure 8 2 shown earlier provides an example of tumbling windows The window size and hop size are the same in a tumbling Application Development 157 windows stream Although you can use the HoppingWindow method to create tumbling win dows there is a TumblingWindow method The following code illustrates how to count events in tumbling windows that occur every half hour var outputStream from eventWindow in inputStream Tumb1ingwindow TimeSpan FromMinutes 30 select new count eventWindow Count Snapshot windows are similar to tumbling windows in that the windows do not overlap but whereas fixed points in time determine the boundaries of a
211. n both the UMDW and msdb databases SQL Server Managed instance Management Studio Upload collection Upload collection data set FIGURE 2 1 A SQL Server Utility Control Point UCP and managed instances CHAPTER 2 Multi Server Administration REAL WORLD MI any organizations that participate in the Microsoft SQL Server early adopter program are currently either evaluating SQL Server 2008 R2 or already using it in their production infrastructure The consensus is that organizations should design a SQL Server Utility solution that factors in a SQL Server Utility with every deployment The SQL Server Utility allows you to increase visibility and control optimize resources and improve overall efficiencies within your SQL Server infra structure SQL Server Utility Key Concepts Although many database administrators may be eager to implement a UCP and start proac tively monitoring their SQL Server environment it is beneficial to take a few minutes and be come familiar with the new terminology and components that make up the SQL Server Utility m The SQL Server Utility This represents an organization s SQL Server related entities in a unified view The SQL Server Utility supports actions such as specifying resource utilization policies that track the utilization requirements of an organization Leverag ing Utility Explorer and SQL Server Utility viewpoints in SSMS can give you a holistic view of SQL Server resource health
212. n of See Live Migration 214 Utility Explorer virtualization See also Hyper V consolidation with 87 88 technology for 72 Visual Studio 2010 deploying DACs from 45 46 importing DACs into 47 48 volume space utilization monitoring 97 W Web browser support for Reporting Services 186 Web edition 13 windows event 156 159 Windows Communication Foundation WCF Web services 203 Windows domain accounts 27 30 Windows PowerShell deploying UCPs with 28 diagnostics 164 enrolling instances with 32 improvements in 11 launching 28 Windows Server 2008 integration 10 11 workbooks 173 192 Workgroup edition 13 WritingMode property reports 174 About the Authors Ross Mistry is a technical architect at the Microsoft Technology Center MTC in Silicon Valley Ross provides executive briefings architectural design sessions and proof of concept workshops to organizations located in the Silicon Valley His core specialty is Microsoft SQL Server although he also focuses on Windows Active Directory Microsoft Ex change and Windows Server Hyper V Ross s latest books include Windows Server 2008 R2 Unleashed and Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Management and Administration He was a contributing writer on Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 Unleashed Micro soft SharePoint 2007 Unleashed and Windows Server 2008 Hyper V Unleashed He frequently writes for TechTarget and is currently working on a series of SQL Server virtualization whi
213. n to update the existing model by adding new items and updating existing items Alternatively you can create an entirely new model but if you do so the relation ship with the source model is then permanently broken and any subsequent updates to the source model cannot be brought forward to the copy of the model on the target server Programmability Rather than use Master Data Manager exclusively to perform master data management operations you might prefer to automate some operations to incorporate them into a custom application Fortunately MDS is not just an application ready to use after installation but also a development platform that you can use to integrate master data management directly into your existing business processes TIP For a code sample that shows how to create a model and add entities to the model see the following blog entry by Brent McBride a Senior Software Engineer on the MDS team Creating Entities using the MDS WCF API at http sq blog com blogs mds_team archive 2010 01 29 creating entities using the mds wcf api aspx The Class Library The MDS API allows you to fully customize any or all activities necessary to create populate maintain manage and secure master data models and associated data To build your own data stewardship or management solution you use the following namespaces Master Data Services Microsoft MasterDataServices Services Contains a class to provide instances of the Mds
214. nchronous JavaScript and XML If you are familiar with earlier versions of Reporting Services you can see the improvement that AJAX provides by changing parameters or by using drilldown The Report Viewer no longer requires a refresh of the entire screen nor does it reposition the current view to the top of the report which results in a much smoother viewing experience Improved Browser Support Reporting Services no longer supports just one Web browser as it did when it was first released In SQL Server 2008 R2 you can continue to use Windows Internet Explorer 6 7 or 8 which is recommended for access to all Report Viewer features You can also use Firefox Netscape or Safari However these browsers do not support the document map text search within a report zoom or fixed table headers Furthermore Safari 3 0 does not support the Calendar control for date parameters or the client side print control and does not correctly display image files that the report server retrieves from a remote computer If you choose to use a Web browser other than Internet Explorer you should understand the authentication support that the alternative browsers provide Internet Explorer is the only browser that supports all authentication methods that you can use with Reporting Services Negotiated Kerberos NTLM and Basic Firefox supports Negotiated NTLM and Basic but not Kerberos authentication Safari supports only Basic authentication NOTE Basic
215. nction in the first column of the table instructs Reporting Services to match each value in that field from Dataset2 with the StProv field in Dataset1 and then to display the corresponding StProvName The expression in the first column of the table is shown here Reporting Services Enhancements Lookup Fields StateProvinceCode Value Fields StProv Value Fields StProvName Value Dataset1 The MultiLookup function also requires a one to one relationship between the source and destination but it accepts a set of source values as input Reporting Services matches each source value to a destination value one by one and then returns the matching values as an array You can then use an expression to transform the array into a comma separated list as shown in Figure 9 2 Dataset1 Dataset2 StateProvinceCode SalesAmount David Campbell BC OR WA 2975 Month to Date Sales by Salesperson Saleperson Territory Sales Amount David Campbell British Columbia Oregon Washington 2 975 Tsvi Reiter Florida Georgia 3 000 FIGURE 9 2 MultiLookup function results The MultiLookup function in the second column of the table requires an array of values from the dataset bound to the table which in this case is the StateProvinceCode field in Dataset2 You must first use the Split function to convert the comma separated list of values in the StateProvinceCode field into an array Reporting Services operates on each element of the array matching
216. ndows Server 2008 by expand ing on the existing high availability technologies while adding new features that allow for maximum availability and reliability for SQL Server 2008 R2 implementations This chapter discusses the enhancements to high availability that significantly contribute to the capabilities of SQL Server 2008 R2 in both physical and virtual environments Enhancements to High Availability with Windows Server 2008 R2 In the following list are a few of the improvements that will appeal to SQL Server and Windows Server professionals looking to gain maximum high availability within their database infrastructures m Hot add CPU and memory When using SQL Server 2008 R2 in conjunction with Windows Server 2008 R2 database administrators can upgrade hardware online by dynamically adding processors and memory to a system that supports dynamic hardware partitioning This is a very convenient feature for organizations that cannot endure downtime for SQL Server systems running in mission critical environments m Failover clustering Greater high availability is achievable for SQL Server R2 with failover clustering on Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 R2 enhances the failover cluster installation experience by increasing the number of validation tests within the Cluster Validation Wizard Moreover Windows Server 2008 R2 introduces a Best Practices Analyzer tool to help database administrators reduce best practice violations Simil
217. new built in feature is a Windows Server 2008 R2 Hyper V enhancement Live Migration increases high availability and improves service by reducing planned outages It allows DBAs to move SQL Server virtual machines VMs between physical Hyper V hosts without any perceived interruption in service Hyper V on Windows Server 2008 R2 also allows for maximum scalability because it supports up to 64 logical processors As a result it is possible to virtualize and consolidate nu merous SQL Server instances databases and workloads onto a single host Another benefit is that Live Migration allows an organization to not only completely isolate its operating system with virtualization but also to host multiple editions of SQL Server while running both 32 bit SQL Server Consolidation Strategies CHAPTER5 87 and 64 bit versions within a single host In addition physical SQL Servers can easily be virtual ized by using the physical to virtual P2V migration tool included with System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 R2 Figure 5 4 illustrates a consolidation strategy in which many da tabases instances and physical SQL Server systems are virtualized on a single Hyper V host SQLInstance01 Server 3 r oe aa SQLInstance03 r i D D i SF u es SQLInstanceO2 GG WD Scinstenceor Server 2 i SQLInstance03 Server 1 Hyper V host FIGURE 5 4 Consolidating many databases instances and
218. new virtual machine is being created NOTE Ifa folder is not selected the SQL Server VM is stored in the default folder con figured for the Hyper V server On the Memory page enter the amount of memory to be allocated to the SQL Server s VM guest operating system Click Next NOTE With SQL Server 2008 R2 it is recommended that you have 2 048 GB or more of RAM whereas with Windows Server 2008 R2 a minimum of 512 MB of RAM is recom mended Remember to ensure that SQL Server workloads are sized accordingly and remember to take into consideration the amount of RAM required for each SQL Server VM Also remember that it is possible to shut down the guest operating system and add more RAM to the virtual machine if necessary Implementing Live Migration for SQL Server 2008 R2 CHAPTER 77 7 10 On the Networking page connect the network adapter to an existing virtual network by selecting the appropriate network adapter from the menu Click Next to continue On the Connect Virtual Hard Disk page as shown in Figure 4 7 specify the name loca tion and size to create a virtual hard disk so that you can install an operating system Click Next to continue a New Virtual Machine Wizard Ei le Connect Virtual Hard Disk Before You Begin 4 virtual machine requires storage so that you can install an operating system You can specify the storage now or configure it later by modifying the virtual machine s properties C
219. nge alongside historical copies of master data for reference and a work in progress copy for use in preparing the master data for changing business requirements MDS creates the initial version when you create a model Anyone with the appropriate per missions can populate the model with master data and make changes to the model objects in this initial version until you lock the version After that only users with Update permissions on the entire model can continue to modify the data in the locked version to add missing information fix any business rule violation or revert changes made to the model If necessary you can temporarily unlock the version to allow other users to correct the data When all data validates successfully you can commit the version Committing a version prevents any further changes to the model and allows you to make the version available to downstream systems through subscriptions You can use a flag as shown in Figure 7 13 to identify the current version to use so that subscribing systems do not need to track the cur rent version number themselves If you require any subsequent changes to the model you Administration 137 create a new version by copying a previously committed version and allowing users to make their changes to the new version Manage Model Geography z To edit a versio k a cell in the corresponding row Toe ck it Version Name Description Status Flag Validation Copied From
220. nizations can streamline consolidation efforts because this feature provides database administrators DBAs with insight into resource utilization through policy evaluation and historical analysis This chapter begins by describing the consolidation options available to DBAs It then ex plains how DBAs can take advantage of viewpoints and dashboards in the SQL Server Utility to identify consolidation opportunities which is done by monitoring resource utilization and health state for SQL Server instances databases and deployed data tier applications SQL Server Consolidation Strategies The goal of SQL Server consolidation is to identify underutilized hardware and improve utilization by choosing an appropriate consolidation strategy With SQL Server hardware could be considered to be underutilized when workloads are using less than 30 percent of server resources However underutilization thresholds vary based on the hardware utilized for SQL Server and the organization Some compelling reasons for organizations to consolidate are to reduce costs improve efficiency address lack of physical space in the data center create more effective service levels standardize and centralize manage ment Some common consolidation strategies organizations can apply are described in the rest of this section 85 86 Consolidating Databases and Instances A very common SQL Server consolidation strategy involves placing many databases on a sin gle in
221. ns 183 exporting to Atom data feed 182 layout dynamic 169 170 172 173 naming pages in 173 nesting items in 173 page numbering 170 pagination managing 172 173 parts searching for 183 PowerPivot 196 198 publishing in parts 180 182 reusability of components in 178 182 sandboxing 186 text box orientation 174 on UCP creation 28 on validation 28 31 ResetPageNumber property reports 172 resource isolation 186 resource utilization monitoring 95 99 reusability of report components 178 182 Role Based Access security model 39 rs exe 187 S sandboxing reports 186 scalability 10 Second Level Address Translation SLAT 64 security in MDS Master Data Services 138 141 Role Based Access model 39 SequeLink client drivers 112 113 Server Manager 11 shared datasets 179 shared nothing SN architecture 115 120 SharePoint Reporting Services integration 187 188 SharePoint Unified Logging Service 188 shell access See Windows PowerShell side by side migration 18 19 SLAT Second Level Address Translation 64 slicers 198 SMP architecture 110 snapshot windows 158 software requirements 15 sparklines 176 Split function 167 SQL Azure 9 SQL Server editions 11 See also specific editions SQL Server instances See instances managed instances SQL Server Management Studio 49 51 SQL Server objects 44 45 SQL Server PowerShell See Windows PowerShell SQL Server Utility See also Utility Control
222. ns shown in Figure 4 11 The VM should be listed under Services And Applications m Expand Nodes Select the node on which the VM was created The VM should be listed under Services And Applications in the Results pane SS Failover Cluster Manager File Action View Help Failover Cluster Manager Recent Cluster Events E Bl Hyper V Cluster Prototype com E Services and applications E E Services and applatons Name a a ype cuen une aos Zo 5QLServer2008R2 VM01 3 101 Olfine Virtual Machine ___Node1 Yes Bq Configure a Service or Appli B Noses Virtual Machines E Cluster Shared Volumes h ca Storage m E Networks fi Cluster Events vm More Actions G Refresh s Connect to virtual maci Start virtual machines Turn off virtual machines it H k migra Quick migrate virtual machin 1 Service or application 1 item selected Manage virtual machine a ta ah E Move virtual machine s to a gt go SEa a Show the critical events for Le we Add storage Status Auto Start Preferred Owners Offline Yes lt none gt Add a resource 0 Disable auto start K Alerts Storage Current Owner Nodel EZ Show Dependency Report lt none gt lt none gt Client Access Name Capacity lt none gt Total 0 Bytes Free Space 0 Bytes E Properties IP Addresses Percent Free 0 lt none gt H Hep Other Resources HM Delete 2
223. ns with SQL Server Management Studio and view DAC resource utilization across the SQL Server infrastructure in Utility Explorer at scale 41 42 The Data Tier Application Life Cycle There are two common methods for generating a DAC One is to author and build a DAC using a SQL Server data tier application project in Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 In the second method you can extract a DAC from an existing database by using the Extract Data Tier Ap plication Wizard in SQL Server Management Studio Alternatively a DAC can be generated with Windows PowerShell commands Figure 3 1 illustrates the data tier application generation and deployment life cycle for both a new data tier application project in Visual Studio 2010 and an extracted DAC created with the Extract Data Tier Application Wizard in SQL Server Management Studio SSMS In the illustration the DAC package is deployed to the same instance of SQL Server 2008 R2 in both methodologies SQL Server Visual Studio Data tier e ra i 9 developer Managed instances SQL Server 2008 R2 Upload collection data set DBA P SQL Server Management Utility Control Point Studio FIGURE 3 1 The data tier application life cycle CHAPTER 3 Data Tier Applications Data tier developers using a data tier application project template in Visual Studio 2010 first build a DAC and then deploy the DAC package to an instance of SQL Server 2008 R2 In contrast database
224. ns references the data connection which by default is Sandbox for embedded PowerPivot data All other arguments are point ers to dimension member names that define the coordinates of the value to retrieve from the in memory cube PowerPivot for Excel CHAP Eai Bobi z Booki Microsoft Excel ofS Home Insert Pagelayout Formulas Data Review View PowerPivot o X Calibri Ju General A lgl OZ Fled a Ga B 7 U Ax ie s7 Styles Cells a d F o A 7 yr Teo o 7 gt 2 Clipboard G Font amp Alignment Ge Number amp Editing B4 amp fe CUBEVALUE PowerPivot Data A51 44 B52 a A B c D es a ea A 1 Sum of AW Bicycle Sales Column Labels 2 Row Labels 2004 2005 2006 Grand Total 3 Mountain Bikes 100142 167088 169237 436467 4 Road Bikes 1503641 285831 289370 725565 5 Touring Bikes 73700 91741 90973 256414 6 728655 1109422 1116372 2954449 T Grand Total 1052861 1654082 1665952 4372895 8 M 4 M Data for Sheet Chart 1_ Sheeti Z Sheet Z Sheel 4 e Ready m 100 FIGURE 10 9 The CUBEVALUE function Slicers The task pane for PowerPivot is similar to the one you use for an Excel PivotTable but it includes two additional drop zones for slicers Slicers are a new feature in Excel 2010 that can be associated with PowerPivot Slices work much like report filters but link to multiple objects such as a PivotTable and a PivotCh
225. nstance are underutilized m The instance contains data or log files with underutilized storage space m The instance contains data or log files that reside on volumes with underutilized storage space Using the SQL Server Utility Dashboard 91 92 e No Data Available Either data has not been uploaded from a managed instance or there is a problem with the collection and upload process By viewing the Managed Instance Health section DBAs are able to quickly obtain an overview of resource utilization across all managed instances within the utility The example in Figure 5 6 shows that five managed instances are well utilized six are over utilized none are underutilized and data is unavailable for three managed instances in the Managed Instance Health section Managed Instances With Overutilized Resources This section is found directly under the Managed Instance Health section It displays overutilization data for man aged instances of SQL Server based on the following categories e Overutilized Instance CPU This represents the number of managed instances of SQL Server that are violating instance CPU overutilization policies e Overutilized Database Files This represents the number of managed instances of SQL Server with database files that are violating file space overutilization policies e Overutilized Storage Volumes This represents the number of managed in stances of SQL Server with database files on storage volumes that are vi
226. nt Loading processing and backing up terabytes of data with balanced hardware resources is vitally important in a very large data warehouse Parallel Data Warehouse uses carefully bal anced hardware to maximize the efficiency of each hardware component and avoid the need to over purchase hardware Parallel Data Warehouse accomplishes this goal of balancing speed and hardware by using a shared nothing SN architecture In addition to the shared nothing architecture there are other differences from other edi tions of SQL Server to notice For example SQL commands to create a database and tables are slightly different from their standard Transact SQL counterparts In addition although Parallel Data Warehouse supports most of the SQL Server 2008 data types there are a few exceptions Last the architecture requires a new approach to query processing and data load processing Shared Nothing Architecture An SN architecture is a type of architecture in which each node of a system uses its own CPU memory and storage to avoid performance bottlenecks caused by resource contention with other nodes In Parallel Data Warehouse each compute node contains its own data CPU and storage to function as a self sufficient and independent unit Although the SN architecture is gaining popularity as a data warehousing architecture performance can still be slow when a parallel query must first move data among the nodes before execution When a SQL join op
227. nt library that provides document man agement capabilities for PowerPivot workbooks You can use it to preview and open Power Pivot workbooks from a central location In the PowerPivot Gallery shown in Figure 10 13 you can see all available sheets in the workbook as thumbnails with current data without opening the workbook A snapshot service creates the thumbnail images by periodically reading the workbooks file Site Actions Browse PowerPivot Site Po on Share a doc nt with the n by adding it to this document library Home Search this site 2 8 Libraries Shereges Sales Analysis 5 Shared Documents Last Modified By System Account Date 3 21 2010 Created By System Account mg un PowerPivot Gallery Lists AW Industry SalesHistory Comparison Tasks iin J Discussions i i Team Discussion Sites Calendar People and Groups T Recycle Bin 3 all Site Content FIGURE 10 13 The PowerPivot Gallery In addition to the default Gallery view the PowerPivot Gallery also includes the Theater and Carousel views which are most useful when you want to highlight a small number of workbooks In Theater view you can see a central preview area and thumbnails of the other reports in the workbook display at the bottom of the page In Carousel view the thumbnails appear to the left and right of the preview area In either of these views you can click the left Self Ser
228. o bottom An English word for example would have the bottom of each letter facing left and the top of each letter facing right Instead you can set this property to a new value Rotate270 which also renders the text in a vertical layout but from bottom to top as shown in Figure 9 10 This feature is useful for tablix row headers when you need to minimize the width of the tablix Sales Amount 2005 20 235 5 2006 92 735 3 2007 296 533 lt 2008 161 794 2005 7 395 349 g 2006 19 956 015 2007 25 551 775 2008 13 399 243 mel 2005 34 376 F 2006 485 587 Z 2007 871 864 2008 386 013 2 2005 615 475 S 2006 3 610 092 2007 5 482 497 8 2008 2 091 012 FIGURE 9 10 Text box orientation Reporting Services Enhancements Data Visualization Prior to SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services your only option for enhancing a report with data visualization was to add a chart or gauge Now your options have been expanded to include data bars sparklines indicators and maps Data Bars A data bar is a special type of chart that you add to your report from the Toolbox window A data bar shows a single data point as a horizontal bar or as a vertical column Usually you embed a data bar inside of a tablix to provide a small data visualization for each group or detail group that the tablix contains After adding the data bar to the tablix you configure the value you want to display and you can fine tune other properties
229. o database administrators for deploy ment After a data driven application was deployed developers and administrations found making changes to be a tedious process Much later in the life cycle of data driven applications they came to the stark realization that there was no tool available to cen trally manage a deployed environment Obviously many challenges existed throughout the life cycle of a data driven application Introduction to Data Tier Applications With the release of Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 the SQL Server Manageability team addressed these struggles by introducing support for data tier applications to help streamline the deployment management and upgrade of database applications A data tier application also referred to as a DAC is a single unit of deployment that contains all the elements used by an application such as the database application schema instance level objects associated database objects files and scripts and even a manifest defining the organization s deployment requirements The DAC improves collaboration between data tier developers and database adminis trators throughout the application life cycle and allows organizations to develop deploy and manage data tier applications in a much more efficient and effective manner than ever before mainly because the DAC file functions as a single unit Database administra tors can now also centrally manage monitor deploy and upgrade data tier applicatio
230. obal policy applied to a deployed data tier application For example by expanding the Data Tier Application CPU Utilization Policies section you can observe that the global policy is applied With this policy a CPU of a data tier application is considered to be overutilized when its usage is greater than 70 percent and underutilized when it is less than zero percent If you wanted to override this global policy for a data tier applica tion you would select the Override The Global Policy option button and specify the new overutilized and underutilized numeric values in the box You would then click Apply to enforce the new policy In Figure 5 13 the global policy has been modified from its original settings and the CPU of a data tier application is now considered to be overutilized when its usage is greater than 30 percent To override this setting you would choose the Override The Global Policy option button and set a desired value in the box to the right of the policy description For this example the setting was changed from 30 percent to 70 percent R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio _joLxi File Edit View Tools Window Community Help i Dnon query D D D DIDIA lal Utility Explorer Content Object Explorer Details x Production Utility SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO1 Deployed Data tier Applications Name Application CPU Computer CPU File Space Volume Space __ Policy Type Instance Name J AccountingDB Override SQL2
231. ocess While the validation process is running status informa tion is continually displayed on the Validating page until all tests are complete After all tests are complete the Summary page is displayed as shown in Figure 4 4 It includes the results of the validation tests and numerous details about the information col lected during each test Any errors or warnings listed in the validation results should be looked into and rectified as soon as possible It is also possible to proceed without fixing errors however the failover cluster will not be supported by Microsoft KS Yalidate a Configuration Wizard a Summary Before You Begin Testing has completed successfully The configuration appears to be suitable for clustering _ However you should review the report because it may contain warnings which you should Testing Options address to attain the highest availability Confirmation Validating Si Failover Cluster Validation Report Node Node1 Prototype com Node NODEZ2 Prototype com P aut 4 ral x To view the report created by the wizard click View Report x To close this wizard click Finish Zeu Nepot More about cluster validation tests FIGURE 4 4 The Failover Cluster Validation Report 7 Click View Report to observe the report in the default Web browser The report is dis played in Web archive mht format Click Finish to close the wizard NOTE The Validate A Configuration Wizar
232. ocessing with StreamInsight Server database must adapt to the schema of the table that it queries Instead you provide the table schema in a configuration specification when the adapter is bound to the query Conversely an untyped output adapter receives the event type description which contains a list of fields when the query starts The untyped output adapter must then map the event type to the schema of the destination data source typically in a configuration specification Adapters Input and output adapters provide transformation interfaces between event sources event consumers and the CEP server Event sources can push events to event consumers or event consumers can pull events from event sources Either way the CEP application operates between these two points and intercepts the events for processing The input adapter reads events from the source transforms them into a format recognizable by the CEP server and provides the transformed events to a standing query As the CEP server processes the event stream the output adapter receives the resulting new events transforms them for the event consumers and then delivers the transformed events Before you can begin developing an adapter you must know whether you are building an input or output adapter You must also know the event type which in this context means you must understand the structure of the event payload and how the application timestamps affect stream processing The
233. ode Hyper V failover cluster with two CSVs and eight SQL Server guest operating systems With Live Migration running SQL Server VMs can be seam lessly moved between Hyper V hosts High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements Hyper V01 Hyper V02 Hyper V03 Hyper V04 C ClusterShares Volume1 VHD VHD VHD VHD C ClusterShares Volume2 See VHD VHD VHD VHD FIGURE 4 5 A Hyper V cluster and Live Migration Windows Server 2008 R2 Hyper V System Requirements Table 4 1 below outlines the minimum requirements along with the recommended system configuration for using Hyper V on Windows Server 2008 R2 TABLE 4 1 Hyper V System Requirements MINIMUM RECOMMENDED Processor x64 compatible processor with Intel VT or AMD V technology enabled CPU speed 1 4 GHz 2 0 GHz or faster additional CPUs are required for each guest operating system RAM 1 GB additional RAM is required 2 GB or higher additional RAM is for each guest operating system required for each guest operating system Disk space 8 GB additional disk space is 20 GB or higher additional disk needed for each guest operating space is needed for each guest system operating system SQL Server 2008 R2 Virtualization and Hyper V CHAPTER4 73 NOTE System requirements vary based on an organization s virtualization requirements Organizations should size their workloads to ensure that the Hyper V hosts can successfully accommodate all of the virtual servers and a
234. ogic to the data such as an aggregation and send the results as an event stream to an output adapter You encapsulate the business logic used by a standing query instance in a query template that you develop using a combination of LINQ and a NET language To create the standing query instance in the CEP server you bind a query template with specific input and output You can use the same query template with multiple standing queries After you instantiate a query you are can start stop or manage it Deployment Models You have two options for deploying StreamInsight You can integrate the CEP server into an application as a hosted assembly or you can deploy it as a standalone server Hosted Assembly Embedding the CEP server into a host application is a simple deployment approach You have greater flexibility than you would have with a standalone server because there are no dependencies between applications that you must consider before making changes Each application and the CEP server run as a single process which may be easier to manage on your server You can use any of the development approaches described later in the Application Devel opment section of this chapter when hosting the CEP server in your application However if you decide later that you want your application to run on a standalone server you will need to rewrite your application using the explicit server development model Standalone Server You should d
235. ok that are not answered by visiting this site or viewing a Knowledge Base article send them to Microsoft Press via e mail to mspinput microsoft com Please note that Microsoft software product support is not offered through these addresses We Want to Hear from You We welcome your feedback about this book Please share your comments and ideas via the following short survey http www microsoft com learning booksurvey Your participation will help Microsoft Press create books that better meet your needs and your standards NOTE We hope that you will give us detailed feedback via our survey If you have questions about our publishing program upcoming titles or Microsoft Press in general we encourage you to interact with us via Twitter at http twitter com MicrosoftPress For support issues use only the e mail address shown above xix Database Administration Ross Mistry CHAPTER 1 SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements 3 CHAPTER 2 Multi Server Administration 21 CHAPTER 3 Data Tier Applications 41 CHAPTER4 High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements 63 CHAPTERS Consolidation and Monitoring 85 SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements icrosoft SQL Server 2008 R2 is the most advanced trusted and scalable data M platform released to date Building on the success of the original SQL Server 2008 release SQL Server 2008 R2 has made an impact on organizations worldwide with its groundbreaking capab
236. olating file space overutilization policies e Overutilized Computer CPU This represents the number of managed instances of SQL Server running on computers that are violating computer CPU overutiliza tion policies Detailed status for each health parameter is listed in a sliding indicator to the right of each element in this section Managed Instances With Underutilized Resources This section is located under the Managed Instances With Overutilized Resources section and displays underutiliza tion data for managed instances of SQL Server based on the following categories e Underutilized Instance CPU This represents the number of managed instances of SQL Server that are violating instance CPU underutilization policies e Underutilized Database Files This represents the number of managed instances of SQL Server with database files that are violating volume space underutilization policies e Underutilized Storage Volumes This represents the number of managed instances of SQL Server with database files on storage volumes that are violating file space underutilization policies e Underutilized Computer CPU This represents the number of managed instanc es of SQL Server running on computers that are violating computer CPU underuti lization policies Detailed status for each health parameter is listed in a sliding indicator to the right of each element in this section Consolidation and Monitoring Data Tier Application Health This sec
237. ollowing code PS C gt dv server GetDiagnosticView cep Server EventManager PS C gt dv To retrieve information about a query you must provide the full name following the StreamInsight hierarchical naming schema For example for an application named myApplica tion with a query named myQuery you use the following code PS CANS S dvi server GetDiagnosticView cep Server Application myApplication Query myQuery PS C gt dv NOTE Foracomplete list of metrics and statistics that you can query by using diagnostic views refer to the SQL Server Books Online topic Monitoring the CEP Server and Queries at http msdn microsoft com en us library ee391166 SQL 105 aspx 164 3 Complex Event Processing with StreamInsight Reporting Services Enhancements f you thought Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Reporting Services introduced a lot of great new features to the reporting platform just wait until you discover what s new in Reporting Services in SQL Server 2008 R2 The Reporting Services development team at Microsoft has been working hard to incorporate a variety of improvements into the product that should make your life as a report developer or administrator much simpler New Data Sources This release supports a few new data sources to expand your options for report develop ment When you use the Data Source Properties dialog box to create a new data source you see Microsoft SharePoint List Microsoft SQL Azure an
238. om of the page on which you edit the attribute values as shown in Figure 7 5 Data Stewardship CHAPTER 131 132 Attributes Fl bk Supply Chain Marketing Inventory Packaging System Code Name Name c Validation Issues lal Validation failed Business Rule Required fields Color is required Required fields StandardCost is required Required fieldsSafetyStockLevel is required Required fieldsReorderPoint is required Required fields InHouseManufacture is required Rule Condition 2iflerseys x ProductSubCategory ProductLine US United States Country MSRP A USD US dollar MSRPCurrencyCode p SellStartDate SellEndDate DiscontinuedItemInd DocumentationURL Required Issue Description Color is required StandardCost is required SafetyStockLevel is required ReorderPoint is required InHouseManufacture is required NA NA N No 2 8 2010 10 18 09 PM 2 8 2010 10 18 09 PM 2 8 2010 10 18 09 PM 2 8 2010 10 18 09 Pm a Date 2 8 2010 10 18 09 PM FIGURE 7 5 Attributes and validation issues Business Rules One of the goals of a master data management system is to set up data correctly once and to propagate only valid changes to downstream systems To achieve this goal the system must be able to recognize valid data and to alert you when it detects invalid data In MDS you create business rules to describe the conditions that cause the data to be considered invalid For example
239. on or The 64 bit editions of Windows Server 2008 SP2 Datacenter Datacenter without Hyper V Enterprise Enterprise without Hyper V Standard Standard without Hyper V or Windows Web Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 Datacenter Enterprise Standard or Windows Web Server Minimum Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 SP1 SQL Server 2008 R2 SQL Server Native Client SQL Server 2008 R2 SQL Server Setup Support Files Minimum Windows Installer 4 5 Minimum Windows Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2008 or Microsoft Hyper V Server 2008 or Microsoft Hyper V Server 2008 R2 NOTE Server hardware has offered both 32 bit and 64 bit processors for several years however Windows Server 2008 R2 is 64 bit only Please take this into consideration when planning SQL Server 2008 R2 deployments on Windows Server 2008 R2 Hardware and Software Requirements R 15 16 Installation Upgrade and Migration Strategies Like its predecessors SQL Server 2008 R2 is available in both 32 bit and 64 bit editions both of which can be installed either with the SQL Server Installation Wizard or through a com mand prompt As was briefly mentioned earlier in this chapter it is now also possible to use Sysprep in conjunction with SQL Server for automated deployments with minimal administra tor intervention Last DBAs also have the option to upgrade an existing installation of SQL Server or conduct a side by si
240. on I would like recognize Ken Jones former product planner at Microsoft Press for taking on this project would also like to thank my coauthor Stacia Misner for doing a wonderful job in writing the second portion of this book which focuses on business intelligence BI appreciate your support and talent in the creation of this title would also like to recognize the folks at Microsoft Press for providing me with this opportunity and for putting the book together in a timely manner Special thanks goes to Maria Gargiulo project editor and Karen Szall developmental edi tor for driving the project and bringing me up to speed on the Microsoft Press way Maria your attention to detail and organizational skills during the multiple rounds of edits and reviews is much appreciated Also thanks to all the folks on the production team at Online Training Solutions Inc OTSI Jean Trenary project manager Kathy Krause copy editor Rozanne Whalen technical reviewer and Kathleen Atkins proofreader This book would not have been possible without the support and assistance of numerous individuals working for the SQL Server High Availability Failover Clustering and Virtualization product groups at Microsoft To my colleagues on the product team thanks for your assistance in responding to my questions and providing chapter reviews m SQL Server Manageability Dan Jones Principal Group Program Manager Omri Bahat Senior Program Manager
241. on history for a managed instance of SQL Server File Space The File Space column summarizes file space utilization for all of the databases belonging to a selected instance of SQL Server The health state for this parameter is determined by global or local file space utilization policies Because there are many database associated with a managed instance of SQL server the health state is reported as overutilized if only one database is overutilized The Storage Utilization tab shows health state information on all other database files Consolidation and Monitoring Volume Space Volume space utilization is summarized in this column for volumes with databases belonging to each managed instance The health of this parameter is determined by the global or local storage volume utilization policies for managed instances of SQL Server As with file space reports the health of a storage volume asso ciated with a managed instance of SQL Server that is overutilized is reported with a red up arrow and underutilization is reported with a green arrow The Storage Utilization tab shows additional health information and history for volumes Policy Type The final column in the list view specifies the type of policy applied to the managed instance of SQL Server Policy type results are reported as either Global or Override with Global meaning that default policies are in use and Override mean ing that custom policies are in use DBAs can apprecia
242. on monitoring using the SQL Server Utility dash boards and modifying policies see Chapter 5 Consolidation and Monitoring Additional SQL Server 2008 R2 Enhancements for DBAs This section focuses on the SQL Server 2008 R2 enhancements that go above and beyond application and multi server administration DBAs should be aware of the following new capabilities Parallel Data Warehouse Parallel Data Warehouse is a highly scalable appliance for enterprise data warehousing It consists of both software and hardware designed to meet the needs of the largest data warehouses This solution has the ability to massively scale to hundreds of terabytes with the use of new technology referred to as massively parallel processing MPP and through inexpensive hardware configured in a hub and SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements spoke control node and compute nodes architecture Performance improvements can be attained with Parallel Data Warehouse s design approach because it partitions large tables over several physical nodes resulting in each node having its own CPU memory storage and SQL Server instance This design directly eliminates issues with speed and provides scale because a control node evenly distributes data to all compute nodes The control node is also responsible for gathering data from all compute nodes when returning queries to applications There isn t much a DBA needs to do from an imple mentation perspective the
243. on for high availability On the Select Virtual Machine page shown in Figure 4 10 confirm the name of the VM you plan to make highly available In this example SQLServer2008R2 VM01 is used Click Next Sa High Availability Wizard Select Virtual Machine Before You Begin Select the virtual machine s that you want to configure for high availability Select Service or Arpitan Name Status HostServer oO Number1 Full Saved NODE2 Prototype com o Number4 Saved NODE2 Prototype com Confirmation oO a Number5 Off NODE2 Prototype com o SQL2008 Saved Node1 Prototype com o a SQL2K8R2 01 Running Node1 Prototype com pe oO 4 SQL2K8R2 02 Running Node1 Prototype com p 2 O amp SQL2K8R2 03 Off Node1 Prototype com a SOLServer2008R2 V M01 Off Node1 Prototype com Os wee Off Node Prototype com Refresh lt Previous Next gt Cancel FIGURE 4 10 Configuring a VM for high availability Implementing Live Migration for SQL Server 2008 R2 81 NOTE To make a VM highly available you must ensure that it is not running It must be either turned off or shut down 13 Confirm the selection and then click Next 14 The wizard configures the VM for high availability and provides a summary To view the details of the configuration click View Report To close the wizard click Finish 15 To verify that the virtual machine is now highly available look in one of two places in the console tree m Expand Services And Applicatio
244. onditions THEN amp ff Actions aig Name is required E ProductSubCategory is required sig Color is required aig Country is required aig StandardCost is required aig SafetyStockLevel is required Edit FIGURE 7 7 The Required Fields business rule When creating a business rule you can use any of the following types of actions Default Value Sets the default value of an attribute to blank a specific value that you supply in the business rule a generated value that increments from a specified starting value or a value derived by concatenating multiple attribute values m Change Value Updates the attribute value to blank another attribute value or a value derived by concatenating multiple attribute values Validation Creates a validation warning and if you choose sends a notification e mail to a specified user or group External Action Starts a workflow at a specified Microsoft SharePoint site or initiates a custom action Because users can add or edit data only while the master data model version is open invalid data can exist only while the model is still in development and unavailable to other systems You can easily identify the members that pass or fail the business rule validation when you view a list of members in Explorer as shown in Figure 7 8 In this example the first two records are in violation of one or more of the business rules Remember that you can see the specific violation issues for a member when
245. onfigurations In addition SQL Server 2008 R2 on Windows Server 2008 R2 supports up to 16 nodes and a maximum of 23 instances within a failover cluster due to the drive letter limitation IMPORTANT When you are configuring a cluster make sure to connect the nodes by more than one network otherwise Microsoft Product Support Services does not support the implementation In addition it is a best practice to always use more than one network Failover Clustering with Windows Server 2008 R2 65 66 Figure 4 1 illustrates a two node single instance failover cluster running SQL Server on Windows Server 2008 R2 SQL Cluster InstanceO1 Nodel Node2 Heartbeat Network SAN Storage FIGURE 4 1 A two node single instance failover cluster Figure 4 2 illustrates a multiple instance failover cluster running SQL Server on Windows Server 2008 R2 SQL Cluster Instance02 ne y SQL Cluster Instance01 Nodel Node2 Heartbeat Network SAN Storage FIGURE 4 2 A two node multiple instance failover cluster CHAPTER4 High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements Guest Failover Clustering In the past physical servers were usually affiliated with the nodes in a failover cluster Today virtualization technologies make it possible to form a cluster with each node being a guest operating system on virtual servers This is known as guest failover clustering To achieve a guest failover cluster you must have a quorum a public ne
246. onitoring Two linear graphs are presented next to each other The first graph shows CPU utiliza tion based on the selected deployed data tier application and the second graph dis plays data based on the computer associated with the deployed data tier application Storage Utilization The next tab displays storage utilization for a selected de ployed data tier application as depicted in Figure 5 12 Data is grouped by either filegroup or volume When the Filegroup option button is selected storage utiliza tion is displayed for each data tier application based on the node selected in the tree view If the Volume option button is selected storage utilization history is displayed by volume The tree view also can be expanded to present storage utilization informa tion and history for each volume and filegroup associated with a deployed data tier application In Figure 5 12 the volume space for the AdventureWorks2005 deployed data tier application is shown as overutilized because a red arrow is displayed in the Volume Space column of the Storage Utilization tab Once again the display intervals for the graphs are changed by selecting one of the options available below e 1Day Displays data in 15 minute intervals e 1Week Displays data in one day intervals e 1 Month Displays data in one week intervals e 1Year Displays data in one month intervals Ra Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio ox File Edt View Tools Window Community Help i new
247. or example a business user can quickly and easily pull together these preconstructed components into a personalized report without know ing how to build a query or design a matrix To help the shared datasets run faster you can configure a cache refresh schedule to keep a copy of the shared dataset in cache Last the ability to share report data as an Atom data feed extends the usefulness of data beyond a single source report Reporting Services Enhancements Shared Datasets A shared dataset allows you to define a query once for reuse in many reports much as you can create a shared datasource to define a reusable connection string Having shared data sets available on the server also helps SQL Server 2008 R2 Report Builder 3 0 users develop reports more easily because the dataset queries are already available for users who lack the skills to develop queries without help The main requirement when creating a shared dataset is to use a shared data source In all other respects the configuration of the shared dataset is just like the traditional embedded dataset used in earlier versions of Reporting Services You define the query and then specify options query parameter values calculated fields and filters as needed The resulting file for the shared dataset has an rsd extension and uploads to the report server when you deploy the project The project properties now include a field for specifying the target folder for shared datasets on the re
248. ort design problems Last Chapter 10 Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot continues the theme of self service by explaining how users can integrate disparate data for analysis by using SQL Server PowerPivot for Excel and how to centralize and share the results of this analysis by using SQL Server Power Pivot for SharePoint Pre Release Software To help you get familiar with SQL Server 2008 R2 as early as possible after its release we wrote this book using examples that work with the Release Candidate 0 RCO version of the product Consequently the final version might include new features and features we discuss might change or disappear Refer to the What s New topic in SQL Server Books Online at http msdn microsoft com en us library bb500435 SQL 105 aspx for the most up to date list of changes to the product Be aware that you might also notice some minor differences between the RTM version of the product and the descriptions and screen shots that we provide Support for This Book Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this book As corrections or changes are collected they will be added to a Microsoft Knowledge Base article accessible via the Microsoft Help and Support site Microsoft Press provides sup port for books including instructions for finding Knowledge Base articles at the following Web site http www microsoft com learning support books If you have questions regarding the bo
249. oth sources are relational and accessible with the same authentication But what if the data comes from different relational platforms Or what if some of the data comes from SQL Server and other data comes from a SharePoint list And even if the sources are relational what if you can access only stored procedures and are unable to create a query to join the sources These are just a few examples of situations in which the new Lookup functions in the Reporting Services expression language can help In general the three new functions Lookup MultiLookup and LookupSet work similarly by using a value from the dataset bound to the data region the source and matching it to a value in a second dataset the destination The difference between the functions reflects whether the input or output is a single value or multiple values You use the Lookup function when there is a one to one relationship between the source and destination The Lookup function matches one source value to one destination value at a time as shown in Figure 9 1 Dataset1 Dataset2 StProvName StProv O StateProvinceCode SalesAmount Co f e Month to Date Sales State Province Sales Amount British Columbia 1 225 Oregon 750 Washington 1 000 FIGURE 9 1 Lookup function results In the example the resulting report displays a table for the sales data returned for Dataset2 but rather than displaying the StateProvinceCode field from the same dataset the Lookup fu
250. owerPivot data whereas the measure values calculate at query time and do not persist in the data store The calculated column values are scalar and the measure values are aggre gates Last a calculated column may contain string values or numeric values but a measure is always a numeric value As an example consider a calculated column that shows gross profit The PowerPivot table would include a gross profit value for each sales transaction which a PivotTable can later aggregate However if you create a calculated column to store a gross profit margin percentage value the aggregate in the PivotTable will not be correct because percentage values are not additive To create a measure you must first create a PivotTable or PivotChart In the Excel window select the PivotTable or PivotChart and then click the New Measure button on the Power Pivot tab of the ribbon You then provide a name for the measure for all PivotTables in the PowerPivot for Excel 199 report provide a name for the current PivotTable if you want and then specify the formula for the measure as shown in Figure 10 11 Formula _ fe Check formula FIGURE 10 11 Measure settings DAX Functions Measure Settings Table name Total Sales X Measure Name All PivotTables Gross Margin Percent Custom Name This PivotTable Gross Margin Percent Zox fFsum Gross Margin sum SalesAmount cm The examples shown for a calculated column and
251. pace reports the health of a storage volume associated with a deployed data tier application of SQL Server that is overutilized is reported with a red arrow and underutilization is reported with a green arrow The Storage Utilization tab shows additional health information and history for volumes Policy Type This column in the list view specifies the type of policy applied to a deployed data tier application of SQL Server Policy Type results are reported as either Global or Override Global indicates that default policies are in use and Override indi cates that custom policies are in use Instance Name The final column in the list view specifies the name of the SQL Server instance to which the data tier application has been deployed The Data Tier Application Tabs The Data Tier Applications viewpoint includes tabs for additional viewing The tabs are lo cated at the bottom of the viewpoint and consist of CPU Utilization The CPU Utilization tab illustrated in Figure 5 11 displays historical information on CPU utilization for a selected deployed data tier application accord ing to the interval specified on the left side of the display area DBAs can change the display intervals for the graphs by selecting one of the following options e 1 Day Displays data in 15 minute intervals e 1 Week Displays data in one day intervals e 1 Month Displays data in one week intervals 1 Year Displays data in one month intervals Consolidation and M
252. physical hosts with virtualization No matter what consolidation strategy an organization adapts the benefits are signifi cant without any sacrifice of scalability and overall performance Now that the consolidation strategies have been explained it is time to explore how an organization can quickly recog nize whether its database environment is a candidate for consolidation and can ultimately streamline its consolidation efforts by monitoring resource utilization 88 CHAPTER 5 Consolidation and Monitoring Using the SQL Server Utility for Consolidation and Monitoring The SQL Server Utility is the center of operations for monitoring managed instances of SQL Server databases and deployed data tier applications By using the dashboards and view points included in the SQL Server Utility DBAs can proactively monitor and view resource utilization health state and health policies for managed instances databases and deployed data tier applications at scale The results obtained from monitoring allow DBAs to easily identify consolidation candidates across an organization s database environment To experience the dashboards and viewpoints yourself launch the SQL Server Utility by following these steps IMPORTANT Before you can carry out these steps you must have created a Utility Control Point and you must enroll at least one instance of SQL Server For more informa tion on how to do this see Chapter 2 Multi Server Administration 1
253. plication CPU C _ 0 0 Underutilzed Database Files 0 14 Underutilized Database Files 1 0 0 Underutilzed Storage Volumes 0 14 Underutilized Storage Volumes 0 0 Underutilized Computer CPU 0 14 Underutilized Computer CPU 0 0 R 141 8 GB ME Used space 141 8 GB 1Day C Free space 108 0 GB 113 5 GB C 1week _ 1 Month pot ee L C 1 Year aiaa 28 4 GB 0 0 GB 6 00 PM 12 00 AM 6 00 AM 12 00 PM Ready a FIGURE 2 2 The SQL Server Utility dashboard Multi Server Administration UCP Prerequisites As with other SQL Server components and features the deployment of a SQL Server UCP must meet the following specific prerequisites and requirements m The SQL Server version running the UCP must be SQL Server 2008 R2 or higher SQL Server 2008 R2 is also referred to as version 10 5 m The SQL Server 2008 R2 edition must be Datacenter Enterprise Evaluation or Developer m The SQL Server system running the UCP must reside within a Windows Active Directory domain m The underlying operating system must be Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 If Windows Server 2003 is used the SQL Server Agent service account must be a member of the Performance Monitor User group m It is recommended that the collation settings affiliated with the Database Engine in stance hosting the UCP be case insensitive NOTE The Database Engine instance is the only co
254. plication list view columns and utilization tabs are discussed in the upcom ing sections Using the Data Tier Application Viewpoint C a 101 102 The Data Tier Application List View The columns presenting the state of health for each deployed data tier application in the data tier application list view include Application CPU This column displays the health state utilization of the processor for the deployed data tier application The health state is determined by the CPU uti lization policy for deployed data tier applications The CPU Utilization tab shows CPU utilization history for the selected deployed data tier application Computer CPU This column communicates computer processor utilization for deployed data tier applications The CPU Utilization tab shows the processor utilization history for the deployed data tier application File Space The File Space column summarizes file space utilization for each deployed data tier application The health state for this parameter is determined by global or local file space utilization policies The Storage Utilization tab shows health state infor mation on all other database files Volume Space Volume space utilization is summarized in this column for volumes with databases belonging to each deployed data tier application The health of this param eter is determined by the global or local Storage Volume utilization policies for deployed data tier application of SQL Server Similar to File S
255. port data to an Atom service document An Atom service document can be used by any application that consumes data feeds such as SQL Server PowerPivot for Excel You can use this feature for situations in which the client tools that users have available cannot access data directly or when the query structures are too complex for users to build on their own Although you could use other techniques for delivering data feed to users Reporting Services provides the flexibility to use a common security mechanism for reports and data feeds to schedule delivery of data feeds and to store report snapshots on a periodic basis The Atom service document contains at least one data feed per data region in the report if a report author has not disabled this feature Depending on the structure of the data a matrix that contains adjacent groups a list or a chart might produce multiple data feeds Each data feed has a URL that you use to retrieve the content To export a report to the Atom data feed you click the last button on the toolbar in the Report Viewer as shown in Figure 9 18 Home My Subscriptions Site Settings d eB Export to Data Feed FIGURE 9 18 Atom Data Feed The Atom service document is an XML document containing a connection to each data feed that is defined as a URL as shown in the following XML code lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 standalone yes gt lt service xmlns atom http www w3 0rg 2005 Atom xmlns a
256. port server NOTE You can continue to create embedded datasets for your reports as needed and you can convert an embedded dataset to a shared dataset at any time In Report Manager you can check to see which reports use the shared dataset when you need to evaluate the impact of a change to the shared dataset definition Simply navigate to the folder containing the shared dataset click the arrow to the right of the shared dataset name and select View Dependent Items as shown in Figure 9 15 Home My Subscriptions Site Settings Help A j SQL Server Reporting Services 21 Datasets Search A L New Folder New Data Source bei Report Builder A Folder Settings Upload File H Details View rd ResellerSales T Move X Delete 4 Edit in Report Builder View Dependent Items Security Manage amp Download a FIGURE 9 15 The shared dataset menu Cache Refresh The ability to configure caching for reports has been available in every release of Reporting Services This feature is helpful in situations in which reports take a long time to execute and the source data is not in a constant state of change By storing the report in cache Reporting Reusability 179 180 Services can respond to a report request faster and users are generally happier with the reporting system However cache storage is not unlimited Periodically the cache expires and the next person that requests the report has to wait
257. pp http www w3 0rg 2007 app xmins http www w3 org 2007 app gt lt workspace gt lt atom title gt Reseller Sales lt atom title gt lt collection href http yourserver ReportServer 2fExploring Features 2fReseller Sales amp rs 3aCommand Render amp rs 3aFormat ATOM amp rc 3aDataFeed xAx0x0 gt lt atom title gt Tablixl lt atom title gt lt collection gt lt workspace gt lt service gt Reporting Services Enhancements Report Builder 3 0 Report Builder 1 0 was the first release of a report development tool targeted for business users That version restricted the users to queries based on a report model and supported limited report layout capabilities Report Builder 2 0 was released with SQL Server 2008 and gave the user expanded capabilities for importing queries from other report definition files or for writing a query on any data source supported by Reporting Services In addition Report Builder 2 0 included support for all layout options of Report Definition Language RDL Report Builder 3 0 is the third iteration of this tool It supports the new capabilities of SQL Server 2008 R2 RDL including maps sparklines and data bars In addition Report Builder 3 0 supports two improvements intended to speed up the report development process edit sessions and the Report Part Gallery Edit Sessions Report Builder 3 0 operates as an edit session on the report server if you perform your devel opment work while connected
258. property applies to a group and can be used within the tablix data region as shown in Figure 9 9 or in charts and other data visualizations whenever you need to fill gaps in data across multiple instances of the same grouping You simply set the property value to the name of the data region that contains the group In this example the MonthName group s DomainScope property is set to Tablix1 which is the name assigned to the list Each instance of the list s group category and year renders an identical set of values for MonthName Layout Control 173 174 Accessories 2005 January February March April May June July August September 1 696 3 593 3 250 Accessories 2006 January February March April May June July August September 585 2 160 2 200 1 776 5 578 4280 10 478 18 552 16 329 Accessories 2007 January February March April May June July August September 4727 5 563 5333 9635 12 388 10 631 31 152 54 405 54 756 Accessories 2008 January February March April May June July August September 16 722 19 135 19 052 27 585 40 731 38 569 FIGURE 9 9 Synchronized groups Text Box Orientation Each text box has a WritingMode property that by default displays text horizontally There is also an option to display text vertically to accommodate languages that display in that for mat Although you could use the vertical layout for other languages you probably would not be satisfied with the result because it renders each character from top t
259. provide information to MDS about the master data For example each record must identify the model into which you will load the master data When staging data you use the following tables in the MDS database as appropriate to your situation m tbISTGMember Use this table to stage leaf members consolidated members or collections You provide only the member name and code in this table m tbliSTGMemberAttribute Use this table to stage the attribute values for each member using one row per attribute and include the member code to map the at tribute to the applicable member m tblSTGRelationship Use this table to stage parent child or sibling relationships between members in a hierarchy or a collection NOTE For detailed information about the table columns and valid values for required columns refer to the Master Data Services Database Reference topic in SQL Server 2008 R2 Books Online at http msdn microsoft com en us library ee633808 SQL 105 aspx The next step is to use Master Data Manager to create a batch To do this you identify the model and the version that stores the master data for the batch The version must have a status of either Open or Locked to import data from a staging table On your command to process the batch MDS attempts to locate records in the staging tables that match the speci fied model and load them into the tables corresponding to the model and version that you Integration 136 selected When the bat
260. pture any activity related to sandboxing and should be monitored frequently for evidence of potential threats Reporting Services Enhancements SharePoint Integration SQL Server 2008 R2 Reporting Services continues to improve integration with SharePoint In this release you find better options for configuring SharePoint 2010 for use with Reporting Services working with scripts to automate administrative tasks using SharePoint lists as data sources and integrating Reporting Services log events with the SharePoint Unified Logging Service Improved Installation and Configuration The first improvement affects the initial installation of Reporting Services in SharePoint inte grated mode Earlier versions of Reporting Services and SharePoint require you to obtain the Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services Add in for SharePoint as a separate download for installation Although the add in remains available as a separate download the prerequisite installation options for SharePoint 2010 include the ability to download the add in and install it automatically with the other prerequisites After you have all components installed and configured on both the report server and the SharePoint server you need to use SharePoint 2010 Central Administration to configure the General Application settings for Reporting Services As part of this process you can choose to apply settings to all site collections or to specific sites which is a much more streaml
261. r CPU overutilization policies Detailed status for each health parameter is listed in a sliding indicator to the right of each element in this section Data Tier Applications With Underutilized Resources This section is located directly under the Data Tier Applications With Overutilized Resources section This section displays underutilization data of individual instances based on the following categories e Underutilized Data Tier Application CPU This represents the number of deployed data tier applications that are violating data tier application CPU under utilization policies e Underutilized Database Files This represents the number of deployed data tier applications with database files that are violating file space underutilization policies e Underutilized Storage Volumes This represents the number of deployed data tier applications with database files on storage volumes that are violating file space underutilization policies e Underutilized Computer CPU This represents the number of deployed data tier applications running on computers that are violating computer CPU underuti lization policies Detailed status for each health parameter is listed in a sliding indicator to the right of each element in this section Utility Storage Utilization History Located at the bottom left corner of the Util ity Explorer Content pane this section uses a time graph to display the storage utiliza tion history for the amount of storage the SQ
262. r a Failover Cluster a Knowledge Base article that describes each test in detail at http technet microsoft com en us library 732035 WS 10 aspx Running the Validate A Configuration Wizard Prior to installing a failover cluster for SQL Server 2008 R2 on Windows Server 2008 R2 ad ministrators should run the Validate A Configuration Wizard tool by following these steps Ensure that the failover clustering feature is installed on all the nodes associated with the new cluster being validated On one of the nodes of the cluster open the Failover Cluster Management snap in Review the information on the Before You Begin page and then click Next You can select the option to hide this page when using the wizard in the future On the Select Servers Or A Cluster page in the Enter Name field type either the host name or the fully qualified domain name FQDN of a node in the cluster Alternatively you can click the Browse button and select one or more nodes in the cluster Click Next to continue On the Testing Options page select Run All Tests or Run Only Test Select and then click Next It is recommended that you choose Run All Tests when using the wizard for the first time The tests are organized into Inventory Network Storage and System Configuration categories Failover Clustering with Windows Server 2008 R2 69 6 On the Confirmation page review the details for each test and then click Next to begin the validation pr
263. r analyses to data that comes from the corporate data warehouse In fact their analyses often require data that will never be part of the data warehouse such as miscellaneous spreadsheets or text files prepared for specific needs or data obtained from third parties that might be used only once Users can spend a great deal of time gathering data from disparate sources and then manually consolidating and integrating the data in the form of one or more Microsoft Excel workbooks PivotTables and PivotCharts are popular tools for performing analyses but Excel requires all the data for these objects to be consolidated first into a single table or to be available in the form of a cube in a SQL Server Analysis Services database What does the user do when the insight is so useful that the spreadsheet needs to be shared with others on a frequent basis with fresh data Sometime users are also constrained by the volume of data that they want to analyze Excel 2007 can support one million rows of data but what if the user has data that is more than a million rows These users need a tool that enables them to analyze huge sets of data without dependence on IT support Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 comes to the rescue for these users with two new features to meet these needs SQL Server PowerPivot for Excel 2010 and SQL Server PowerPivot for SharePoint 2010 PowerPivot for Excel gives analysts a way to integrate large volumes of data outside of a corporate data
264. rack active passive Active server Dedicated storage Control node active passive User queries D Data loading Dual Fibre Channel l Data backup 7 FIGURE 6 1 The multi rack system The Data Rack All activity related to parallel query processing occurs in the data rack which is a collection of compute nodes Each compute node consists of a server with dedicated storage a SQL Server instance and additional Parallel Data Warehouse software that provides communication and data transfer functions Although the compute nodes run separate SQL Server instances in parallel to manage each distributed appliance database you query the database as if it were a single database The number of compute nodes in a data rack varies among the vendors although each vendor follows a standard architecture specification For example each data rack includes a spare server for high availability If a compute node server fails or needs to be taken of fline for maintenance the compute node server automatically fails over to the spare server The current connections to the appliance stay intact while the appliance reconfigures itself Just as with SQL Server failover queries that were in progress before the failover need to be restarted Parallel Data Warehouse Architecture CHAPTER 6 111 112 The Control Rack The control rack is a separate rack that houses the servers storage and networking com ponents for the nodes that provi
265. rce utilization The utility also provides improved capabilities to help organizations maximize the value of consolidation efforts and ensure the streamlined development and deployment of data driven applications The SQL Server Utility The SQL Server Utility is a breakthrough manageability feature included with SQL Server 2008 R2 that allows database administrators to centrally monitor and manage database applications and SQL Server instances all from a single management interface This interface known as a Utility Control Point UCP is the central reasoning point in the 21 22 SQL Server Utility It forms a collection of managed instances with a repository for perfor mance data and management policies After data is collected from managed instances Utility Explorer and SQL Server Utility dashboard and viewpoints in SQL Server Management Studio SSMS provide administrators with a view of SQL Server resource health through policy evaluation and analysis of trending instances and applications throughout the enterprise The following entities can be viewed in the SQL Server Utility m Instances of SQL Server m Data tier applications Database files m Volumes Figure 2 1 shows one possible configuration using the SQL Server Utility which includes a UCP many managed instances and a workstation running SSMS for managing the utility and viewing the dashboard and viewpoints The UCP stores configuration and collection informa tion i
266. reate a virtual hard disk Specify Name and Location Assign Memory Configure Networking Cerne ual Merelbeke Name EQLServerz008R2 vm01 wvhd ocation C ClusterStorage Volume1 SQLServer2008R2 M01 ari Installation Options ui get 5Q Browse Summary Size Sd GB Maximum 2040 GB Use an existing virtual hard disk Location sivms rinew Virtual Machine Browse Attach a virtual hard disk later lt Previous Lue gt Einish Cancel FIGURE 4 7 The Connect Virtual Hard Disk page when a new virtual machine is being created On the Installation Options page choose a method to install the operating system The options include m Installing an operating system from a boot CD DVD ROM m Installing an operating system from a boot floppy disk m Installing an operating system from a network based installation server m Installing an operating system at a later time After choosing the method click Next to continue Review the selections in the Completing The New Virtual Machine Wizard and then click Finish The new VM is created however it is in an offline state High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements 11 12 13 14 From the Virtual Machines section of the results pane in Hyper V Manager right click the name of the SQL Server VM you just created and click Connect The Virtual Machine Connection tool opens In the Action menu in the Virtual Machine Connect
267. regularly produce high volumes of streaming data Manufacturing and utilities companies use sensors meters and other devices to monitor processes and alert users when the system identifies events that could lead to a poten tial failure Financial trading firms must monitor market prices for stocks commodities and other financial instruments and rapidly calculate profits or losses based on changing conditions 145 146 Similarly there are certain types of applications that benefit from the ability to analyze data as close as possible to the time that the applications capture the data For example companies selling products online often use clickstream analysis to change the page layout and site navigation and to display targeted advertising while a user remains connected to a site Credit card companies monitor transactions for exceptions to normal spending activities that could indicate fraud The challenge with CEP arises when you need to process and analyze the data before you have time to perform ETL activities to move the data into a more traditional analytical environment such as a data warehouse In CEP applications the value of the information derived from low latency processing defined in milliseconds can be extremely high This value begins to diminish as the data ages Adding to the challenge is the rate at which source applications generate data often tens of thousands of records per second StreamInsight Highlights Strea
268. rehouse is an MPP architecture that uses multiple database servers that operate together to process queries Behind the scenes each database server runs one SQL Server instance with its own dedicated CPU RAM storage and network bandwidth Each database managed by Parallel Data Warehouse is distributed across mul tiple database servers that execute Parallel Data Warehouse queries in parallel Parallel Data Warehouse s architecture includes a controlling server to coordinate these parallel queries and all other database activity across the multiple database servers This controlling server also presents the distributed database as a single logical database to users If you need to scale out the MPP hardware you can simply add inexpensive commodity servers and storage rather than expensive high end servers and storage The Multi Rack System Parallel Data Warehouse is configured as a multi rack system in which there is a control rack and one or more data racks as shown in Figure 6 1 Each rack is a collection of nodes each of which has a dedicated role within the appliance These nodes transfer data among themselves using an InfiniBand network that ships with the appliance Only the nodes in the control rack communicate with the corporate Ethernet network The nodes in the data rack can export tables to a corporate SMP SQL Server database by using the InfiniBand network Scalable Data Warehousing Control rack Data rack Management node Control
269. review changes and reverse transactions Master Data Services m Integration Management Use this area to create and process batches for im porting data from staging tables into the MDS database view errors arising from the import process and create subscription views for consumption of master data by operational and analytic applications m System Administration Use this area to create a new model and its entities and attributes define business rules configure notifications for failed data validation and deploy a model to another system m User And Group Permissions Use this area to configure security for users and groups to access functional areas in Master Data Manager to perform specific func tions and to restrict or deny access to specific model objects Data Stewardship Master Data Manager is the data stewardship portal in which authorized business users can perform all activities related to master data management At minimum a user can use this Web application to review the data in a master data model Users with higher permissions can make changes to the master data and its structure define business rules review changes to master data and reverse changes Model Objects Most activities in MDS revolve around models and the objects they contain A model is a container for all objects that define the structure of the master data A model contains at least one entity which is analogous to a table in a relational database
270. revoked NT SERVICEMSSQL INSTANCED1 d Reader privileges for this login cannot be revoked NT SERVICE SQLAgent INSTANCE01 d Reader privileges for this login cannot be revoked PROTOTYPE administrator La Reader privileges for this login cannot be revoked sa La Reader privileges for this login cannot be revoked SQL2K8R2 01 test2 mj Appl Discard Changes Ready WA FIGURE 2 8 Configuring read only privileges for the SQL Server Utility 38 CHAPTER 2 Multi Server Administration REAL WORLD M any organizations have large teams managing their SQL Server infrastructures because they have hundreds of SQL Server instances within their environ ment Let s say you wanted to grant 50 users the read only privilege for the SQL Server Utility dashboard and viewpoints It would be very impractical to grant every single database administrator the read only privilege Therefore if you have many database administrators and you want to grant them the read only role for the SQL Server Utility within your environment you can take advantage of a Role Based Ac cess model to streamline the process For example you can create a security group within your Active Directory domain called Utility Readers and then add all the desired database administrators and Win dows administrator accounts into this group Then in SSMS you create a new login and select the Active Directory security group called Utility Readers The final step involves adding the Utility
271. rom memory if no one has accessed the workbook after 48 hours and deletes it from the folder after an additional 72 hours of inactivity If a user updates the workbook in SharePoint and a copy of the workbook already exists in the cache the PowerPivot System Service also removes the older cache copy The PowerPivot Database Each service application has its own relational database called the PowerPivot database In particular this PowerPivot database stores the load or cache status of workbooks server usage information and schedule information for data refresh operations More specifically the application database stores an instance map that identifies whether a workbook is currently loaded on the server or in the cache Usage information in the application database applies to connections query response times load and unload events and other information pertinent to server health statistics The data refresh schedule information includes details about data sources users and the workbooks associated with a schedule None of the workbook content is in the PowerPivot database Instead workbooks are stored in the SharePoint content database The PowerPivot Web Service The PowerPivot Web Service is a thin middle tier connection manager implemented as a Win dows Communication Foundation WCF Web service that runs on a SharePoint Web front end The Web service listens on the port assigned to a Web application enabled for PowerPivot and respond
272. rts you can engage business users as data stewards As data stewards they have access to Master Data Manager a Web application that gives them ownership of the processes that identify and react to data quality issues For example a data steward can specify conditions that trigger actions such as creating a default value for missing data sending an e mail notification or launching a workflow Data stewards can use Master Data Manager not only to manage data quality issues but also to edit master data by adding new members or changing values They can also enhance master data with additional attributes or hierarchical structures quickly and easily without IT support Using Master Data Manager data stewards can also monitor chang es to master data through a transaction logging system that tracks who made a change when the change was made which record was changed and what the value was both before and after the change If necessary the data steward can even reverse a change MDS uses Windows integrated security for authentication and a fine grained role based system for authorization that allows administrators to give the right people the direct access they need to manage and update master data As an administrator you can grant broad access to all objects in a model or you can restrict users to specific rows and columns in a data set To capture the state of master data at specific points in time MDS allows administrators to create versions
273. ructure data streams to a format usable by the processing engine You use adapters to perform this restructuring before passing the data to queries that run on the CEP server The way you choose to develop your application also depends on the deployment model you use to implement StreamInsight Complex Event Processing with StreamInsight Data Structures The high throughput data that StreamInsight requires is known as a stream More specifi cally a stream is a collection of data that changes over time For example a Web log contains data about each server hit including the date time page request and Internet protocol IP address of the visitor If a visitor clicks on several pages in the Web site the Web log contains multiple lines or hits for the same visitor and each line records a different time The informa tion in the Web log shows how each user s activity in a Web site changes over time which is why this type of information is considered a stream You can query this stream to find the average number of hits or the top five referring sites over time Streamlnsight splits a stream into individual units called events An event contains a header and a payload The event header includes the event kind and one or more timestamps for the event The event kind is an indicator of a new event or the completeness of events already in the stream The payload contains the event s data as a NET data structure There are three types of event
274. rver 2008 R2 Reporting Services includes a new global variable that allows you to set the values for look and feel properties based on the render ing format used to produce the report That is any property that controls appearance such as Color or behavior such as Hidden can use members of the RenderFormat global variable in conditional expressions to change the property values dynamically depending on the rendering format Let s say that you want to simplify the report layout when a user exports a report to Microsoft Excel Sometimes other report items in the report can cause a text box in a data region to render as a set of merged cells when you are unable to get everything to align perfectly The usual reason that users export a report to Excel is to filter and sort the data and they are not very interested in the information contained in the other report items Rather than fussing with the report layout to get each report item positioned and aligned just right you can use an expression in the Hidden property to keep those report items visible in every export format except Excel Simply reference the name of the extension as found in the RSReportServer config file in an expression like this iif RenderFormat Name EXCEL True False Expression Language Improvements 169 170 Another option is to use the RenderFormat global variable with the IsInteractive member to set the conditions of a property For example let s say you have
275. rver Integration Services or a command line tool The Backup Node Another node in the control rack is the Backup node that as the name implies is dedicated to the backup process which it can perform at very high speed The backup node uses SQL Server s native database level backup and restore functionality and coordinates the backup across nodes You can create full backups or differential backups of user databases or backups of the system database that contains information about user accounts passwords and permissions The initial backup takes the longest time because it contains all data in a database but subsequent differential backups run much faster because they contain only the changes in the data that were made since the last full backup Furthermore the backup process runs in parallel across nodes to help performance TIP To restore the backup the destination appliance must have at least as many of com pute nodes as the appliance where the backup was created The Management Node The final node in the control rack is the management node which operates as the hub for software deployment servicing and system health and performance monitoring This node also runs a Windows domain controller to manage authentication within the appliance It performs functions related to the management of hardware and software in the appliance and is not visible to users Like the control node the management node is a two node active passive clust
276. s and reporting Some of the new features included in this edition include support for up to eight pro cessors enrollment of up to 25 managed instances of SQL Server into a single Utility Control Point PowerPivot for SharePoint data compression support for UCS 2 Uni code Master Data Services support for up to four virtual machines and the potential to sustain up to 2 terabytes of RAM It still provides high levels of availability scalability and security and includes classic SQL Server 2008 features such as data and backup com pression Resource Governor Transparent Data Encryption TDE advanced data mining algorithms mirrored backups and Oracle publishing SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements m Standard SQL Server 2008 R2 Standard is a complete data management and BI platform that provides medium class solutions for smaller organizations It does not include all the bells and whistles included in Datacenter and Enterprise however it continues to offer best in class ease of use and manageability Backup compression which was an enterprise feature with SQL Server 2008 is now a feature included with the SQL Server 2008 R2 Standard Compared to Datacenter and Enterprise Standard supports only up to four processors up to 64 GB of RAM one virtual machine and two failover clustering nodes Specialized Editions SQL Server 2008 R2 continues to deliver specialized editions for organizations that have unique sets of requirem
277. s this data platform consists of two types of components those that help you manage data and those that help you deliver business intelligence BI Accordingly we have divided this book into two parts to focus on the new capabilities for each of these areas Part I Database Administration is written with the DBA in mind and introduc es readers to the numerous innovations in SQL Server 2008 R2 Chapter 1 SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements discusses the key enhancements what s new in the different editions of SQL Server 2008 R2 and the benefits of running SQL Server 2008 R2 on Windows Server 2008 R2 In Chapter 2 Multi Server Administration readers learn how centralized management capabilities xvii xviii are improved with the introduction of the SQL Server Utility Control Point Step by step instructions show DBAs how to quickly designate a SQL Server instance as a Utility Control Point and enroll instances for centralized multi server manage ment Chapter 3 Data Tier Applications focuses on how to streamline deploy ment and manage and upgrade database applications with the new data tier ap plication feature Chapter 4 High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements covers high availability enhancements and includes step by step implementations for ensuring business continuity with SQL Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 R2 and Hyper V Live Migration Finally in Chapter 5 Consolid
278. s These provide a summary and detailed presentations of resource health and configuration details for managed instances of SQL Server deployed data tier applications and host resources such as CPU utilization file space utilization and volume space utilization This allows superior insight into resource utilization and policy violations and helps identify consolidation opportunities maximizes the value of hardware investments and maintains healthy systems The utility dashboard is depicted in Figure 2 2 R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio _jorx File Edit View Tools Window Community Help i New Query D D D Gia Gs Gr bel GS y Utility Explorer Content x Utility Summary Data tier Applic Well utilized 0 Managed Instances 14 Well utilized 0 H Overutilized 11 H Overutilized 0 Underutilized 0 ae E Underutilized 0 No Data Available 3 Deployed Data tier No Data Available 0 a Applications 9 a W vith Overutilize ces Data tier Applications witi utilized Re Overutilized Instance CPU C O 14 Overutilized Data tier Application CPU C7 0 0 Overutilized Database Files ss 0 14 Overutilized Database Files mm 0 0 Overutilized Storage Volumes EE 6 14 Overutilized Storage Volumes 1 0 0 Overutilized Computer CPL Sitti 11 14 Overutilized Computer CPU 0 0 Data tier Applicat th Underutilizes Underutilized Instance CPU C 0714 Inderutilized Data tier Ap
279. s always identical to the name of the database m Version The DAC version identification helps developers working in Visual Studio identify the version in which they are currently working In addition creating a ver sion helps identify the version of the DAC package used during deployment The DAC version information is stored in the msdb database and can be viewed in SQL Server Management Studio in the Data Tier Applications node Description This property is optional Use it to describe the DAC If this section is completed the information is saved in the msdb database under the Data Tier Applications node in Management Studio On the Validation And Summary page review the information presented in the DAC properties summary tree because these settings are used to register the specified DAC The wizard checks and validates SchemaName ObjectName and object dependencies and it confirms that the information is supported by the DAC Review the summary It displays DAC object issues DAC object warnings and the DAC objects supported If there are no issues click Next to continue You can also click Save Report to capture the entire report The Register DAC screen indicates whether or not the DAC was successfully registered in the msdb system database Review the success and failure of each action and then click Finish to conclude the registration process The data tier application can now be viewed under the Data Tier Applications node i
280. s in Central Administration that you can use to check or reconfigure the settings for PowerPivot One link takes you to the service settings page where you can schedule database timeouts data refresh hours and query re sponse time thresholds You can use another link to review timer job settings for data refresh dashboard processing PowerPivot configuration and the health statistics collector A third link takes you to the settings page for usage log collection Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot Index A adapter base classes 151 AdapterFactory objects 152 adapters for CEP applications 151 154 Admin Console 122 aggregate functions 168 AJAX 186 Analysis Services engine 123 190 annotating transactions in MDS 134 application errors monitoring 122 applications data tier See DACs data tier applications arrays converting comma separated lists of values into 167 Atom data feed exporting reports to 182 importing data into PowerPivot workbook 191 authentication Extended Protection for 10 in MDS Master Data Services 127 authorization MDS 138 Azure 9 Backup node 114 Best Practices Analyzer BPA overview of 11 running 71 binding query templates 162 Bing Maps tile layers as backgrounds 177 browser support for Reporting Services 186 built in fields 170 business intelligence Bl integration 123 business rules MDS 132 133 C Cache Refresh reports 179 180 calculated columns 199 capac
281. s summarized results in Excel worksheets When you are ready to create a PowerPivot workbook you click the PowerPivot tab on the Excel ribbon and click the PowerPivot Window button in the Launch group shown in Fig ure 10 1 to open the PowerPivot window The PowerPivot window opens separately from the Excel window which allows you to switch back and forth as necessary between working with your PowerPivot data and working with the presentation of that data in Excel worksheets File Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View PowerPivot val a Xlo E m i x lt 2 aS PowerPivot lev De easure PivotTable Create Update Settings Field sss g 2 List Window Measure Me linked Table All Launch Measures Report Excel Data Options Show Hide Relationship FIGURE 10 1 The PowerPivot Window button in the Excel window The Local Analysis Services Engine The add in also installs a local Analysis Services engine on your computer Installation also adds the client providers necessary for connecting to Analysis Services PowerPivot uses the Analysis Services engine to compress and process large volumes of data which Analysis Ser vices loads into workbook objects The Analysis Services engine runs exclusively in process in Excel which means that there is no need to manage a separate Windows service running on your computer This version of Analysis Services uses the new VertiPaq storage mode which works
282. s to requests by coordinating the request response exchange between client ap plications and PowerPivot for SharePoint instances in the farm This Web service requires no separate configuration or management The PowerPivot Managed Extension The PowerPivot Managed Extension is an assembly in the Analysis Services OLE DB provider client This provider client is installed on a client computer when you install the PowerPivot for Excel add in and on the SharePoint server when you install PowerPivot for SharePoint For managed connections the Web service and the managed extension operate the same way The query processing request determines which one is used PowerPivot for SharePoint 203 204 Content Management Content management for PowerPivot is quite simple because the data and the presentation layout are kept in the same document If they weren t you would have to maintain separate files in different formats and then manually integrate them each time one of the files required replacement with fresh data By storing the PowerPivot workbooks in SharePoint you can reap the benefits applicable to any content type such as workflows retention policies and versioning For example you can copy data to a new location by copying the document Or if you need to formally approve data before allowing others to access it you can easily set up a document approval workflow The PowerPivot Gallery The PowerPivot Gallery is a special type of docume
283. s with underutilized storage space e No Data Available Either data affiliated with deployed data tier applications has not been uploaded to the Utility Control Point or there is a problem with the collec tion and upload process By viewing the Data Tier Application Health section DBAs can quickly obtain a holistic view of resource utilization for all deployed data tier applications managed by the SQL Server Utility In Figure 5 6 there are seven well utilized and two overutilized data tier applications m Data Tier Applications With Overutilized Resources This section is found directly under the Data Tier Application Health section It displays overutilization data for deployed data tier applications based on the following categories e Overutilized Data Tier Application CPU This represents the number of deployed data tier applications that are violating data tier application CPU overutilization policies Using the SQL Server Utility Dashboard 93 94 e Overutilized Database Files This represents the number of deployed data tier applications with database files that are violating file space overutilization policies e Overutilized Storage Volumes This represents the number of deployed data tier applications with database files on storage volumes that are violating file space overutilization policies e Overutilized Computer CPU This represents the number of deployed data tier applications running on computers that are violating compute
284. ssociated workloads from a CPU memory and disk perspective Practical Uses for Hyper V and SQL Server 2008 R2 Hyper V on Windows Server 2008 R2 is capable of accomplishing almost the same successes as dedicated servers including the same kinds of peak load handling and security Knowing this you might wonder when Hyper V on Windows Server 2008 R2 should be employed from a SQL Server 2008 R2 perspective Hyper V on Windows Server 2008 R2 can be utilized for m Consolidating SQL Server databases or instances on a single physical server m Virtualizing SQL Server infrastructure workloads with low utilization m Achieving high availability for SQL Server VMs by using Live Migration or guest clustering m Maintaining different versions of SQL Server and the operating system on the same physical server Virtualizing test and development environments to reduce total cost of ownership m Reducing licensing power and thermal costs m Extending physical space when the data center lacks it m Repurposing and extending the life of old SQL Server hardware by conducting a physical to virtual P2V migration m Migrating legacy SQL Server editions off hardware that is old and that has expired warranties m Generating self contained SQL Server environments also known as sandboxes Taking advantage of the rapid deployment capabilities of SQL Server VMs by using Microsoft System Center Virtual Machine Manager VMM 2008 R2 m Storing and man
285. ssors and up to 4 GB of RAM It is worth noting that it is possible to upgrade Workgroup to Standard or Enterprise Express This free edition is the best entry level alternative for independent software vendors nonprofessional developers and hobbyists building client applications This edition is integrated with Visual Studio and is great for individuals learning about data bases and how to build client applications Express is limited to one processor 1 GB of memory and a maximum database size of 10 GB SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions 13 Compact SQL Server 2008 R2 Compact is typically used to develop mobile and small desktop applications It is free to use and is commonly redistributed with embedded and mobile independent software vendor ISV applications NOTE Review Features Supported by the Editions of SQL Server 2008 R2 at http msdn microsoft com en us library cc645993 SQL 105 aspx for a complete comparison of the key capabilities of the different editions of SQL Server 2008 R2 Hardware and Software Requirements The recommended hardware and software requirements for SQL Server 2008 R2 vary depending on the component you want to install the load anticipated on the servers and the type of processor class that you will use Tables 1 1 and 1 2 describe the hardware and software requirements for SQL Server 2008 R2 Because SQL Server 2008 R2 supports many processor types and operating systems Ta ble 1 1 strictly covers th
286. stance of SQL Server This approach offers organizations improved operations through centralized management standardization and improved performance For example multiple databases belonging to the same SQL Server instance facilitates shared memory optimization and database consolidation helps to reduce overhead due to fixed resource costs per instance There are some limitations with database level consolidation however For example in this scenario all databases share the same service account maintain the same global settings and share a single tempdb database for processing temporary workloads Figure 5 1 shows many databases being consolidated onto a single physical host running one instance of SQL Server SQLInstanceO1 FIGURE 5 1 Consolidating many databases onto a single physical host running one instance of SQL Server Many times it is not possible to consolidate all of your databases onto a single instance possibly because additional service isolation is required or a single instance cannot sus tain the workload of all of the databases In addition a single tempdb database could be a performance bottleneck Your organization might also find this scenario problematic if it has requirements to maintain different service level agreements for each database if there are too many databases consolidated on the system if databases need to be isolated for security and regulatory compliance reasons or if databases require different colla
287. t s support of PowerPivot workbooks published to SharePoint Chapter 10 Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot discusses PowerPivot for SharePoint NOTE In order to use this new installation feature option SharePoint 2010 must be installed but not configured prior to installing SQL Server 2008 R2 Premium Editions SQL Server 2008 R2 introduces two new premium editions to meet the needs of large scale data centers and data warehouses The new editions Datacenter and Parallel Data Warehouse will be discussed in the SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions section later in this chapter Unicode Compression SQL Server 2008 R2 supports compression for Unicode data types The data types that support compression are the unicode compression and the fixed length nchar n and nvarchar n data types Unfortunately values stored off row or in nvarchar max columns are not compressed Compression rates of up to 50 percent in storage space can be achieved m Extended Protection SQL Server 2008 R2 introduces support for connecting to the Database Engine by using Extended Protection for Authentication Authentication is achieved by using channel binding and service binding for operating systems that sup port Extended Protection Advantages of Using Windows Server 2008 R2 The database platform is intimately related to the operating system Because of this relation ship Microsoft has designed Windows Server 2008 R2 to provide a solid IT foundation
288. tChart you select the placeholder and then use the associated field list to select and arrange fields for the selected object as shown in Figure 10 8 I 7 Book1 Microsoft Excel Pivotth oP Z File Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View PowerPivot Design Layout Format Analyze aQo Pz i s um Balnet E iy larie Jo A A Ess General an nate 3 FH Ga 3 Delete E AR sind Paste A4 EE 38 398 Bron En yg B7 ule 24 S i Formats 27 Filter Select Clipboard m Font Alignment Number Cells Editing Chart 1 Mc fe v T T T Er z A B is D E F PowerPivot Field List x Sum of AW Bicycle Sales Sum of Choose fields to add to report Sum of AW Indust Searcl 1200000 E a a A r i Seach e 1 Row La T Bicycle Sales Bicycle Sales Currency Rate 2 1000000 200401 158563 7000122 pk 3 200402 217148 7320954 Geography 800000 Product 4 S 200403 268642 7939821 GE SAN 5 200404 408508 10069050 Lea 600000 2004 ProductSubcategory 6 2005 a1 394631 7614828 Bi quarter 7 400000 4 Tao 2005 a2 398993 7668169 Reseller EM cocoon 2006 200503 420758 7925542 Salaschannel 3 2005 Q4 439700 10701403 SalesDate alesTerritory 10 o4 2006 Q1 441613 7061423 EET 11 Mountain Road Touring 2006 Q2 433992 7270302 dustryBikeSales 12 Bikes Bikes Bikes 2006 a3 367129
289. tabase 56 extracting 49 51 generating 43 importing 47 48 life cycle of 42 43 monitoring 93 94 100 105 project templates 45 46 properties setting 49 50 red or yellow icons 45 registering 55 56 SQL Server objects supported in 44 45 upgrading 59 61 uses for 43 Visual Studio deployment of 45 46 dashboard PowerPivot 206 Data Analysis Expressions DAX 199 201 data bars 175 data colocation 114 115 data feed Atom exporting reports to 182 importing data into PowerPivot workbook 191 208 control racks data feed libraries 205 Data Movement Service DMS 112 data racks 111 data sources joining 166 168 for PowerPivot for Excel 191 193 data stewards 127 data types supported in Parallel Data Warehouse 120 supported in PowerPivot 195 data warehouse appliances 109 110 See also Parallel Data Warehouse database consolidation 86 database creation 118 database objects managing 122 Datacenter edition 12 datasets See also PowerPivot for Excel PowerPivot for SharePoint combining data from multiple 166 168 importing large 192 shared 179 data tier applications DACs See DACs data tier applications Data Tier Applications viewpoint Utility Explorer 100 105 DAX Data Analysis Expressions 199 201 DDL extensions 117 default policies restoring 36 definitions DAC registering 49 storing 43 Delete Data Tier Application Wizard 56 58 Deploy Data Tier Application Wizard 52 55 deploying DACs 45
290. table sql Z Region table sql SS Shippers table sql SS Suppliers table sql 10 E SB Territories table sql BY Disconnected FIGURE 3 3 The Create Table schema and the Solution Explorer pane in a Visual Studio 2010 DAC project Importing an Existing Data Tier Application Project into Visual Studio 2010 Instead of creating a DAC from the ground up in Visual Studio 2010 a data tier developer can choose to import an existing data tier application into Visual Studio 2010 and then either edit the DAC or completely reverse engineer it The following steps enable you to import objects from a data tier application package to a data tier application project in Visual Studio 2010 1 2 Create a new data tier application project in Visual Studio In the Visual Studio Solution Explorer pane navigate to the node for the desired data tier application project Right click the node for the desired data tier application project and then select the Import Data Tier Application Wizard Visual Studio 2010 and Data Tier Application Projects 47 48 Review the information on the Welcome page and then click Next On the Specify Import Options page select the option that allows you to import from a data tier application package Click the Browse button and navigate to the folder in which you placed the dacpac to import Select the file and then click Open Click Next to continue Review the report that shows the s
291. tances of SQL Server and deployed data tier applications across the enterprise Before the intro duction of the SQL Server Utility DBAs did not have a powerful tool included with SQL Server to assist them in monitoring resource utilization and health state Most organi zations purchased third party tools which resulted in additional costs associated with SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements the total cost of ownership of their database environment The new SQL Server Utility dashboards also assist with consolidation efforts Figure 1 1 illustrates SQL Server Utility dashboard and viewpoints for providing superior insight into resource utilization and policy violations R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio OF x File Edit View Tools Window Community Help i new Query D D D Cs 7 bel GS Hh Utility Explorer Content x Managed Instance Health ti nmary Data tier Application Health i Well Utilized 5 i Overutilized 6 D Underutilized 0 No Data Available 3 Deployed Data tier Oo 6 Applications 3 H Well Utilized 7 Wi Overutilized 2 Dl Underutilized 0 W no Data Available 0 Managed Instances 14 Managed Instanc th Overutilized Resources ata tier A utilized R Overutilized Instance CPU COOCOO 0 14 Overutilized Data tier Application CPU 00 9 Overutilized Database Files 7 0 14 Overutilized Database Files 0 9 Overutilized Storage Volumes MT 6 14 Overutili
292. tatus of the import actions as illustrated in Fig ure 3 4 and then click Finish Import Data tier Application Wizard Import Objects T Import Object dg mpor ects yy Imp j Welcome Help Specify Import Options Status Importing the Data tier Application objects completed successfully Summary Import Objects 1 23 2010 7 56 13 PM Extracting the scripts 1 23 2010 7 56 13 PM Started importing file C Users 4DMINI 1 PRO AppDatalLocal Temp Database4_20100124035613 sql 1 23 2010 7 56 13 PM File name C Users ADMINI 1 PRO AppData Local Temp Databaset_ 20100124035613 sql size 31325 Parsing import script Total number of batches in script 78 Total number of statements in script 78 The script was successfully imported into the project Analyzing schema objects A summary of the import operation has been saved to the log file c users administrator prototype documents yvisual studio 2010 Projects Database4 Database4 Import Data tier Application log Files AccountingDB_dacpac_20100124035613 log ies 7 56 14 PM Click Finish to exit Previous Next gt Gancel FIGURE 3 4 Reviewing the results when importing an existing DAC into Visual Studio 2010 In Schema View navigate to the dbo schema navigate to the Tables Views and Stored Procedures nodes and verify that the objects created are now in the data tier application Data tier developers and database administrators interested in working in Visual
293. te papers which will be published shortly Ross is a former SQL Server MVP is well known in the worldwide SQL Server community and frequently speaks at technology conferences and user groups around the world He has recently spoken at the North American PASS Community Sum mit SQL Connections European PASS SQL BITS and Microsoft Prior to joining Microsoft Ross was a managing partner and principal consultant at Conver gent Computing CCO where he was responsible for designing and implementing technol ogy solutions for organizations with a global presence Some of his customers included eBay McAfee Yahoo Gilead Sciences Ross Stores The Sharper Image McDonald s CIBC Radio Shack Wells Fargo and TD Waterhouse You can follow and contact Ross on Twitter RossMistry Stacia Misner is the founder of Data Inspirations www datainspirations com which delivers global business intelligence BI consulting and education services She is a consultant educator mentor and author specializing in business intelligence and performance management solutions that use Microsoft technologies Stacia has more than 25 years of experience in information technology and has focused exclusively on Microsoft BI technologies since 2000 She is the author of Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Reporting Services Step by Step Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Reporting Services Step by Step Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Edi a tion Start Now and Microso
294. te tenes Complex Event Processing Applications StreamInsight Highlights Streamlnsight Architecture 2 0 0 eee eens Data Structures The CEP Server Deployment Models Application Development 0 00 cece eee eee Event Types Adapters Query Templates Queries Query Template Binding The Query Object The Management Interface 0 eee eee ee Diagnostic Views Windows PowerShell Diagnostics 135 136 ERN 137 137 138 142 Seana 142 142 143 143 Contents xi xii CHAPTER 9 Reporting Services Enhancements New Data Sources 0 ee ccc ee eee nes Expression Language Improvements 00 Combining Data from More Than One Dataset Aggregation Conditional Rendering Expressions Page Numbering Read Write Report Variable Layout Control caserna ai e Eid ete Ree ae Duc dees Pagination Properties Data Synchronization Text Box Orientation Data Visualization 0 0 0 0 cc ccc ccc ee eee ees Data Bars Sparklines Indicators Maps Reusability wsccieicecesdeustoeeis ited ee destee eb ae eee Shared Datasets Cache Refresh Report Parts Atom Data Feed Report Builder 3 0 0 0 00 cece cece nets Edit Sessions The Report Part Gallery Report Access and Management 000 eee Report Manager Improvements Report Viewer Improvements Improved Browser Support RDL Sandboxing SharePoint Integration 00 eee eee Improved Inst
295. te the value of the information each list view column holds But in the case of the Managed Instances view DBAs can gain an even greater appreciation by also ac cessing the Managed Instances viewpoint tabs to better understand their present infrastruc ture and to better prepare for a successful consolidation The Managed Instances Detail Tabs The Managed Instances viewpoint includes tabs for additional viewing The tabs are located at the bottom of the viewpoint and consist of a CPU Utilization The CPU Utilization tab illustrated earlier in Figure 5 7 displays historical information of CPU utilization for a selected managed instance of SQL Server according to the interval specified on the left side of the display area DBAs can change the display intervals for the graphs by selecting one of these options e 1 Day Displays data in 15 minute intervals e 1Week Displays data in one day intervals e 1 Month Displays data in one week intervals e 1Year Displays data in one month intervals Two linear graphs are presented next to each other The first graph shows CPU utiliza tion based on the managed instance of the SQL Server and the second graph displays data based on the computer associated with the managed instance Storage Utilization The next tab displays storage utilization for a selected man aged instance of SQL Server as depicted in Figure 5 8 Data is grouped by either database or volume When the Database option button is select
296. templates The way you use these objects depends on the development model you choose When you develop using the explicit server development model you explicitly create and register all of these objects and can reuse these objects in multiple applications In the implicit server development model you concentrate on the development of the query logic and rely on the CEP server to act as an implicit host and to create and register the necessary objects TIP You can locate and download sample applications by searching for StreamInsight at CodePlex http www codeplex com Event Types An event type defines events published by the event source or consumed by the event con sumer You use event types with a typed adapter or as objects in LINQ expressions that you use in query templates You create an event type as a NET Framework class or structure by using only public fields and properties as the payload fields like this public class sampleEvent public string eventId get set public double eventValue get set An event type can have no more than 32 payload fields Payload fields must be only scalar or elementary CLR types You can use nullable types such as int instead of int The string and byte types are always nullable You do not create an event type when your application uses untyped adapters for scenar ios that must support multiple event types For example an input adapter for tables in a SQL 150 Complex Event Pr
297. ters CEP Engine Standing Queries oee CEP Application at Run Time Static reference data Output Adapters Event stores KPI dashboards Pagers and and databases and SharePoint UI monitoring devices Event Targets FIGURE 8 1 Streamlnsight architecture Input Adapters The input adapters translate the incoming events into the event format that the CEP engine requires You can create a typed adapter if the source produces a single event type only but you must create an untyped adapter when the payload format differs across events or is un known in advance In the case of the typed adapter the payload format is defined in advance with a static number of fields and data types when you implement the adapter By contrast an untyped adapter receives the payload format only when the adapter binds to the query as part of a configuration specification In the latter case the number of fields and data types can vary with each query instantiation CHAPTER 8 Complex Event Processing with Streaminsight Output Adapters The output adapters reverse the operations of the input adapters by translating events into a format that is usable by the target device and then sending the translated data to the device The development process for an output adapter is very similar to the process you use to develop an input adapter Query Instances Standing queries receive the stream of data from an input adapter apply business l
298. the data is successfully uploaded NOTE Do not become alarmed if no data is displayed in the dashboard and viewpoints in the Utility Explorer Content pane it can take up to 45 minutes for data to appear at first All subsequent uploads generally occur every 15 minutes A beneficial post installation task is to confirm the successful creation of the UMDW This can be done by using Object Explorer to verify that the sysutility_mdw database exists on the SQL Server instance At this point you can modify database settings such as the initial size of the database autogrowth settings and file placement based on the capacity planning exercises discussed in the UCP Sizing and Maximum Capacity Specifications section earlier in this chapter Enrolling SQL Server Instances After you have established a UCP the next task is to enroll an instance or instances of SQL Server into a SQL Server Control Point Similar to deploying a Utility Control Point this task is accomplished by using the Enroll Instance Wizard in SSMS or by leveraging Windows Power Shell The high level steps affiliated with enrolling instances into the SQL Server UCP include choosing the UCP to utilize specifying the instance of SQL Server to enroll selecting the ac count to run the utility collection set reviewing prerequisite validation results and reviewing your selections The enrollment process then begins by preparing the instance for enrollment The cache directory
299. the example Wholesale is in the ProductGroup entity which in turn is a domain based attribute of the ProductCategory entity of which Compo nents is a member Likewise the ProductCategory entity is a domain based attribute of the ProductSubCategory entity which contains Forks as a member The base entity Product includes ProductSubCategory as a domain based attribute Regardless of hierarchy type each hierarchy contains all members of the associated enti ties When you add change or delete a member all hierarchies to which the member belongs will also update to maintain consistency across hierarchies A collection is an alternative way to group members by selecting nodes from existing explicit hierarchies as shown in Figure 7 3 Although this example shows only leaf members a collection can also contain branches of consolidated members and leaf members You can combine nodes from multiple explicit hierarchies into a single collection but all members must belong to the same entity Master Data Services Collection USBIKE2WRK explicit hierarchy Geography BM collections To add items to the collection drag items from the Hierarchy pane to the Explicit Hierarchy Geography non mandatory Members pane Sa i A Eal P EMembers BK R64Y 38 Road 550 W YLO 38 BK R64Y 40 Road 550 W YLO 40 BK R64Y 42 Road 550 W YLO 42 I BK R64Y 44 Road 550 W YLO 44 BK R64Y 48 Road 550 W YLO 48 GL H102 S Half Finger Gloves S
300. the new instance when possible PowerPivot for SharePoint 201 202 SharePoint Farm Web front end Excel Web Access Application server Browser Excel Calculation E View reports i Excel 2010 with PowerPivot View or create reports PowerPivot database FIGURE 10 12 PowerPivot for SharePoint Architecture Analysis Services in VertiPaq Mode To support users without the PowerPivot for Excel client Excel Services connects to a server instance of Analysis Services in VertiPaq mode to process PowerPivot workbooks and respond to user queries This type of Analysis Services server instance enables in memory data storage on a large scale for multiple users and provides rapid processing of large PowerPivot data sets Just like the in memory version of VertiPaq mode on the client the server version uses data compression and columnar storage Unlike a standard Analysis Services instance that you manage using SQL Server Management Studio you manage Analysis Services in VertiPaq mode exclusively in SharePoint Central Administration In response to requests for PowerPivot data Analysis Services loads the cube into memory where it stays until no longer required or until SharePoint monitoring detects that contention for resources has reached a threshold requiring action You can monitor system performance through usage data as explained later in this chapter Analysis Services loads the PowerPivot data from the workbook as
301. the number of line of business applications tends to increase Furthermore data from these systems flows into reporting and analytical solutions Often the net result of this proliferation of data is duplication of data related to key business entities even though each system might maintain only a subset of all possible data for any particular entity type For example customer data might appear in a sales application a customer relationship management application an accounting application and a corporate data warehouse However there might be fields maintained in one ap plication that are never used in the other applications not to mention information about customers that might be kept in spreadsheets independent of any application None of the systems individually provide a complete view of customers and the multiple systems quite possibly contain conflicting information about specific customers 125 126 This scenario presents additional problems for operational master data in an organiza tion because there is no coordination across multiple systems Business users cannot be sure which of the many available systems has the correct information Moreover even when a user identifies a data quality problem the process for properly updating the data is not always straightforward or timely nor does fixing the data in one application necessarily ripple through the other applications to keep all applications synchronized Compounding the pro
302. ti lityInstance ConnectionContext SqlConnectionObject Utility Microsoft Sq lServer Management Utility Utility Connect SqIlStoreConnection Instance new object Type Microsoft SqlServer Management Smo Server ComputerName ManagedInstanceName InstanceConnection new object Type Microsoft Sq Server Management Sdk Sfc Sq1lStoreConnection Instance ConnectionContext SqlConnectionObject ManagedInstance Utility EnrollInstance InstanceConnection ProxyAccount ProxyPassword The Managed Instances Dashboard After you have enrolled all of your instances associated with a UCP you can review the Man aged Instances dashboard as illustrated in Figure 2 5 to gain quick insight into the health and utilization of all of your managed instances The Managed Instances dashboard is cov ered in Chapter 5 Consolidation and Monitoring Multi Server Administration R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio olx Fie Edit View Tools Window Community Help LL new Query D D D DllD p ASR g _ Utility Explorer Content x Production Utility SQL2KER2 01 INSTANCEO1 Managed Instances L Server Instance Name SQL2K8R2 O1 INSTANCEO1 M sn E Ge SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEOZ Global Ge 5QL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEOS o C T Global Ge 5QL2K8R2 01 INSTANCED4 C 9 Global ie SQL2K8R2 O1 INSTANCEOS 7 T 3 Global i soLzkerz o2 Ge SQL2KeR2 02 INST
303. tial that equal numbers of table rows are assigned to each distribution There will almost always be some data skew among the distributions If the amount of data skew becomes too large the parallel system continues to run but query times might be affected You might have to experiment with several approaches before finding the best distributed strategy A distributed strategy does not affect other table options that you might want to implement For example you can still define partitions and clustered indexes as needed DDL Extensions To support the MPP architecture Parallel Data Warehouse includes a SQL language that works with appliance databases This SQL language includes data definition language DDL statements to create and alter databases tables views and other entities on the appliance You use these statements to operate on these objects as if they were on a single database instance Behind the scenes Parallel Data Warehouse allocates space for the objects and instantiates them across nodes Data Management CHAPTER6 117 118 CREATE DATABASE The CREATE DATABASE statement has a set of options for supporting distributed and repli cated tables You determine how much space you need in total for the database for replicated tables distributed tables and logs Parallel Data Warehouse manages the database according to your specifications Here is an example of the statement you use in Parallel Data Warehouse to create a new data
304. tilization Policies e File Space Utilization Policies e Computer CPU Utilization Policies e Storage Volume Utilization Policies Property Details The Property Details tab shown in Figure 5 14 displays generic property details for the selected deployed data tier application Property detail infor mation consists of database name deployed date trustworthiness collation com patibility level encryption enabled state recovery model and the last time data was successfully updated R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio BEE File Edit View Tools Window Community Help 1 iQ new query DID D DIDIS ESIR g Utility Explorer Content Object Explorer Details x Production Utility SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCE01 Deployed Data tier Applications Name ication CPU Computer CPU Fie Volume Space _ Policy Type Instance Name E AccountingDB 7 o o Override SQL2KBR2 01 INSTANCEOS I AdventureWorks2005 C 3 C Override SQL2K8R2 03 INSTANCE03 EE Adventur 2 7 g O SQLZK ISTANCEO3 2 FinanceDi E o SQL2Ki i Human Resources T Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO4 T Northwind C O Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEG3 fy Test 7 O T Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO3 fy Test g O T Override SQL2KBR2 01 INSTANCEO1 i Test C O T O Override SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCE02 4 gt CPU Utilization Storage Utilization Policy Details Property Details Property Details for AdventureWorks2008R2 Database Name Adventur
305. tilized Computer CPU 3 0 9 Underutilizec S Data with Underutilized Underutilized Instance CPU CS 014 Underutilized Data tier Application CPU CL 0 9 Underutilized Database Files Of 4 Underutilized Database Files _____ __ 0 9 Underutilized Storage Volumes l 0 14 Underutilized Storage Volumes 0 9 Underutilized Computer CPU l 0 14 Underutilized Computer CPU 0 9 ge Utilization History Interval 145 3 GB E Used space 145 3 GB 1Day C Free space 104 5 GB O 1 week 116 3 GB cae 1 Month 87 2 GB C 1 Year 58 1 GB 29 1 GB 0 0 GB 12 00 AM 6 00 AM FIGURE 5 6 The SQL Server Utility dashboard 90 CHAPTER 5 Consolidation and Monitoring The SQL Server Utility dashboard includes the following information m Utility Summary Found in the center of the top row of the Utility Explorer Content pane this section is the first place to look It displays the number of managed instances of SQL Server and the number of deployed data tier applications managed by the SQL Server Utility Use the Utility Summary section to gain quick insight into the number of objects being managed by the SQL Server Utility In Figure 5 6 there are 14 managed in stances and nine deployed data tier applications displayed in the Utility Summary section NOTE After you have reviewed the summary information it is recommended that you analyze either the managed instances or deployed data tier applicat
306. tion For additional information on registering a DAC definition see the Registering a Data Tier Application section later in this chapter Follow these steps to extract a data tier application 1 In Object Explorer connect to a SQL Server instance containing the database that houses the data tier application to be extracted 2 Expand the Database folder and select a database to extract 3 Invoke the Extract Data Tier Application Wizard by right clicking the desired database selecting Tasks and then selecting Extract Data Tier Application 4 Review the information on the Introduction page and then click Next to begin the ex traction process Select the Do Not Show This Page Again check box if you do not want the Introduction page displayed in the future when using the wizard 5 On the Set Properties page illustrated in Figure 3 5 complete the DAC properties by typing in the application name version and description as described here m Application name This refers to the name of the DAC Although this name can be different from the DAC package file it is recommended that you make it similar enough so that it still identifies the application m Version The DAC version identification helps developers manage changes when working in Visual Studio In addition the version information helps identify the DAC package version used during deployment The DAC version information is stored in the msdb database and can be viewed in S
307. tion is located in the top right corner of the Utility Explorer Content pane Health status is illustrated in a pie chart and has four possible designations e Well Utilized The number of deployed data tier applications that are not violat ing resource utilization policies is displayed e Overutilized The number of deployed data tier applications that are violating resource overutilization policies is displayed A deployed data tier application is marked as overutilized if any of the following conditions are true m CPU resources for the deployed data tier application are overutilized m CPU resources of the computer that hosts the SQL Server instance are overutilized m Storage volumes associated with the deployed data tier application are overutilized m The deployed data tier application contains data or log files that reside on volumes with overutilized storage space e Underutilized The number of deployed data tier applications that are violating resource underutilization policies is displayed A deployed data tier application is marked as underutilized if any of the following conditions are true m CPU resources for the deployed data tier application are underutilized m CPU resources of the computer that hosts the SQL Server instance are underutilized m Storage volumes associated with the deployed data tier application are underutilized m The deployed data tier application contains data or log files that reside on volume
308. tion settings You can still consolidate databases if you have these types of requirements however you may need more instances or physical hosts to support your consolidation needs For example the diagram in Figure 5 2 illustrates the consolidation of many databases onto a single physi cal host running three instances of SQL Server whereas the diagram in Figure 5 3 represents an alternative in which many databases are consolidated onto many instances residing on two separate physical hosts Consolidation and Monitoring Sa GG ee es I SQLInstance03 n SS eee SQLInstanceO2 GG li SOLI nsta nceO1 MU MM FIGURE 5 2 Consolidating many databases onto a single physical host running three instances of SQL Server SQLInstanceO2 GG SQLInstanceO1 FIGURE 5 3 Consolidating many databases onto multiple physical hosts running multiple instances of SQL Server GG SQLInstance03 UM BRAA Consolidating SQL Server Through Virtualization Another SQL Server consolidation strategy attracting interest is virtualization Virtualiza tion s growing popularity is based on many factors including its ability to significantly reduce total cost of ownership TCO and the number of physical servers within an infrastructure Benefits include the need for fewer physical servers as well as lower licensing costs At the heart of all the excitement over virtualization is Live Migration This
309. tive you can filter a numeric column by value as shown in Figure 10 5 For example you can use the Between operator to apply a filter that will select rows with a value in a range that you specify Self Service Analysis with PowerPivot UnitPrice 7 4 Sort Smallest to Largest l Sort Largest to Smallest Clear Sort From UnitPrice UnitPrice Number Filters fai Equals W Select All Does Not Equal Z 1 3282 1 374 Greater Than 2 29 Greater Than Or Equal To 2394 Less Than 2 495 7 2 7445 Less Than Or Equal To 2 8942 Between Z 2 994 w 3 975 Custom Filter FIGURE 10 5 Filtering a numeric column by value IMPORTANT Use of a filter is not a security measure Although a filter effectively hides data from a presentation anyone who can open the Excel workbook can also clear the filters and view the data if he or she has installed the PowerPivot add in Columns As part of the data preparation process you might need to make changes to column proper ties On the Home tab of the PowerPivot ribbon you can access tools to make some of these changes as shown in Figure 10 6 For example you can select a column in the table and then use the ribbon buttons to change the formatting of the column You can also change the width of the column for better viewing of its contents or you can freeze a co
310. to SQL Server 2008 R2 by using the same server You can also use the side by side method to upgrade to SQL Server 2008 on a single server Post migration Pre migration Data is migrated N from N s i SQL Server 2005 erver P on Server 1 S Migration SQL Server 2005 to j SQL Server 2008 R2 rd on Server 2 SQL Server 2005 Server 2 SQL Server 2008 R2 FIGURE 1 6 Side by side migration from SQL Server 2005 to SQL Server 2008 R2 Side by Side Migration Pros and Cons The biggest benefit of a side by side migration over an in place upgrade is the opportunity to build out a new database infrastructure on SQL Server 2008 R2 and avoid potential migra tion issues with an in place upgrade The side by side migration also provides more granular control over the upgrade process because it is possible to migrate databases and components independent of one another The legacy instance remains online during the migration pro cess All of these advantages result in a more powerful server Moreover when two instances are running in parallel additional testing and verification can be conducted and rollback is easy if a problem arises during the migration CHAPTER1 SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements However there are disadvantages to the side by side strategy Additional hardware might need to be purchased Applications might also need to be directed to the new SQL Server 2008 R2 instance and it might not be a best practice
311. tputStream from e in inputStream select new myEventType x e x 1 y e y 1 Filtering You use a filtering operation on a stream when you want to apply operations to a subset of events and discard all other events All events for which the expression in the where clause evaluates as true pass to the output stream In the following example the query selects events where the value in field x equals 5 var outputStream from e in inputStream where e x select e Application Development 155 156 Event Windows A window represents a subset of data from an event stream for a period of time After you create a stream of windows you can perform aggregation TopK a LINQ operation described later in this chapter or user defined operations on the events that the windows contain For example you can count the number of events in each window You might be inclined to think of a window as a way to partition the event stream by time However the analogy between a window and a partition is useful only up to a point When you partition records in a table a record belongs to one and only one partition but an event can appear in multiple windows based on its start time and end time That is the window that covers the time period that includes an event s start time might not include the event s end time In that case the event appears in each subsequent window with the final window covering the period that includes the event s end ti
312. tudio M E File Edit View Tools Window Community Help i Drenove D D D DIDIE A SR g Utility Explorer Content Object Explorer Details x Production Utility SQL2KBR2 01 INSTANCEO1 Managed Instances is L Server Instance Name Insta Computer File Space Volum Policy T al ie SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEOL o o Override Ge SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEOZ 3 g O Override Es SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEOS Override Ge SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCED4 C C Override 950 1 YINSTANCEOS O i SqL2KeR2 02 3 t Global Es SQL2K8R2 02 INSTANCED2 T T D Global ie SQL2KBR2 02 INSTANCEDS r eo CPU Utilization Storage Utiization Policy Details property Details Utilization policies for SQL2K8R2 O1 INSTANCEOS When you modify a policy there will be a delay before the resource utilization policy indicator is updated in the viewpoints Ley 3 Managed Instance CPU Utilization Policies e C Use the global policy Expand All CPU of a managed instance is overutilized when it is greater than 70 E Collapse All amp CPU of a managed instance is underutilized when it is less than 0 Override the global policy GE CPU of a managed instance is overutilized when it is greater than 0a x CPU of a managed instance is underutilized when itis less than 10d z File Space Utilization Policies O Storage Yolume Utilization Policies Ready
313. tumbling window events define the boundaries of a snapshot window Consider the example in Figure 8 4 At the start of the first event a new snapshot window starts That window ends when the second event starts and a second snapshot window starts and includes both the first and second event When the first event ends the second snapshot also ends and a third snapshot window starts Thus the start and stop of an event triggers the start and stop of a window Because events determine the size of the window the Snapshot method takes arguments as shown in the following code which counts events in each window var outputStream from eventWindow in inputStream Snapshot select new count eventWindow Count Time Input gi Snapshot events windows e2 el el 2 2 e3 FIGURE 8 4 Snapshot windows 158 Complex Event Processing with StreamInsight Count windows are completely different from the other window types because the size of the windows is variable When you create windows you provide a parameter n as a count of events to fulfill within a window For example assume n is 2 as shown in Figure 8 5 The first window starts when the first event starts and ends when the second event starts because a count of 2 events fulfills the specification The second event also resets the counter to 1 and starts a new window The third event increments the counter to 2 which ends the second window Time Input Count events windows
314. twork a private network and shared storage however instead of using physical servers for each node in the SQL Server failover cluster each node is virtualized through Hyper V Organizations taking advantage of guest failover clustering with SQL Server 2008 R2 must have the physical host running Hyper V on Windows Server 2008 R2 and the configurations must be certified through the Server Vir tualization Validation Program SVVP Likewise the guest operating system must be Windows Server 2008 R2 and the virtualization environment must meet the requirements of Windows Server 2008 R2 failover clustering including passing the Validate a Configuration tests NOTE When implementing failover clusters you can combine both physical and virtual nodes in a single failover cluster solution Figure 4 3 illustrates a multiple instance guest failover cluster running SQL Server 2008 R2 on Windows Server 2008 R2 SQLNode is a virtual machine running on the server called Hyper V01 which is a Hyper V host and SQLNode2 is a virtual machine running on the Hyper V02 Hyper V host foo Pati Network SQL Cluster Instance02 Pd SQL Cluster Instance01 P Physical Server V Virtual Server FIGURE 4 3 A two node guest failover cluster Failover Clustering with Windows Server 2008 R2 CHAPTER4 67 NOTE Guest clustering is also supported when Hyper V is on Windows Server 2008 However Windows Server 2008 R2 provides Live Migration for moving virtua
315. u interpret what you see Instead a sparkline is intended to provide a sense of direction by showing upward or downward trends and varying degrees of fluctuation over the represented time period Sales Amount 2005 20 235 5 2006 92735 2007 296533 lt 2008 161 794 _ 7 2005 7 395 349 g 2006 19 956 015 2007 25 551 775 2008 13 399 243 a 2005 34 376 F 2006 485587 2 2007 871 864 2008 386 013 g 2005 615 475 i a 2006 3 610 092 E 2007 5 482 497 2008 2 091 012 _ ag FIGURE 9 12 Sparklines Indicators Another way to display data in a report is to use indicators In previous versions of Report ing Services you could produce a scorecard of key performance indicators by uploading your own images and then using expressions to determine which image to display Now you can choose indicators from built in sets as shown in Figure 9 13 or you can custom ize these sets to change properties such as the color or size of an indicator icon or even by using your own icons Reporting Services Enhancements Select Indicator Type xj Directional Symbols Fot 4 T v Shapes Laat Iaat Ja at Ratings 4 Y DA t AOE XI yk JOX J oom L JAN ee0e 09000 Ratings xko WII He We all all all al ea ad ad OOOI O ae ee oe FIGURE 9 13 Indicator types After selecting a set of indicators you associate the set with a value in your dataset or with an expression such
316. uary 2010 marketing meeting FIGURE 7 10 A transaction annotation Master Data Services Integration Master Data Manager also provides support for data integration between MDS and other ap plications Master Data Manager includes an Integration Management area for importing and exporting data However the import and export processes here are nothing like those of the SQL Server Import And Export wizard Instead you use the Import page in Master Data Man ager to manage batch processing of staging tables that you use to load the MDS database and you use the Export page to configure subscription views that allow users and applications to read data from the MDS database Importing Master Data Rather than manually entering the data by using Master Data Manager you can import your master data from existing data sources by staging the data in the MDS database You can stage the data by using either the SQL Server Import And Export wizard or SQL Server Inte gration Services After staging the data you use Master Data Manager to process the staged data as a batch MDS moves valid data from the staging tables into the master data tables in the MDS database and flags any invalid records for you to correct at the source and restage You can use any method to load data into the staging tables The most important part of this task is to ensure that the data is correct in the source and that you set the proper values for the columns that
317. ure 5 7 which communicates the health state and resource utilization information for numerous items in cluding the CPU storage and policies for each managed instance of SQL Server R Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio _ of x File Edit View Tools Window Community Help Anwon Oy Bs D DIDIS A S wh Utility Explorer Content Object Explorer Details x Production Utility SQL2KBR2 01 INSTANCEO1 Managed Instances SQL Server Instance Name Instance CPU Computer CPU File Space Volume Space Policy T ie SQL2KBR2 O1 INSTANCEOL O Override le SQL2K R2 O14INSTANCEO2 3 O G Override i SQL2K8R2 O1 INSTANCEO3 E lt 7 g Override ie SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCED4 C 3 Override Ge SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEOS O Override i sQLzkerz 02 7 7 Global i SQLZKSR2 02 INSTANCED2 o F o Global Ge SQL2K8R2 02 INSTANCEDS ie SQL2KeR2 02 INSTANCEO4 i SQL2kKeR2 02 INSTANCEOS 3 E SQL2KeR2 03 T T T Override i SQL2KeR2 03 INSTANCEO2 E g g O Override Ge SQL2K R2 O3 INSTANCEO3 D T Override Es SQL2KeR2 03 INSTANCEO4 C Gg Override CPU Utilization Storage Utilization Policy Details Property Details CPU Utilization for SQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCEO1 m Interval 1 vay 100 0 100 0 Instance Computer Fie Eea 80 0 80 0 C 1 Month C 1 Year 60 0 60 0 40 0 40 0 20 0 20 0 0 0 0 0
318. use Global Policies for Managed Instances Specify the CPU utilization policies for all managed instance of SAL Server CPU of a managed instance of SOL Server is overutiized when it is greater than CPU of a managed instance of SOL Server is underutilized when it is less than Specify the file space utilization policies for all managed instances of SQL Server Data file Disk space of a data file is overutilized when it is greater than Disk space of a data file is underutilized when it is less than Log file Disk space of a log file is overutilized when it is greater than dil alal Disk space for a log file is underutilized when it is less than Specify the computer CPU utilization policies for all managed instances of SQL Server CPU of a computer is overutilized when it is greater than alal CPU of a computer is underutilized when it is less than Specify the storage volume utilization policies for all managed instances of SQL Server Disk space of a storage volume is overutilized when it is greater than alal Disk space of a storage volume is underutilized when it is less than Lean more about global resource utilization policies for managed instances of SOL Server Restore Defaults Apply Discard FIGURE 1 4 Configuring overutilization and underutilization global policies for managed instances For more information on consolidati
319. using Coffing DW which is distributed with each appliance installation This tool op erates much like SQL Server Management Studio SSMS by allowing you to navigate through an object explorer to find tables and views and to run queries interactively Scalable Data Warehousing Business Intelligence Integration Parallel Data Warehouse integrates with the SQL Server business intelligence BI compo nents Integration Services Reporting Services and SQL Server Analysis Services Integration Services Integration Services is the ETL component of SQL Server You use Integration Services pack ages to extract and merge data from multiple data sources and to filter and cleanse your data before loading it into the data warehouse In SQL Server 2008 R2 Integration Services includes the SQL Server Parallel Data Warehouse connection manager and the SQL Server Parallel Data Warehouse Destination as new components that you use in Integration Services packages to load data into Parallel Data Warehouse This new data destination provides op timized throughput and very fast performance because it loads data directly and quickly into the target database You also have the option to deploy packages to the Landing Zone Reporting Services You can use Parallel Data Warehouse as a data source for reports that you develop for Re porting Services using the Report Designer in Business Intelligence Development Studio or SQL Server 2008 R2 Report Builder 3
320. uster Events status type Autostart Services and applications view f g SQlServer2008R2 M01 g A m B Nodes resini TES Detailed view for Nodet FI Node1 Start virtual machines p NODE2 Turn off virtual machines Pause amp Cluster shared Volumes Stak down vital mactines er ca Storage Betas E B Networks Show the critical events for this 3 Cluster Events e migrate virtual er node 1 Live migrate to node NODE2 More Actions gt Quick migrate virtual machine s to another node gt Manage virtual machine View gt Refresh H Hp SQLServer2008R2 M01 Move virtual machine s to another node Show the critical events for this application Add storage Add a resource Connect to virtual machines Start virtual machines Turn off virtual machines Disable auto start Show Dependency Report Delete shut down virtual machines Save virtual machines Properties Help BA Live migrate virtual machine to gt Bg Cancel in progr B Quick migrate virtual machine s gt 1 Service or applic live migration SQLServer2008R2 VM01 EA J Manage virtual machine Status Auto Start Preferred Owners BP Move virtual machine s to anot gt Online Yes lt none gt 5 Show the critical events for this Alerts Storag
321. utStream outputStreamTemp Union inputStream3 User defined Functions When you need to perform an operation that the CEP server does not natively support you can create user defined functions UDFs by reusing existing NET functions You add a UDF to the CEP server in the same way that you add an adapter You can then call the UDF anywhere in your query where an expression can be used such as in a filter predicate a join predicate or a projection Application Development 161 162 Query Template Binding The method that the CEP server uses to instantiate the query template as a standing query depends on the development model that you use If you are using the explicit server devel opment model you create a query binder object but you create an event stream consumer object if you are using the implicit server development model The Query Binder Object In the explicit server development model you first create explicit input and output adapter objects Next you create a query binder object as a wrapper for the query template object on the CEP server which in turn you bind to the input and output adapters and then you call the CreateQuery method to create the standing query as shown here QueryBinder myQuerybinder new QueryBinder myQueryTemplate myQuerybinder BindProducer querySource myInputAdapter inputConf EventShape Point myQuerybinder AddConsumer queryResult myOutputAdapter outputConf EventShape Po
322. ve 2010 01 12 getting started with the web services api in sql server 2008 r2 master data services aspx Matching Functions MDS also provides you with several new Transact SQL functions that you can use to match and cleanse data from multiple systems prior to loading it into the staging tables Mdq NGrams Outputs a stream of tokens known as a set of n grams in the length specified by n for use in string comparisons to find approximate matches between strings Mdq RegexExtract Finds matches by using a regular expression Mdq RegexlsMatch Indicates whether the regular expression finds a match by using a regular expression Programmability 143 Mdq RegexlsValid Indicates whether the regular expression is valid Mdq RegexMask Converts a set of regular expression option flags into a binary value Mdq RegexMatches Finds all matches of a regular expression in an input string Mdq RegexReplace Replaces matches of a regular expression in an input string with a different string Mdq RegexSplit Splits an input string into an array of strings based on the posi tions of a regular expression within the input string Mdq Similarity Returns a similarity score between two strings using a specified matching algorithm Mdq SimilarityDate Returns a similarity score between two date values Mddq Split Splits an input string into an array of strings using specified characters as a delimiter NOTE For more information about the MDS
323. ve owners The example companies organizations products domain names e mail addresses logos people places and events depicted herein are fictitious No association with any real company organization product domain name e mail address logo person place or event is intended or should be inferred This book expresses the author s views and opinions The information contained in this book is provided without any express statutory or implied warranties Neither the authors Microsoft Corporation nor its resellers or distributors will be held liable for any damages caused or alleged to be caused either directly or indirectly by this book Acquisitions Editor Devon Musgrave Developmental Editor Karen Szall Project Editor Maria Gargiulo Editorial Production Online Training Solutions Inc Technical Reviewer Rozanne Whalen Technical Review Services provided by Content Master a member of CM Group Ltd Cover Tom Draper Design dedicate this book to my wife and children who make it all worthwhile Ross Mistry I dedicate this book to my husband and best friend Gerry StaciA MISNER Contents at a Glance Introduction xvii PART I DATABASE ADMINISTRATION CHAPTER 1 SQL Server 2008 R2 Editions and Enhancements 3 CHAPTER 2 Multi Server Administration 21 CHAPTER 3 Data Tier Applications 41 CHAPTER 4 High Availability and Virtualization Enhancements 63 CHAPTER 5 Consolidation and Monitoring 85 PART Il BUSI
324. ve turned to Microsoft SQL Server because it embodies the Microsoft Data Platform vision to help organiza tions manage any data at any place and at any time The biggest challenges organiza tions face with this increase of SQL Server installations have been in management With the release of Microsoft SQL Server 2008 came two new manageability features Policy Based Management and the Data Collector which drastically changed how da tabase administrators managed SQL Server instances With Policy Based Management database administrators can centrally create and enforce polices on targets such as SQL Server instances databases and tables The Data Collector helps integrate the collection analysis troubleshooting and persistence of SQL Server diagnostic information When introduced both manageability features were a great enhancement to SQL Server 2008 However database administrators and organizations still lacked manageability tools to help effectively manage a multi server environment understand resource utilization and enhance collaboration between development and IT departments SQL Server 2008 R2 addresses concerns about multi server management with the introduction of a new manageability feature the SQL Server Utility The SQL Server Util ity enhances the multi server administration experience by helping database administra tors proactively manage database environments efficiently at scale through centralized visibility into resou
325. ver Instance Name Instance CPU Computer CPL File Space Volume Space _ Policy Type ie SQL2KBR2 03 v 3 t Global ie SQL2kaR2 03 INSTANCED2 3 3 O Global QLZKER2Z 03 INSTANCEDS J J g t Global le SQL2K8R2 O3 INSTANCE04 o o O Global CPU Utilization Storage Utilization Policy Details Property Details Property Details for SQL2K8R2 03 INSTANCEO3 Intel R Core TM i7 CPU 920 2 67GHz 2672 2 2024 6 1 7600 10 50 1352 Enterprise Evaluation Edition 64 bit False D Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MS5QL10_S0 INSTANCEO3 MSSQL Backup SQL Latini _General_CP1_CI_AS False English United States 1 31 2010 11 05 AM FIGURE 5 10 The Property Details tab on the Managed Instances viewpoint Using the Data Tier Application Viewpoint As it is when you use the Managed Instances viewpoint to monitor health status and resource utilization for managed instances of SQL Server using the Data Tier Applications viewpoint enables you to monitor deployed data tier applications managed by the SQL Server Utility Control Point NOTE The viewpoints associated with this section may at first appear identical to the information under the previous section The Managed Instances Detail Tab However the policies and files in this section do differ from those described previously sometimes slightly and sometimes significantly Similar to the Managed Instance viewpoint DBAs can access the Data Tier Applications view an
326. ver UCP Follow these steps when using SSMS In SSMS connect to the SQL Server 2008 R2 Database Engine instance in which the UCP will be created Launch the Utility Explorer by selecting View and then selecting Utility Explorer On the Getting Started tab click the Create A Utility Control Point UCP link or click the Create Utility Control Point icon on the Utility Explorer toolbar The Create Utility Control Point Wizard is now invoked Review the introduction mes sage and then click Next to begin the UCP creation process If you want you can select the Do Not Show This Page Again check box Multi Server Administration On the Specify The Instance Of SQL Server page click the Connect button to specify the instance of SQL Server in which the new UCP will be created and then click Con nect in the Connect To Server dialog box Specify a name for the UCP as illustrated in Figure 2 3 and then click Next to continue B Create Utility Control Point Jor Specify the Instance of SQL Server Introduction Help Specify Instance Specify the instance of SQL Server where the new utility control point UCP will be Specify Account created Instance Validation Creating a UCP on the specified instance of SQL Server will provision the UCP schema jobs and policies and enable the utility collection set Summary SQL Server Instance Name UCP Creation SSQL2K8R2 01 INSTANCE 01 Connect Utility Control Point Name for
327. vice Analysis with PowerPivot or right arrow to bring a different thumbnail into the preview area You can also switch to All Documents view which allows you to see all the workbooks in a standard document library view You can then download a document check documents in or out or perform any other activity that is permissible within a document library The Data Feed Library A special type of document library is available for the storage of Atom svc documents also known as data service documents You can share these documents for the use of other PowerPivot authors who want to import data feeds into PowerPivot tables You can create a data service document in the document library by specifying the URL request to the data service or Web application that serves data on request The URL request should include a parameter that requests data in the Atom 1 0 format Data Refresh In addition to the content management support another good reason to share a PowerPivot workbook in SharePoint is to manage the data refresh process Usually data that appears in a PowerPivot table changes from time to time To keep the workbook up to date and relevant you must periodically update the data You can automate this process by assigning a refresh schedule to each data source in the workbook The data refresh feature is not enabled by default When you enable data refresh a timer job runs every minute on the PowerPivot server This job is a trigger for the
328. xt button is disabled on the Validation And Summary page if one or more objects are not supported by the DAC These items need to be addressed before the wizard can proceed You usually remedy these issues by removing the unsupported objects from the database and rerunning the wizard The Build Package page is the final screen and is used to monitor the status of the extraction and build process affiliated with the DAC package file The wizard extracts a DAC from the selected database creates the package in memory and saves the file to the location specified in the previous steps You can also click the links in the Result column to review the outcome and any additional corresponding steps if required and then click Save to capture the entire report Click Finish to complete the data tier ap plication extraction process Extracting a Data Tier Application with SQL Server Management Studio R 51 52 Installing a New DAC Instance with the Deploy Data Tier Application Wizard After the DAC package has been created using the data tier application project template in Visual Studio 2010 the Extract Data Tier Application Wizard in SQL Server Management Studio or Windows PowerShell commands the next step is to deploy the DAC package to a Database Engine instance running SQL Server 2008 R2 This can be achieved by using the Deploy Data Tier Application Wizard located in SQL Server Management Studio During the deployment process the wizard re
329. you open it for editing Product t X 4 RB tear Consolidated Supply Chain Marketing Inventory Packaging System Name Adjustable Race AR 5381 BA 8327 BB 7421 Bearing Ball V LL Bottom Bracket ML Bottom Bracket BB 8107 ojjan HL Bottom Bracket BB 9108 Code Display Code Code Name C Name Code SafetyStockLevel ReorderPoint 1000 750 1000 750 500 375 500 375 500 375 ajeje o o DaysToManufacture StandardCost 0 23 97 44 95 53 94 FIGURE 7 8 Business rule validation Data Stewardship 133 134 Transaction Logging MDS uses a transaction log as shown in Figure 7 9 to capture every change made to master data including the master data value before and after the change the user who made the change not shown the date and time of the change and other identifying information about the master data You can access this log to view all transactions for a model by version in the Version Management area of Master Data Manager If you find that a change was made erroneously you can select the transaction in the log and click the Undo button above the log to restore the prior value The transaction log also includes the reversals you make when using this technique Versions Transactions Model Product z Version VERSION_1 z Filter Criteria Y x Column Operator Criteria Transactions Type Explicit Hierarchy Entity Attribute Member Code
330. your organization such as an enterprise resource planning ERP system a customer relationship management CRM system or a data warehouse After you commit a model version your master data is available to other applications through subscription views in the MDS database Any system that can consume data from SQL Server can use these views to access up to date master data To create a subscription view in Master Data Manager you start by assigning a name to the view and selecting a model You then associate the view with a specific version or a ver sion flag TIP You can simplify the administration of a subscription view by associating it with a version flag rather than a specific version As the version of a record changes over time you can simply reset the flag for the versions If you don t use version flags a change in version requires you to update every subscription view that you associate with the version which could be a considerable number Next you select either an entity or a derived hierarchy as the basis for the view and the format of the view For example if you select an entity you can format the view to use leaf members consolidated members or collection members and the associated attribute val ues When you save the view it is immediately available in the MDS database to anyone or any application with Read access to the database For example after creating the Product Master Data Services subscription view in
331. zed Storage Volumes MEME 1 2 9 Overutilized Computer CPU 0 14 Overutilized Computer CPU 0 9 th Underutilized Underutilized Instance CPU CONN 014 Underutilized Data tier Application CPU COON 0 9 Underutilized Database Files 0 14 Underutilized Database Files 1 0 9 Underutilized Storage Volumes iOS 14 Underutilized Storage Yolunes OD Underutilized Computer CPU 0 14 Underutilized Computer CPU l 0 9 Utilization orage Utilization m Interval 145 3 GB E Used space 145 3 GB 1Day Free space 104 5 GB 116 3 GB C 1week 1 Month ia 1 Year 58 1 GB 29 1 GB 0 0 GB 12 00 AM 6 00 AM 12 00 PM Ready a FIGURE 1 1 Monitoring resource utilization with the SQL Server Utility dashboard and viewpoints Consolidation management Organizations can maximize their investments by consolidating SQL Server resources onto fewer systems DBAs in turn can bolster their consolidation efforts through their use of SQL Server Utility dashboards and view points which easily identify underutilized and overutilized SQL Server resources across the SQL Server Utility As illustrated in Figure 1 2 dashboards and viewpoints make it simple for DBAs to realize consolidation opportunities start the process toward elimi nating underutilization and resolve overutilization issues to create healthier pristine environments SQL Server 2008 R2 Enhancements for DBAs CHAPTER 1 5 Bi Microsoft

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  VPAP™ ST / VPAP™ S Information Guide  RCA T13066 TV VCR Combo User Manual  FANTEC MM-HDBTL    Manual de Instrucciones del Controlador Design Pro LED de Kichler      Polycom SoundPoint IP 430 de User's Manual  Manual - Nintendo of Europe  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file